INGLÊS EEAR

Prévia do material em texto

Inglês – EEAr
Sérgio Gama
SUMÁRIO
Capítulo 1
Verbal Tenses ....................................................................................................................... 03
Capítulo 2
Pronouns .............................................................................................................................. 22
Capítulo 3
Prepositions ......................................................................................................................... 29
Capítulo 4
Passive Voice ........................................................................................................................ 36
Capítulo 5
Multiple-Meaning Words .................................................................................................. 41
Capítulo 6
Expressions: Make, Do, Take & Get ................................................................................. 49
Capítulo 7
Expressions - Idioms ........................................................................................................... 52
Capítulo 8
Words of Connection ......................................................................................................... 58
Capítulo 9
Nouns .................................................................................................................................... 62
Capítulo 10
Indefinite Articles ................................................................................................................ 66
Capítulo 11
The – Definite Article .......................................................................................................... 68
Capítulo 12
Quantifier Adverbs ............................................................................................................. 71
Inglês – EEAr
Sérgio Gama
Capítulo 13
Indefinite Pronouns ............................................................................................................ 74
Capítulo 14
Relative Pronouns .............................................................................................................. 76
Capítulo 15
Comparatives of Superiority ............................................................................................ 78
Capítulo 16
Modal Verbs ......................................................................................................................... 79
Capítulo 17
Question Tags ..................................................................................................................... 85
Capítulo 18
Conditional Cases ............................................................................................................... 86
Capítulo 19
Direct and Indirect Speech ............................................................................................... 88
Capítulo 20
Provas de Concursos Similares ........................................................................................ 90
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
3
Capítulo 1
TEMPOS VERBAIS PRINCIPAIS (SÃO DEZ !!)
FÓRMULAS / SINTAXES
1) SIMPLE PRESENT = Presente do indicativo.
a) Afirmativo: 
I / You / We / They + BASE-FORM
He / She / It + BASE-FORM + “S”
(BASE-FORM = BF)
b) Interrogativo: 
DO + I / You / We / They + BF
DOES + He / She / It + BF
c) Negativo: 
I / You / We / They + DON’T + BF
He / She / It + DOESN’T + BF 
d) Palavras que o amarram: (QUALQUER expressão de 
frequência
lately, frequently, usually, generally, sometimes, never, 
always, rarely, seldom, on sundays, twice a year, once a 
week, five times a month ...
 ⇒ BIZU PARA O ACRÉSCIMO DO "-S" na 3ª pessoa do singular 
(HE / SHE / IT):
a- Sujeito + infinitivo (sem “to”)
b- nas 3as pessoas do singular (“he”, “she”, “it”) acrescentamos 
“S” ao verbo. - Regra geral
c- se o verbo terminar em : o, ch, s, ss, sh, x ou z acrescen-
tamos ES ao verbo, quando o sujeito for “he”, “she” ou “if’. 
Observo o quadro: 
Verbos terminados em:
SUJEITO SUJEITO
I/you/we/they he/she/it
o
ss
sh
ch
x
z
do, go
dress, cross
finish, wash
watch, teach
fix, relax
buzz
does, goes
dresses, crosses
finishes, washes
watches, teaches
fixes, relaxes
buzzes
d- se o verbo terminar em “Y” precedido de consoante, 
trocamos o “Y” por “I” acrescentamos “ES”. Veja o quadro:
Verbos terminados 
em:
SUJEITO SUJEITO
I/you/we/they he/she/it
consoante + y
try
study
cry
dry
tries
studies
cries
dries
 ⇒ Atenção! 
O mesmo NÃO acontece com os verbos terminados em “y” 
antecedido de vogal. 
Exemplos
John playS the piano very well 
Mary stayS at school in the morning 
My wife payS the phone bill at the bank
e- o verbo “to have” tem a forma “HAS” para as 3as pessoas
I/YOU/WE/THEY HAVE
HE/SHE/IT HAS
EXERCÍCIOS
1 - Fill in the blanks with the verbs given in the present tense:
a) The bank __________ (open) at 11:00 and _________ (close) 
at 4 P.M.
b) We always _____________ (study) biology but sometimes 
Peter _____________ (study) mathematics too.
c) My brother _____________ (finish) work at 5 P.M. but my 
husband _____________ (finish) his at 6 P.M.
d) Joe _____________ (do) his homework by himself but Mary 
and Ann _____________ (need) some help.
e) My niece _____________ (teach) science at a private school 
and the children.
f) Success _____________ (bring) money and sometimes a 
lot of problems too.
g) The words “bookstore” and “bookshop” _____________ 
(have) the same meaning.
h) The baby _____________ (have) blue eyes and blond hair. 
He _____________ (have) a pretty face.
2 - Fill in the blanks using the verbs given:
i) The world ____________ (need) peace and love.
j) It ____________ (not-need) war and hate.
k) The earth ________ (go) around the sun. It ________(not-go) 
around the moon.
l) Mexicans ____________ (speak) Spanish. 
m) They ____________ (not-speak) Italian.
n) July ____________ (come) between June and August. It 
____________ (not-come) between May and September.
o) My aunt Lucy _______ (not-drink) but she _____ (smoke) a lot.
p) I ______ (have) a bicycle but I ______ (not-use) it very often.
q) We ____________ (brush) our teeth after meals but Sandra 
_________ (brush) hers when she _______ (wake) up and 
before she ________ (go) to bed.
3 - Fill in the blanks using the auxiliary verb (do / does), the subject 
and the main verb according to the answer.
Example:
When does Alice go to school?
She goes to school in the morning.
a) When ___________________________ basketball?
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSES INGLÊS – EEAr
4
b) They play basketball in the evening.
c) What ___________________________?
d) Radiation causes many types of skin cancer.
e) What ___________________________?
f) Insecticides damage plants.
g) What ___________________________ to protect?
h) People have to protect sea life.
i) How often __________________________ the piano?
j) The children play the piano frequently.
k) What time ___________________________?
l) Our class begins at 8 o’clock.
m) Who _______________________ through the window?
n) She sees her boyfriend through it.
o) ______________________ to the hairdresser every Friday?
p) No, Helen goes to the hairdresser every Saturday.
4 - Read these texts and fill in the blanks with the verbs given using 
the affirmative, negative and interrogative forms when necessary:
Text 1:
THE BROWNS - A STRANGE FAMILY
Mrs. Brown (01) ______ (not-talk) to her husband, Mr. Brown, be-
cause he (02) ______ (to be) rude to her. Mr. Brown (03) ______ 
(not-talk) to his daughter, Norma, because she (04) ______ 
(smoke) cigars. Norma (05) ______ (not-talk) to her brother, Ro-
ger, because he (06) ______ (bite) his nails. Roger (07) ______ 
(not-talk) to his other sister, Gladys, because she (08) ______ (eat) 
meat. Gladys(09) ______ (not-talk) to her other brother, David, 
because he (10) ______ (play) loud pop music. David (11) ______ 
(not-talk) to his mother because she (12) ______ (not-like) his 
girlfriend. Mrs. Brown will not talk to Gladys and Norma because 
they (13) ______ (have) strange boyfriends. Roger and David 
(14) ______ (not-talk) to their father because he (15) ______ 
(not-lend) them the car.
 ⇒ Para ampliar seu vocabulário, consulte o dicionário! Ar-
ranje um COLLINS e faça o seu vocabulário !!!
Text 2:
THE ROLE OF THE FATHER
The modem father (01) ______ (look) after his children and (02) 
______ (help) in the house, even if his wife (03) ______ (not-go) 
out to work. The division between the roles of the mother and 
the father (04) ______ (be) no longer very clear, and dad (05) 
______ (do) his share of child care: he (06) ______ (can) change 
the baby, (07)______ (dress) the children or (08) ______ (make) 
the dinner. The new image of the father (09) ______ (be), of 
course, completely different from the still dominant, traditional, 
dad, who (10) ______ (represent) authority, (11) ______ (be) the 
head of the household and (12) ______ (make) all the “important” 
decisions.. His wife (13) ______ (be) responsible for the domestic 
side of family life while he (14) ______ (be) the one who (15) 
______ (advise) or (16) ______ (punish) as necessary.
5 - Complete the following sentences with the correct form of have.
a) They __________ a new car.
b) She __________ one sister and two brothers.
c) He and I __________ many things in common.
d) John __________ a new wristwatch.
e) We __________ many friends in New York.
f) Helen __________ a headache.
g) Grace __________ a date with George tonight.
h) Mr. Gonzalez __________ a strong foreign accent.
i) Both brothers __________ red hair.
j) Harry’s dog __________ a long tail.
k) Mr. Smith’s office __________ three large windows.
l) I __________ a charge account in Gimbel’s Department Store.
m) Both children __________ bad colds.
n) Dr. Smith __________ many patients.
o) Mr. Jones, the lawyer, __________ many clients.
p) We __________ a large library at school.
q) The secretary __________ a new typewriter.
r) The building __________ two entrances.
s) I __________ brown eyes.
t) You __________ green eyes.
6 - Give the correct present tense form of the verb in parentheses.
a) We (read) the newspaper in class every day.
b) He (come) to school by bus.
c) I always (walk) to school.
d) The children (play) in the park every afternoon.
e) I (eat) lunch in the cafeteria every day.
f) Helen (work) very hard.
g) I (like) to sit in the sun.
h) The dog (chase) the cat all around the house.
i) Mr. Smith (work) for Eastern Airlines.
j) Helen generally (sit) at this desk.
k) We always (play) tennis on Saturdays.
l) He always (prepare) his homework carefully.
m) They (eat) lunch together every day.
n) Some girls (use) too much make-up.
o) They (take) a lot of trips together.
p) We always (travel) by car.
q) They (attend) church every Sunday.
r) He (speak) several foreign languages.
7 - Give the correct present tense form of the verb in parentheses.
a) John (go) there twice a week.
b) Helen (do) the work of two people.
c) I always (try) to arrive everywhere on time.
d) George always (try) to do the same thing.
e) The teacher (wish) to speak with you.
f) Mr. Walker (teach) English and mathematics.
g) They (go) to the movies twice a week.
h) We (watch) television every night.
i) Mary (play) the piano very well.
j) He (study) in the same class as I.
k) The nurse (watch) the child in the park.
l) The mother (kiss) both boys-bye every morning.
m) I (catch) cold very often.
n) Helen also (catch) cold very often.
o) He (do) everything that she asks.
p) He (carry) the books in a briefcase.
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
5
8 - Change the following sentences so that they begin with He 
instead of I.
a) I like to study. (He likes to study.)
b) I work hard.
c) I’m a good student.
d) I own a car.
e) I’m an American.
f) I enjoy each English class.
g) I want to learn English.
h) I have a new wristwatch.
i) I speak English.
j) I wish to learn English.
k) I watch television every night.
l) I pass Mr. Smith on the street every day.
m) I always go to school by bus.
n) I try to learn tem new words every day.
o) I do a lot of favors for John.
p) I play the violin very well.
q) I have two brothers and two sisters.
r) I always sit at this desk.
s) I write the new words on the blackboard.
t) I study English three times a week.
9 - Change the subject of each sentence in b. to They.
a) They like b) They work
c) They are d) They own
e) They are f) They enjoy
g) They want h) They have
i) They speak j) He wish
k) They watch l) They pass
m) They always go n) They try
o) They do p) They play
q) They have r) They always sit
s) They write t) They study
10 - Change the subject of each sentence in b. to She.
Obs.: VERB TO BE
TO BE (Present Tense)
AFIRMATIVA INTERROGATIVA NEGATIVA
I am Am I? I am not
You are Are you? You are
He is Is he? He is not
She is Is she? She is not
It is Is it? It is not
We are Are we? We are not
You are Are You? You are not
They are Are they? They are not
11 - Supply the correct form of the present tense of TO BE.
a) He ................ a good student.
b) They ................ old friends.
c) I ................ a student.
d) John ................ absent.
e) We ................ both students.
f) The weather today ................ good.
g) The sky ................ clear.
h) Henry and John ................ brothers.
i) She and I ................ cousins.
j) Mr. Smith ................ sick today.
k) He ................ a businessman.
l) Mr. Jones ................ a lawyer.
m) Today ................ Wednesday.
n) She and John ................ both good students.
o) The policeman on the corner ................ busy with the traffic.
p) He and I ................ old friends.
12 - Change the following sentences from affirmative to negative.
a) They are in Europe now.
b) John is angry with you.
c) Hen and she are cousins.
d) He is very studious.
e) Both sisters are tall.
f) She is a clever girl.
g) They are members of the country club.
h) He is a good tennis player.
i) Mr. Smith is a pilot with American Airlines.
j) The sky is very cloudy today.
k) The office of the principal is on the first floor.
l) It is cold today.
m) She is a tall, blonde girl.
n) It is a good movie.
o) The stamps are in my desk.
p) He is in his office.
13 - Change all the sentences ABOVE to questions.
THERE IS / THERE ARE (EXISTE / EXISTEM / HÁ)
Utilizamos there is no singular e there are no plural. (Observar 
que aqui o tempo usado é o PRESENTE) 
There is a book on the table.
There are books on the table.
There is one man in the room.
There are several men in the room.
14 - Complete the following sentences with There is or There are.
a) _________ a new moon tonight.
b) _________ someone at the door.
c) _________ a lot of students absent today.
d) _________ a mailbox on the corner.
e) _________ three lamps in the room.
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSES INGLÊS – EEAr
6
f) _________ two large windows in the room.
g) But _________ only one door.
h) _________ a lot of English classes in our school.
i) _________ nobody in the room now.
j) _________ a letter on the table for you.
k) _________ several beautiful parks in this city.
l) _________ twelve months in a year.
m) _________ only one cloud in the sky.
n) _________ no one at home.
o) _________ dishes but no silverware on the table.
p) _________ no stores in this section of town.
THERE IS / THERE ARE
(Negative and Questions Forms)
Formamos a negativa com there is e there are acrescentando-
-se not após o verbo.
There is a man in the room.
There is NOT man in the room. (Thereisn’t)
There are two students absent today.
There are NOT two students absent today.
As formas contratas isn’t and aren’t são geralmente utilizadas.
Formamos a interrogativa com there is e there are colocando-
-se o verbo TO BE antes da partícula THERE.
There is a window in the room.
Is there a window in the room?
There are some magazines on the table.
Are there magazines on the table?
15 - Change the following sentences from affirmative to negative. Use 
the contracted forms.
a) There is a flag at the top of the building.
b) There are two lamps in the room.
c) There is a pillow on each bed.
d) There are two policemen on each corner.
e) There is a big parade today.
f) There are several doctors in this area.
g) There are tem new words in this lesson.
h) There is a message for you on the hall table.
i) There are enough chairs for everyone.
j) There are plenty of good seats available.
k) There is a comfortable chair in each room.
l) There is a good restaurant near here.
m) There are telephones in every room.
n) There are four seasons in a year.
o) There are three syllables in each of the words.
2) SIMPLE PAST = Pretérito Perfeito ou Pretérito 
Imperfeito.
Verbos Irregulares Fazem parte de uma tabela de 155 verbos 
(esse número pode variar de uma tabela para a outra !!) que 
devem ser MEMORIZADOS !!! 
Verbos Regulares Pode ser QUALQUER verbo que NÃO 
FAÇA PARTE DA TABELA CITADA. Levam o sufixo -ED tanto 
para fazerem o passado (simple past) quanto para o particípio. 
Logo, para se saber se um verbo é irregular ou não, tem que 
ver se ele faz parte da tabela de verbos irregulares. Se não 
fizer parte dela, ganhará o sufixo -ED. (Sentiu que vai ter que 
decorar a tabela !!)
a) Afirmativo: Sujeito + TABELA (irregulares) OU SUFIXO 
-ED (regulares)
b) Interrogativo: DID + Sujeito + BF
c) Negativo: Sujeito + DIDN’T + BF
d) Palavras que o amarram: 
QUALQUER expressão de tempo que dê a ideia de que A 
AÇÃO JÁ ACABOU TOTALMENTE:
yesterday, the day before yesterday, five years ago, last week 
/ night / month / year ..., in 1979, ...
Base Form PAST Particípio Português
arise arose arisen surgir
awake awoke awakened acordar
be was / were been ser, estar
bear bore born tolerar, suportar
beat beat beaten bater, derrotar
become became become tornar-se
befall befell befallen amaldiçoar
begin began begun começar
behold beheld beheld contemplar
bend bent bent dobrar, curvar
beset beset beset atormentar
bet bet bet apostar
bid bid / bade bid / bidden oferecer
bind bound bound amarrar, fixar
bite bit bitten morder, roer
bleed bled bled sangrar
blow blew blown soprar
break broke broken quebrar
breed bred bred procriar
bring brought brought trazer
build built built construir
burn burnt/ed burnt/ed queimar
burst burst burst explodir
buy bought bought comprar
cast cast cast atirar, lançar
catch caught caught alcançar, pegar
choose chose chosen escolher
cling clung clung aderir a (ideia)
come came come vir
cost cost cost custar
creep crept crept arrastar-se
cut cut cut cortar
deal dealt dealt negociar, tratar
dig dug dug cavar
do did done fazer
draw drew drawn desenhar
dream dreamed/t dreamed/t sonhar
drink drank drunk beber
drive drove driven dirigir
dwell dwelt dwelt habitar / morar
eat ate eaten comer
fall fell fallen cair
feed fed fed alimentar
feel felt felt sentir (-se)
fight fought fought lutar
find found found achar
flee fled fled fugir
fling flung flung arremessar
fly flew flown voar
forbid forbade forbidden proibir
forecast forecast forecast predizer
forget forgot forgotten esquecer
forgive forgave forgiven perdoar
forsake forsook forsaken abandonar
freeze froze frozen congelar
get got gotten / got conseguir
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
7
give gave given dar
go went gone ir
grind ground ground moer
grow grew grown crescer, cultivar
hang hung hung pendurar
have had had ter
hear heard heard ouvir
hide hid hidden esconder (-se)
hit hit hit bater, atingir
hold held held segurar, abraçar
hurt hurt hurt ferir (-se)
keep kept kept guardar, manter
know knew known saber
lay laid laid pôr
lead led led conduzir, guiar
lean leant/ed leant/ed encostar
leave left left partir, deixar
lend lent lent emprestar
let let let permitir, deixar
lie lay lain deitar, jazer
light lit lit iluminar
lose lost lost perder
make made made fazer
mean meant meant significar
meet met met encontrar
mistake mistook mistaken enganar
mow mowed mown/ed moer
pay paid paid pagar
quit quit quit deixar de
read read read ler
ride rode ridden montar, andar a
ring rang rung tocar, soar
rise rose risen subir, aumentar
run ran run correr
saw sawed sawn serrar
say said said dizer
see saw seen ver
seek sought sought procurar
sell sold sold vender
send sent sent enviar
set set set pôr, estabelecer
shake shook shaken balançar, agitar
shear sheared shorn/ed tosquiar / tosar
shed shed shed descamar
shine shone shone brilhar
shoot shot shot atirar, disparar
show showed shown mostrar
shrink shrank shrunk encolher
shut shut shut fechar
sing sang sung cantar
sink sank sunk afundar
sit sat sat sentar (-se)
slay slew slain matar (literário)
sleep slept slept dormir
slide slid slid escorregar
sling slung slung atirar/arremes.
slit slit slit rachar, cortar
smell smelt(ed) smelt(ed) c h e i r a r / p e r f u m a r
sow sowed sown/ed semear
speak spoke spoken falar
speed sped sped acelerar
spend spent spent gastar
spill spilt/ed spilt/ed derramar
spin spun spun girar
spit spat / spit spat / spit cuspir
split split split rachar, dividir
spoil spoilt/ed spoilt/ed estragar
spread spread spread espalhar
spring sprang sprung pular, saltar
stand stood stood ficar de pé
steal stole stolen roubar
stick stuck stuck colar, tolerar
sting stung stung picar, furar
stink stank stunk feder
stride strode stridden andar rápido
strike struck struck bater, atingir
string strung strung esticar
strive strove striven esforçar-se por
swear swore sworn jurar, xingar
sweep swept swept varrer
swim swam swum nadar
swing swung swung balançar
take took taken pegar, tomar
teach taught taught ensinar
tear tore torn rasgar
tell told told dizer, contar
think thought thought pensar, achar
throw threw thrown jogar / lançar
thrust thrust thrust empurrar
tread trod trodden pisar
wake woke woken acordar
wear wore worn vestir, usar
weave wove woven tecer
wed wed wed casar (-se)
weep wept wept chorar
wet wet wet molhar
win won won vencer, ganhar
wind wound wound ventar
wring wrung wrung torcer / apertar
write wrote written escrever
 ⇒ BIZU PARA O ACRÉSCIMO DO -ED aos verbos irregulares:
a - Infinitivo (sem “to”) – BF + ED, para todas as pessoas 
do verbo.
b - se o verbo já terminar em “e”, por exemplo, o verbo “to 
dance”, só acrescentamos “d”.
verbo “to dance” - we danced
verbo “to prepare - They prepared
verbo “te believe” - She believed
c - se o verbo terminar em “y” antecedido por uma conso-
ante, tiramos o “y” e acrescentamos “ied”.
to study - I studied
d - se o verbo for um monossílabo terminado em consoante 
- vogal - consoante (C.V.C.), dobramos a consoante final antes 
de acrescentar “ed”.
to stop - she stopped
to drop - we dropped
e - se o verbo terminar em consoante - vogal - consoante 
(C.V.C.), TIVER DUAS OU MAIS SÍLABAS E O ACENTO TÔNICO 
RECAIR NA ÚLTIMA SÍLABA, dobramos a consoante final antes 
de acrescentar “ed”.
to occur - it occurred
to prefer - he preferred
16 - Fill in the blanks using the past tense of the verbs given:
a) They _________ (drop) an atomic bomb on Hiroshima in 1945.
b) The bus __________ (stop) here five minutes ago.
c) We __________ (open) the window because it was very hot 
in the bedroom.
d) Arriving at the factory 90 minutes late, a worker __________ 
(apologise) for the delay with the excuse that his alarm clock 
was 30 minutes slow. But “what __________ (happen)to the 
other 60 minutes?” __________ (ask) the man’s boss...
e) The child’s father was so grateful that he __________ (offer) 
to teach Bill to be a telegraph operator. Bill __________ 
(accept) the offer.
f) The boys _______ (not-want) to go shopping with us because 
they _______ (prefer) to watch the football on television.
g) Martin __________ (look) forward to a peaceful weekend 
but his daughter __________ (arrive) with all her friends from 
the aerobic class.
h) When Molly __________ (injure) her ankle she __________ 
(try) to explain the situation to her parents.
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSES INGLÊS – EEAr
8
17 - Read this text and fill in the blanks with the past tense of the 
following verbs:
(01) to have
(02) to be
(03) to be
(04) to be
(05) to speak (negative)
(06) can
(07) to make
(08) to have
(09) to know
(10) to use
(11) to question
(12) to see
(13) to know (negative)
(14) to ask
(15) to begin
(16) to answer
(17) to be
(18) to come 
(19) to become
(20) to ask
(21) to answer
King Frederick, The Great of Prussia, (01) __________ a very fine 
army, and none of the soldiers in it were finer than his Giant Guards, 
who (02) __________ all extremely tall men. It (03) __________ 
difficult to find enough soldiers for these Guards, as there were 
not many men who (04) __________ tall enough.
Frederick had made it a rule that no soldier who (05) __________ 
German (06) __________ be admitted to the Giant Guards, and 
this (07) __________ the work of the officers who had to find 
men for them even more difficult. When they (08) __________ 
to choose between accepting or refusing a really tall man who 
(09) __________ no German, the officers (10) __________ to 
accept him, and then teach him enough German to be able to 
answer if the King (11) __________ him.
Frederick sometimes used to visit the men who were on guard 
around his castle at night to see if they were doing their job properly, 
and it was his habit to ask each new one that he (12) ______ three 
questions: “How old are you?”, “How long have you been in my 
army?” and “Are you satisfied with your food and your conditions?”
The officers of the Giant Guards therefore used to teach new 
soldiers who (13) __________ . German the answers to these 
three questions.
One day, however, the King (14) __________a new soldier the 
questions in a different order. He (15) __________ with “How 
long have you been in my army?”, The young soldier immediately 
(16) __________, “Twenty-two years, Your Majesty”. Frederick 
(17) __________ very surprised. “How old are you then?”, (18) 
__________ the answer. At this Frederick (19) __________ very 
angry. “Am I a fool or are you one?” he (20) __________. “Both, 
Your Majesty”, the soldier (21) __________ politely.
Reproduzido do vestibular da Fundação Carlos Chagas, RS, 1974.)
both: ambos, um e outro
properly: corretamente, adequadamente
army: exército
therefore: portanto
rule: regra, regulamento
however: entretanto, contudo
even: até (mesmo)
angry: zangado, bravo
to refuse(ed): recusar
politely: educadamente
18 - Read this text. Sai Song has problems with the simple past of the 
verbs. Correct her mistakes.
“I (01) am born in 1947 in Shangai. In 1950 my parents (02) bring me 
and my three brothers to Taiwan to live. We (03) live in kaohsiung, 
near the sea. My mother and father, now dead, (04) make prawn 
mee (noodles) and (05) sell it to workers in the town. It (06) is hard 
life. I (07) don’t go to school until I (08) am 10. I 09 study very hard 
and (10) get a job in a shop when I (11) am 16. On March 1966 I (12) 
get married to Harry. We (13) get a flat in town. Harry (14) is a sailor 
at that time. His parents (15) come from Beijing in 1967. In April 9th, 
1970 we (16) have a son Kelvin. Last year we (17) travel to Australia 
and New Zealand. We (18) like it very much.”
Now, correct her mistakes.
“I (01) ___________ born in 1947 in Shangai. In 1950 my parents (02) 
___________ me and my three brothers to Taiwan to live. We (03) 
___________ in kaohsiung, near the sea. My mother and father, now 
dead, (04) ___________ praw mee (noodles) and (05) _________ 
it to workers in the town. It (06) _________ hard life. I (07) ________ 
to school until I (08) _______ 10. I (09) _________ very hard and 
(10) ___________ a job in a shop when I (11) ___________ 16. On 
March 1966 I (12) _________ married to Harry. We (13) ________ 
a flat in town. Harry (14) _________ a sailor at that time. His parents 
(15) ___________ from Beijing in 1967. In April 9th, 1970 we (16) 
___________ a son Kelvin. Last year we (17) _________ to Australia 
and New Zealand. We (18) ___________ it very much.”
19 - Choose the best alternative to complete these sentences:
1. The Genovese sailors ___________ the first to spread the use 
of heavy cotton pants.
a) was b) were c) isn’t d) to be
2. Last afternoon, the old woman ___________ upstairs, 
___________ a bath and ___________ on her bathrobe.
a) go - take – put b) went - took – put
c) goes - takes - puts d) gone - taken - put
3. They _________ for a walk in the park but I ________ because 
I get tired easily.
a) went - didn’t b) go – do
c) left – did d) got - went not
4. When he became ill his uncle _______ him a violin. He ______ 
playing and _______ at his school every day after lessons.
a) given - enjoys – practice b) gave - enjoy - practised
c) gives - enjoys – practices d) gave - enjoyed - practised
5. We ___________ a great time last weekend. It ___________ 
a lovely day, so in the evening we ___________ into town.
a) had - was – cycled b) were - is – cycle
c) have - is - cycle d) has - are - cycles
6. We _________ to go for a pizza last Sunday. We were looking 
at the menu when a waiter _________ food all over me. While 
the manager was apologising, another waiter dropped a pile 
of pizzas on to my friend. Of dropped a pile of pizzas on to my 
friend. Of course, we _________ to pay the meal.
a) decide - drops - don’t have
b) decided - dropped - didn’t have
c) decided - droped - had not
d) decided - dropped - not had
7. I remember the day you got engaged. We were having tea in 
the garden when you _____ out of the house and ______ us.
a) go – say b) come – tell
c) came – told d) went - said
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
9
8. Martin ________ the result of the election as he ________ 
driving to work, so he ________ me when he ________ there.
a) heard - was - phone - gotten b) hears - is - phoned - gets
c) hear - is - phone - get d) heard - was - phoned - got
9. Ms Grant nearly _______ when her parachute failed to open 
during a sky-dive yesterday. She was lucky. She ________ a 
soft landing in some trees. She ________ her left hip and both 
arms, but she is happy to be alive. “I _______ believe it when I 
_________ I was still alive!” she _______ the reporters yesterday.
a) dies - has - breaks - can’t - find - tells
b) died - have - break - am not able to - find - tell
c) die - had - broken - wasn’t able to - found - told 
d) died - had - broke - couldn’t - found - told
20 - Supply the correct past tense form to be in the following sentences.
a) Helen ___________ absent from school yesterday.
b) I ___________ in the same class as William last year.
c) We ___________ good friends for many years.
d) The door of the office ___________ open.
e) But both windows ___________ closed.
f) John ___________ not in school yesterday.
g) He and his brother ___________ sick.
h) I ___________ busy all day yesterday.
i) We ___________ tired after our long walk.
j) I ___________ hungry after so much exercise.
k) There ___________ a lot of students absent from class 
yesterday.
l) John ___________ present, but I ___________ not.
m) The weather yesterday ___________ very warm.
n) We ___________ pleased to receive your letter.
o) The teacher ___________not satisfied with my composition.
p) The exercises in the last lesson ___________ easy.
q) We ___________ not able to get in touch with Mr. Reese 
yesterday.
r) The wind last night ___________ very strong.
21 - Supply the past tense form of the verbs in parentheses.
a) We (work) in our garden all day yesterday.
b) I (listen) to the radio until twelve o’clock last night.
c) Helen and I (talk) on the telephone yesterday.
d) He always (want) to learn English.
e) They (live) in France for many years.
f) We (expect) to go to Europe in June.
g) The meeting (last) about two hours.
h) We (change) trains in Philadelphia.
i) We both (like) the movie last night very much.
j) I (wait) almost two hours for Helen.
k) They (paint) their house white.
l) She (arrive) late for class.
m) We (watch) television until eleven o’clock last night.
n) She (study) in our class last semester.
o) I (mail) your letter on my way to work.
p) We both (learn) how to swim many years ago.
22 - Supply the past tense of the verbs in parentheses.
a) Mr. and Mrs. Price (come) to visit us last night.
b) They (tell) us about their plans for their new home.
c) The weather was warm so we (sit) on our front porch.
d) I (put) your hat and coat in the next room.
e) The meeting last night (begin) at eight and ended at ten.
f) I stayed home last night and (write) several letters.
g) I (see) Helen on the street yesterday.
h) This book (cost) two dollars.
i) I (have) my lunch in the cafeteria at noon.
j) The man (drink) a lot of wine at the party last night.
k) I (give) John your message and also (tell) him my ideas on 
the subject.
l) Mr. Reese finally (sell) his house.
m) I (hear) the President speak on television last night.
n) My father (know) Mr. Evans well even before he (come) to live 
in this town.
o) Helen (feel) very well yesterday but today she feels sick again.
p) We (go) to the park yesterday and (get) wet when it rained.
q) I (read) that novel several years ago.
23 - Change the following sentences from affirmative to negative. Use 
the contracted form.
a) He prepared his lesson well. (He didn’t prepare his lesson well.)
b) They told us about it.
c) He put the books on the table.
d) They stayed in Mexico City for two weeks.
e) I saw Helen yesterday.
f) He planned his work well.
g) The meeting lasted a long time.
h) The book cost two dollars.
i) The woman fainted in the street.
j) I knew him very well.
k) They sold their home.
l) I spoke with George about that matter.
m) She came to the meeting alone.
n) We sat together at the concert last night.
o) They went to Caracas by boat.
p) I gave her your message.
24 - Change the following sentences to questions.
a) He prepared his lesson well. (Did he prepare his lesson well?)
b) He gave her a lot of presents.
c) They stayed in Europe all summer.
d) She told them all about her trip.
e) He entered this class in February.
f) They went by plane.
g) He arrived home very late.
h) They came to the party together.
i) They knew each other as children.
j) He worked in that firm for many years.
k) She felt much better after her operation.
l) The meeting began on time.
m) He passed all his examinations.
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSES INGLÊS – EEAr
10
n) They put him in the advanced class.
o) He gave us his new telephone number.
p) The crowd waited a long time to see the President.
25 - Change the following sentences to questions beginning with the 
question word in parentheses.
a) He arrived at ten o’clock. (What time) 
 (What time did he arrive?)
b) They sold their home last week. (When)
c) The meeting began at eight-thirty. (What time)
d) The tickets cost three dollars. (How much)
e) He paid for the car by check. (How)
f) He invested ten thousand dollars in the stock market. (How much)
g) They sat in the first row. (In which now)
h) He spoke to them in French. (In what language)
i) The meeting lasted two hours. (How long)
j) It began at eight o’clock. (What time)
k) He telephoned her at two o’clock. (What time)
l) He went to New York to see some friends. (Why)
m) They mentioned it to him three or four times. (How many times)
n) They ate lunch in the school cafeteria. (Where)
o) He worked there for five years. (How many years)
p) He put the mail on Mr. Smith’s desk. (Where)
q) She waited for them for an hour. (How long)
r) They got home around midnight. (What time)
s) He walked to school with Mary. (With whom)
t) They went to the park after the lesson. (Where)
26 - Supply the correct past tense form of the verbs in parentheses.
a) The plane (leave) Buenos Aires last night at midnight.
b) Helen (bring) her cousin to the party last night.
c) I (forget) to bring my notebook to class this morning.
d) He (become) president of the company five years ago.
e) We (make) good time on our trip from Texas to Mexico City.
f) I (lose) my English book yesterday but (find) it later.
g) The two men (fight) bitterly over the division of the money.
h) The telephone (ring) twice three children to Mexico with them.
i) The Smiths (take) their three children to Mexico with them.
j) George (think) about his troubles continuously.
k) Last year Professor Jones (teach) us both English and mathe-
matics.
l) They (buy) the property in 1966 and (sell) it in 1972.
m) John (keep) part of the money and (give) the rest to his two 
brothers.
n) The police (do) their best but never (catch) the real bank 
robbers.
o) The woman (sing) in French; consequently, we (understand) 
none of the words.
p) We (stand) on the corner and waited for John for two hours.
3) WILL - FUTURE = Futuro do Presente
a) Afirmativo:
Sujeito + WILL + BF
b) Interrogativo: 
WILL + Sujeito + BF
c) Negativo: 
Sujeito + WON’T + BF
d) Palavras que o amarram: QUALQUER expressão de tempo 
que dê a ideia de FUTURO:
tomorrow, next week / month / year, within<in 2 weeks, 
at soon ...
27 - Write questions for these answers, using future tense (pay atten-
tion to the underlined words):
a) ____________________________________________
He won’t come tonight because he will be working.
b) ____________________________________________ 
She’ll be at home tomorrow morning.
c) ____________________________________________ 
The plane will take off in 15 minutes.
d) ____________________________________________ 
My relatives will arrive from the farm tomorrow.
e) ____________________________________________ 
We will meet the new neighbors at the station.
28 - Read the text below and fill in the blanks using the Simple Future 
of the verbs given:
1) to be 2) to do 3) to be
4) to have 5) there to be 6) to be
7) there to be 8) there to be (negative) 9) to blow
10) to end 11) to have 12) to be
13) to have 14) to have 15) to have
THE FUTURE
There are people who say that the future (01) ______wonderful: 
machines (02) ______all of our work; we (03) ______able to travel 
from New York to Paris in one hour; the world (04) ______one 
government, and (05) ______no war.
Others say that the future (06) ______terrible; (07) ______too 
many people; (08) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ enough food; we (09) 
__________ up the world with our weapons. And there are 
people who say that soon the world (10) __________ because 
we (11) __________ so many cars that no one (12) __________ 
able to move on the highways. They say we will all starve to death 
in our cars.
People worry about the future because of the problems that 
we (13) __________ to solve: population, urbanization, energy, 
pollution. We (14) __________ to decide what is essential to life 
on earth and what is essential to our survival. If we can make these 
decisions now, at least we (15) __________ a future.
(Adapted from “Challenge”)
29 - Complete the following sentences with the will future form of the 
verbs in parentheses. Use the contracted forms only. 
a) He__________ (call) you tomorrow. (He’llcall you tomorrow.) 
b) They __________ (see) us in the morning. 
c) I __________ (give) you that money tomorrow. 
d) She __________ (help) you with that work. 
e) Mary __________ (clean) off the table right away. 
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
11
f) The stores __________ (close) early today. 
g) I __________ (Ieave) the tip. 
h) Helen __________ (find) the book which you need. 
i) You __________ (spend) a lot of money there. 
j) John __________ (do) well in that job. 
k) The wind __________ (blow) that sign down. 
l) We __________ (meet) you in Grand Central Station. 
m) I __________ (pay) the bill. 
n) You __________ (Iearn) a great deal in that course.
o) We __________ (remain) in Mexico about a month.
30 - Change the following sentences to the past tense. 
a) He is in the elementary class. 
(He was in the elementary class.)
b) She is our new teacher. 
c) Mr. Smith is in Chicago. 
d) They are both good students. 
e) This is your seat. 
f) There are two tables in the room. 
g) We are very tired after the long drive. 
h) I am glad to be here. 
i) He is angry with us. 
j) The dog is happy to see you. 
k) Mr. Jones is out of town. 
l) Business is very good. 
m) The exercises are easy for you. 
n) There is no one in the office. 
o) The cafeteria is on this floor. 
p) We are interested in his progress. 
q) He is a bright student. 
r) The highway is very slippery. 
31 - Change the sentences above to the future with will.
a) He is in the elementary class.
(He’ll be in the elementary class.)
32 - Change the following sentences from affirmative to negative. Use 
the contracted form. 
a) They will arrive at three o’clock. 
(They won’t arrive at three o’clock.) 
b) We will tell John about it. 
c) I will be back in an hour. 
d) The weather will be cool tomorrow. 
e) He will be able to meet us later. 
f) These exercises will be easy for you. 
g) We will cat in the same restaurant again. 
h) You will get tired of that work. 
i) We will be there before Wednesday. 
j) He will do well in that job. 
k) They will sign the contract tomorrow. 
l) They will finish the work in April. 
m) The meeting will last an hour. 
n) The stores will close at noon today. 
o) lt will cost a lot of money to remodel that house. 
p) We will be ready to leave in an hour.
33 - Change the following sentences to questions. 
a) They’ll arrive on Wednesday. 
(Will they arrive on Wednesday?)
b) He’ll be back at three o’clock. 
c) The stores will be open until six o’clock. 
d) lt’ll cost two dollars to fix the lamp. 
e) The plant will die because oi lack of sunshine.
f) They’ll spend two months in France. 
g) She’ll meet us in Macy’s. 
h) They’ll pay their bill next week. 
i) The meeting will begin at eight o’clock. 
j) lt’ll last an hour. 
k) She’ll leave a message on the table for him. 
l) They’ll return in October. 
m) Them will be three new students in the class. 
n) The lesson will be over at three o’clock. 
o) They’ll write to us on Wednesday. 
p) He’ll take the children to the park. 
q) I’ll park the car near the hotel. 
r) They’ll stay in the Hotel Americana. 
34 - Change the sentences above to questions beginning wíth ques-
tion words. 
a) They’ll arrive on Wednesday. (When will they arrive?)
4) WOULD - CONDITIONAL = Futuro do Pretérito
a) Afirmativo: 
Sujeito + WOULD + BF
b) Interrogativo: 
WOULD + Sujeito + BF
c) Negativo: 
Sujeito + WOULDN’T + BF
d) Palavras que o amarram:
Este tempo verbal é diferente! Como ele denota a ideia 
de CONDIÇÃO, em geral virá com a palavra IF = SE:
Se eu tivesse dinheiro, viajaria - IF I had money, I WOULD 
TRAVEL.
5) PRESENT CONTINUOUS = 
Presente Contínuo (Estou falando, Estão escrevendo ...)
a) Afirmativo: I AM ⇔ You / We / They ARE ⇔ He / She / It 
IS + ING - FORM
b) Interrogativo: AM / IS / ARE + Sujeito + ING - FORM
c) Negativo: I’M NOT ⇔ You / We / They AREN’T ⇔ He / 
She / It ISN’T + ING - FORM
d) Palavras que o amarram: QUALQUER expressão de tempo 
que dê a ideia de “AGORA”:
now, at the present, right now, on the spot, at once
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSES INGLÊS – EEAr
12
UM IMPERATIVO TAMBÉM PODE AMARRAR ESTE 
TEMPO VERBAL : Run! (Corra!), Look! (Olhe), Don’t smoke! 
(Não fume) ...
LOOK! That boy IS RUNNING fast !
 ⇒ BIZU PARA O ACRÉSCIMO DO "-ING": Veja os bizus do 
acréscimo de -ED. Apenas, ATENÇÃO:
To arrive - arrivING (O -E sai !!)
To be - beING (Para o TO BE, não !!)
PROBLEMA COM O ING: Nem todos os verbos podem ir 
para o gerùndio EM INGLÊS. E para piorar, o ING tem outras 
funções na língua inglesa, além de gerúndio. Então, vamos ver 
uma coisa de cada vez:
a) VERBOS PARA OS QUAIS O ING NÃO PODE SER USADO 
COMO GERÚNDIO:
 ⇒ Verbos sensitivos (= relacionam-se com os 5 sentidos): 
SEE (VER) / FEEL (= SENTIR com a ideia de tato) / TASTE 
(DEGUSTAR) / HEAR (OUVIR) / SMELL (CHEIRAR)
 ⇒ Verbos de Preferência (denotam a ideia de preferência 
/ gosto pessoal): LIKE (gostar), DISLIKE (detestar), LOVE 
(com o sentido de adorar), HATE (odiar), PREFER (preferir) ...
 ⇒ Verbos Intelectuais (= denotam a ideia de ação intelectual 
intensa): CONCLUDE (concluir - com o sentido de racio-
cínio), DEDUCE (deduzir), REALIZE (perceber), THINK + 
oração (pensar / achar).
Quando esses verbos são usados com sentidos diferentes 
desses apresentados, PODEM IR PARA O GERÚNDIO:
Exemplo: I am concluding my work (estou TERMINANDO 
meu trabalho).
Quando não podemos usar um tempo CONTINUOUS, 
usamos um SIMPLE: 
Exemplo: I am seeing birds now <= I SEE birds now !! (Putz, 
é mole??!!)
35 - Complete the following sentences with the present continuous 
form of the verbs in parentheses. 
a) They _________ (wait) for us on the corner now.
b) The bus _________ (stop) for us now. 
c) Listen! I think the telephone _________ (ring). 
d) I see that you _________ (wear) your new suit today. 
e) Look! lt _________ (begin) to rain. 
f) Listen! Someone _________ (knock) at the door. 
g) Please be quiet! The baby _________ , (sleep). 
h) Look! The cat _________ (try) to climb that tall tree.
i) Helen _________ (make) good progress in her studies at 
present. 
j) The leaves _________ (begin) to fall from the trees.
k) John _________ (have) lunch in the cafeteria now. 
l) Listen! That’s Mary who _________ (play) the piano.
m) At present they _________ (travel) in South America. 
n) For the time being, Mr. Smith _________ (act) as manager 
of this department. 
o) Be careful! The teacher _________ (watch) you. 
p) They _________ (have) sales in all the big stores now.
36 - Supply the simple present tense or the present continuous tense 
form of the verbs in parentheses. 
a) Mr. Jones often _________ (go) out of town on business trips. 
b) Our class ___________ (meet) three times every week. 
c) Mr. Smith _________ (teach) us at present. He __________ 
(substitute) for Mr. Reese, who is our regular teacher. 
d) At nine-thirty every morning our school bell __________ 
(ring). Listen! I believe it ___________ (ring) now. 
e) John ___________ (take) his English lesson now. 1 believe 
that he always ___________ (take) it at this hour. 
f) Listen! Someone ___________ (knock) at the door.
g) John never ___________ (come) to class on time. 
h) At present they ___________ (build) many new highways 
in New York State. 
i) The wind always ________ (blow) hard in this section of town. 
j) For the time being, while My. Jones is away, Mr. Smith 
___________ (act) as manager of our department. 
k) They ___________ (have) a big sale on shoes at Macy’s today. 
l) John seems to be very busy. I guess he __________ (prepare) 
his English lesson.
m) I __________ (get) up at seven o’clock every morning. 
n) John usually ________ (stay) in a hotel when he __________ 
(come) to town, but tonight he _________ (stay) with us. 
o) The sun always ________(rise) in the cast. Look! It _________ 
(rise) now. 
p) Mr. and Mrs. Smith ______ (build) a new home on First Avenue.
37 - Change the following sentences from affirmative to negative. 
a) The telephone is ringing. 
b) lt is beginning to rain. 
c) The sky is getting very dark. 
d) He is working on the fourth floor at present.
e) The maid is cleaning the room now. 
f) They are taking a walk in the park. 
g) They are having lunch outside. 
h) John is doing well in his studies at present.
i) They are laughing at what you said. 
j) They are traveling in Europe at present. 
k) Helen is taking dancing lessons at the Country Club. 
l) The leaves are beginning to fall from the trees.
m) All the birds are flying south. 
n) Mr. Evans is writing a series of articles on the economic situation. 
o) They are planning to leave, for Mexico soon.
p) He is looking for the book which he lost. 
Contractions (Affirmative Forms) 
In spoken English, we usually use the following affirmative 
contractions.
I am - I’m
you are - you’re
he is - he’s
she is - she’s
it is - it’s
we are - we’re
they are - they’re
I will - I’ll
you will - you’ll
he will - he’ll
she will - she’ll
it will - it’ll
we will - we’ll
they will - they’ll
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
13
38 - Give the following in contracted form 
a) He is a good student. 
b) They are waiting for us on the tenth floor. 
c) I will be back before noon. 
d) I have no time to see him now. 
e) lt is raining hard. 
f) She will surely finish the work today.
g) We are old friends. 
h) They are planning to leave next week. 
i) lt is almost three o’clock.
j) The telephone is ringing. 
k) They have very little money with them. 
l) The train is just leaving the station now. 
m) There is someone at the door. 
n) They will remain in Europe all summer. 
o) He is a big boy for his age. 
p) You are very kind to say that. 
q) I am glad that you were able to come. 
r) There is nothing we can do about it now.
6) PAST CONTINUOUS = Passado Contínuo
a) Afirmativo:
You / We / They WERE ⇔ I / He / She / It WAS + ING - FORM
b) Interrogativo: 
WAS / WERE + Sujeito + ING - FORM
c) Negativo:
You / We / They WEREN’T ⇔ I /He / She / It WASN’T + 
ING - FORM
d) Este tempo verbal é usado nas provas sempre quando 
temos 2 ORAÇÕES dispostas da seguinte maneira :
ORAÇÃO 1
WHEN + oração no SIMPLE 
PAST
ORAÇÃO 2 Oração no 
PAST CONTINUOUS
WHILE + oração no PAST CON-
TINUOUS
Oração no PAST CONTI-
NUOUS
Esta ordem pode ser invertida nas questões de prova.
Ex.:
I __________ while Shirley __________.
a) was study / was rest
b) were sleeping / were resting
c) was sleeping / was resting
d) study / rest 
Observar que, nesta questão, a frase que contém o WHILE 
agora é a segunda e não a primeira. Porém, de qualquer forma, 
havendo esta palavra, todo o período ficará no PAST CONTI-
NUOUS. Letra C. Observar na tabelinha que a única situação 
para que as duas frases estejam no “past continuous” é tendo 
WHILE numa delas. As fórmulas / sintaxes da letra A não existem. 
A letra B lembra bem jogador de futebol quando é entrevistado e 
diz: “A gente fomos bem ...”, ou seja, mistura plural com singular. 
Para a letra D, ela não se adapta ao modelo de Simple Present !!
39 - Supply the correct past continuous tense form of the verbs in 
parentheses. 
a) They ............ (eat) in the restaurant on the corner when saw them.
b) lt ................ (rain) when I left home. 
c) When you telephoned, I ................ (have) dinner. 
d) They................ (travel) in Europe when the war broke out.
e) The baby............... (sleep) soundly when I went to wake him.
f) He............... just ............... (order) breakfast when I went to his 
hotel room. 
g) I got sick while we ................ (drive) to Mexico. 
h) He............... (work) in California when his father died. 
i) I ............... just ............... (take) a nap when you called. 
j) She................ (talk) with Mr. Smith when I saw her in the hall.
k) The accident happened while they................ (travel) in Mexico.
l) She fell as she ................ (get) into a taxi. 
m) The car ................. (travel) at high speed when it approached 
the corner. 
n) When I got up this morning, the sun................ (shine) brightly. 
o) They ............. (live) in Japan when the war started.
40 - In the following sentences give either the past tense or the past 
continuous tense form of the verb indicated. 
(study) 
1) I ................ very hard last night. 
2) I................ last night when you called me on the phone. 
(go)
3) While I ......... .... home last night, I saw a dreadful accident. 
4) I.............. home last night by bus. 
(drive) 
5) We................ to Philadelphia last Sunday. 
6) We ............... at about forty miles an hour when the accident 
happened. 
(have)
7) We ............... our dinner when you phoned. 
8) We ............... our dinner in Child’s restaurant last night. 
(come)
9) While I ................ to work this morning, I met an old friend. 
10) I ................ to work on the bus this morning. 
(blow)
11) The wind ............... hard when I came to work this morning. 
12) The wind ..... ....... ..hard this morning.
(rain)
13) lt ............... hard last night. 
14) lt ............... hard when I left the office at five o’clock.
(shine) 
15) The sun ................ brightly when I got up this morning. 
16) The sun ............... brightly this morning.
(read)
17) At seven o’clock, when you telephoned, I......... the newspaper. 
18) I................ two books last week.
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSES INGLÊS – EEAr
14
(sleep) 
19) I............... soundly when the phone rang. 
20) I .......... soundly last night.
(play)
21) Mary................ the piano when I arrived.
22) Mary ................ the piano for her guests.
(take)
23) While John................ his English lesson, his friend arrived. 
24) John ............... his English lesson yesterday. 
(get)
25) I................ up this morning at six o’clock. 
26) Helen fell just as she ............... off the bus.
41 - ln the following sentences give either the past tense or the past 
continuous form of the verbs in parentheses.
a) As I ............. (walk) home yesterday, I................. (meet) a beggar 
who ................ (ask) me for some money. 
b) lt ................ (rain) hard when I............... (leave) home this morning. 
c) John ................ (fall) and ............... (hurt) himself when he ................. 
(ride) his bicycle yesterday.
d) At five o’clock, when I ................ (call) at the Smith’s home, they 
................. (have) dinner. 
e) When World War II .................... (break) out, John ................. (live) 
in Switzerland. 
f) We ............... (sit) on our front porch when Mr. Smith ................. 
(drive) up in his new car. 
g) As Mary .............. (get) off the bus, she............. (slip) and ................ 
(break) ber leg. 
h) Mr. Smith................ (drive) at about forty míles an hour when the 
accident .............. . (happen). 
i) Your telegram ............. (come) just as I ................ (Ieave) my home. 
j) Last night, just as we................. (Ieave) for the movies, some friends 
................ (call) on us. 
k) John............... .(talk) with his boss when I last .............. (see) him. 
l) At noon, when you .......... (telephone), I.......... (work) in my garden.
42 - Change each of the following sentences from the past tense to 
the past continuous tense. Add an explanatory clause to complete 
the sentence. 
a) I studied my English lesson last night. 
(I was studying my English lesson last night when he telephoned.) 
b) I talked with Mr. Smith this morning.c) I walked home from work last night. 
d) I ate my dinner. 
e) John finished his work. 
f) Mary spoke to Mr. Smith about a raise.
g) I wrote several letters last night.
h) He lived in Switzerland. 
i) I got off the bus at 23rd Street. 
j) I had lunch with Mr. Smith.
7) GOING TO - FUTURE = Eu vou, Você vai, Ele / 
Ela vai, Nós vamos, Vocês / Eles vão
a) Afirmativo: 
Suj. + AM/IS/ARE + GOING TO + BF
b) Interrogativo: 
AM/IS/ARE + Suj. + GOING TO + BF
c) Negativo: 
Suj. + ‘M NOT / ISN’T / AREN’T + GOING TO + BF
d) Palavras que o amarram: QUALQUER expressão de tempo 
que dê a ideia de FUTURO:
tomorrow, next week / month / year, within<in 2 weeks, 
at soon ...
 ⇒ Going to future e os substitutos do Tempo Futuro
Além do uso de “will” e “shall” (auxiliares do futuro simples), 
temos outras formas verbais para expressar futuro. São elas:
1. “Be going to”
2. Present Continuous
3. Future Continuous
4. Simple Present
“Be going to” é conjugado assim:
VERBO TO BE (NO PRESENTE) + GOING TO + VERBO PRINCIPAL
Memorize:
I - AM
You / we / they - ARE +
he / she / it - IS
GOING TO + leave / travel / work ...
(base-form)
Formas:
a) afirmativa:
We are going to travel next weekend.
b) negativa: 
They are not going to travel with us tomorrow.
c) interrogativa:
Are you going to travel alone next Tuesday?
Indica:
 ⇒ certeza de que uma ação vai acontecer num futuro 
imediato.
Exemplo:
There are black clouds in the sky. It’s going to rain.
 ⇒ intenção de realizar uma certa ação.
Exemplo:
Give me your report. I’m going to read it.
 ⇒ Present Continuous Tense - é conjugado:
To be (no presente) + verbo principal no gerúndio (ING)
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
15
Memorize:
I - AM
You / we / they - ARE
he / she / it - IS
working / singing ...
Formas:
a) afirmativa: She is having a party next Saturday.
b) negativa: They are not travelling to São Paulo next 
Monday.
c) interrogativa: Are you going to the beach next summer?
Indica:
 ⇒ compromisso / ação no futuro, principalmente quando 
com verbos de movimento;
 ⇒ algo que se pretende fazer no futuro (após marcar ou 
programar uma atividade)
Observação:
É sempre acompanhado de uma expressão de tempo:
next Sunday / morning / weekend, etc:
tomorrow, etc.
Future Continuous Tense - é conjugado:
Will ('II) + be + verbo principal no gerúndio (com -ING)
Memorize: ‘ll (will) be + working
a) afirmativa: She’ll be arriving in 10 minutes.
b) negativa: They won’t (will not) be sleeping at midnight.
c) interrogativa: Will you be working next July?
Indica:
 ⇒ intenção ou planos de realizar uma ação futura;
 ⇒ que a ação estará sendo realizada ou estará em desen-
volvimento em determinada ocasião futura.
Simple Present (a nível informal !!!)
Formas:
a) afirmativa: The plane leaves for Maceió at noon.
b) negativa: The plane doesn’t leave for Maceió at midnight.
c) interrogativa: Does the bus leave for São Paulo at midday?
43 - Complete the following sentences with the going to future form 
of the verbs in parentheses.
a) They ________ (visit) us next weekend.
b) We ________ (eat) out tonight.
c) I ________ (leave) for Europe on Tuesday.
d) They ________ (wait) for us after the show.
e) We ________ (get) up early tomorrow morning and go fishing.
f) They ________ (drive) to California.
g) We ________ (go) to Canada on our vacation.
h) We ________ (have) an examination in mathematics.
i) They ________ (go) to Europe by plane.
j) John ________ (take) Helen to the dance tonight.
k) It ________ (be) difficult to reach him at this late hour.
l) I believe it ________ (rain).
m) It ________ (be) another warm day.
8) GOING TO - PAST = Eu ia, Você ia, Ele / Ela ia, 
Nós íamos, Vocês / Eles iam
a) Afirmativo: 
Suj. + WAS/WERE + GOING TO + BF
b) Interrogativo: 
WAS/WERE + Suj. + GOING TO + BF
c) Negativo: 
Suj.+ WASN’T/WEREN’T + GOING TO + BF
d) Palavras que o amarram: QUALQUER expressão de tempo 
que dê a ideia de ADVERSIDADE / CONTRARIEDADE:
BUT / NEVERTHELESS / HOWEVER / ON THE OTHER HAND ...
44 - Complete the sentences with was / were going to + one of 
these verbs:
READ / GET / OPEN / SEND / COOK / BUY / FORGET
a) Sheila ________________ that big geography book, but she 
was invited for a birthday party and she didn’t take it.
b) Andrew ____________________ his keys once more, but 
his mother shouted at him: “my son, don’t forget the keys !”.
c) That fat man ____________________ to him a great lunch 
but, suddenly, his pants began catching fire and he looked for 
a swimming pool to jump into it.
d) Charles __________________ a pair of shoes but, when the 
store hadn’t accepted his credit card.
e) Vera wanted to write a letter. Then, she wrote it and 
_____________, but it began raining very much and she 
stayed at home.
f) Wilma ____________________ those doors, but she noticed 
that a strong wind was blowing and then she changed her idea.
g) Paul __________________ a very good grade in his examina-
tion, but his teacher, Mr. Gama, found out that he was cheating !
9) PAST PERFECT = Eu TINHA falADO, Eles TI-
NHAM partIDO ...
a) Afirmativo: 
Sujeito + HAD + PARTICÍPIO
b) Interrogativo: 
HAD + Sujeito + PARTICÍPIO
c) Negativo: 
Sujeito + HADN’T + PARTICÍPIO
d) QUALQUER situação que denote relação de anteriorida-
de, ou seja, DUAS AÇÕES NO PASSADO, UMA OCORRENDO 
NA FRENTE DA OUTRA, pode amarrar este tempo. A PRI-
MEIRA, A MAIS PASSADA, FICA NO PAST PERFECT !!!. Uma 
palavra-chave é BEFORE (antes):
BEFORE I finished my assignment, my father HAD GOT-
TEN out. (Antes que eu terminasse o relatório, meu pai 
tinha saído)
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSES INGLÊS – EEAr
16
45 - Supply the past perfect of the verbs in parentheses:
a) He said that _____________ (look) everywhere for the book.
b) Helen ________________ (leave) by the time we arrived.
c) The police reported that they finally ______________ (catch) 
the thief.
d) I met them before I ______________ (walk) a hundred miles.
e) I saw that we __________________ (take) the wrong road.
f) He knew that he _______________ (make) a serious mistake.
g) I felt that I __________________ (make) a serious mistake.
h) He asked me why I _____________ (leave) the party so early.
i) Andy wanted to know what ________ (happen) to his briefcase.
10) PRESENT PERFECT
a) Afirmativo: 
He/She/It + HAS + PARTICÍPIO
I/YOU/WE/THEY+HAVE+PARTICÍPIO
b) Interrogativo: 
HAS + He/She/It + PARTICÍPIO
HAVE+I/YOU/WE/THEY+PARTICÍPIO c) Negativo: 
He/She/It + HASN’T + PARTICÍPIO
I/YOU/WE/THEY + HAVEN’T + PARTICÍPIO 
d) Palavras que o amarram: 
O PRESENT PERFECT tense descreve uma ação que aconte-
ceu em um tempo indefinido passado, SEM O MOMENTO 
DA AÇÃO:
I have read that book several times. They have moved to 
Los Angeles.
Este tempo verbal também descreve uma ação que pode 
se repetir; observe as situações abaixo:
I have read that big book. 
(pode ser lido novamente!!)
I have gone to the beach. 
(Eu posso ir lá de novo !!)
 ⇒ Present Perfect Tense (Never /Always / Yet / Just / For / 
Since ...)
Frases que usam o PRESENT PERFECT tense NUNCA 
mencionam o o momento exato da ação. SE DESEJARMOS 
MENCIONAR O MOMENTO CERTO DA AÇÃO, USAMOS O 
SIMPLE PAST!
The weather WAS nice yesterday.
They ARRIVED ten minutes ago.
I ate a lot of goods when I was a child.
A: DID YOU SEE the news on television last night?
B: No, I WENT to bed early.
Também usamos o PRESENT PERFECT tense para descrever 
uma ação que começou no passado e CONTINUA ATÉ AGORA !! 
Podemos às vezes usar expressões tais como: today, this week, 
never, always, since, ever, for, already, just, this summer, this 
month, lately, yet, ...:(dá ideia de Dt < intervalo de tempo!!!)
•	 I've done a lot of work today.
•	 He has gone to New York lately.
•	 It hasn’trained this week.
•	 Have you seen Ann recently?
•	 Have you ever traveled to China? 
•	 We’ve waited for an hour. 
 ⇒ Sentences using the present perfect tense never mention 
an exact time of action. If we wish to mention or imply 
an exact time for an action, we use the simple past tense, 
using 'words' such as:
•	 Yesterday, last week, in 1867, when I was a child, last 
night, last winter, two weeks ago, ...
•	 It didn’t rain last week.
•	 He went to New York yesterday.
•	 I called you last night. 
•	 Did you see Ann last week?
•	 Ian has lived in London since five years ago.
•	 I have never played golf.
•	 Have they won a lot of games?
•	 No, they have never won a game.
•	 Has she ridden your new bike?
•	 No, she hasn’t ridden it yet.
•	 Have you already met my brother?
•	 Yes, I’ve just met him.
•	 She’s just received a Christmas card from Andrew, hasn’t she?
•	 We waited for you from 6 to 8 o’clock a. m.
•	 Ian lived in London for five years.
•	 That old man stole five cars one year ago.
•	 Did they win the game last Sunday?
•	 No, they didn’t. It was a very difficult game.
•	 Did she ride that old horse yesterday afternoon?
•	 No, she didn’t. She’s afraid of horses.
•	 Didn’t you meet Mr. Johnson at the party last night?
•	 Yes, I did. He was very polite.
•	 Have you already seen “Superman”?
•	 Yes, I’ve seen it twice.
•	 I have had lunch at McDonald’s lately.
•	 I have watched cartoons since I was a child.
•	 Mark has never told her a friend word.
•	 Did she receive a love letter from Mark last month?
•	 Yes, I received it.
 ⇒ Use a PAST TENSE to ask When ...? or What time ...? When 
did they arrive?
What time did you finish your work?
46 - Supply the present perfect tense form of the verbs in parentheses:
a) I __________________ (speak) to him about it several times.
b) We ___________________ (finish) all our homework.
c) He ____________________ (visit) us many times.
d) She ___________________ (return) my book at last.
e) I am afraid that I _________________ (lose) my car keys.
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
17
f) We _________________ (be) to Mexico many times.
g) I __________________ (study) this same exercise before.
h) We ________________ (learn) many words in this course.
i) I ____________________ (tell) Mark what you said to me.
j) This magazine was terrific ! I ________________ (read) it.
k) Mr. Columbus ______________ (go) to South America to work.
l) He __________ (make) many mistakes. He ought to study more.
m) She ____________________ (watch) that film twice.
n) We need to help that poor man ! He _______________ (lose) 
all his money gambling.
o) Andrew __________________ (become) a famous swimmer.
p) That giant dog _____________ (run after) Mike for two hours.
47 - Make sentences from the words in brackets. Use the present 
perfect or simple past:
a) it / not / rain / this week
b) the weather / be / cold / recently
c) it / be / cold / last week
d) I / not / read / a newspaper yesterday
e) I / not / read / a newspaper today
f) Ann / earn / a lot of money / this year
g) she / not / earn / so much / last year
h) you / have / a holiday recently?
48 - Write sentences about yourself using the ideas in parentheses:
a) (Something you haven’t done today.)
b) (Something you have done today.)
c) (Something you didn’t do yesterday.)
d) (Something you did yesterday evening.)
e) (Something you haven’t done recently.)
f) (Something you’ve done a lot recently.)
g) (Where have you been lately?)
h) (When did you go swimming?)
49 - Supply the correct PRESENT PERFECT :
a) I ________________ (speak) to him about it several times.
b) We ________________ (finish) all our homework.
c) He ________________ (visit) us many times.
d) She _______________ (return) my book at last.
e) We ______________ (learned) many new words in this course.
f) Sheila ________________ (travel) many times to Japan lately.
g) I ______________ (tell) her what happened to you yesterday.
h) They _____________ (lend) him money several times.
i) Charles _____________ (make) the same mistake several times.
j) My mother ______________ (see) that movie twice.
50 - SIMPLE PAST OR THE PRESENT PERFECT??!!
a) I ________________ (visit) Manaus many times.
b) Mrs. Sobral _______________ (go) to Sweden last week.
c) Isis ________________ (read) several books.
d) We _________ (read) it while I was on my vacation last summer.
e) She ________________ (be) in Philadelphia many times.
f) Marina _______ (have) little experience in teaching that subject.
g) Carlos ______________ (fall) when he was crossing the street.
h) Mariah _____________ (see) Edgar a few days ago.
i) When the bell rang, Herald _____________ (jump) from his 
seat and _____________ (run) from the room.
j) I _____________ (try) that restaurant again but I don’t like 
the food there.
k) When I was a boy, I often ______________ (go) fishing with 
my father,
l) Tod ________________ (start) to study English last winter.
m) The day before yesterday, we ________________ (have) a 
bad storm.
n) I hear that you ________________ (give up) the idea of 
studying Russian.
o) Thomas ____________ never _____________ (be) in Miami.
p) The First World War _______________ (begin) in 1914 and 
______________ (finish) in 1918.
q) She is saying that she ________________ (lose) her pocket 
book yesterday.
EXPRESSÕES PARA DECORAR 1
by the way (propósito); at the present (agora); come in (entrar); 
a lot of (muito, muitos); have dinner (jantar); me too (eu também); 
take a look (dar uma olhada); look at (olhar para); What time is it? 
(Que horas?); that’s a shame (Que vergonha); To be in a hurry (Estar 
com pressa); go shopping (Fazer compras); have lunch (almoçar); 
be thirsty (Estar com sede); all day (o dia todo); Don’t worry ! (Não 
se preocupe); make room (Arrumar espaço); end up + ING (Termi-
nar / Acabar POR INSISTÊNCIA) - Ex.: Não entendo esta matéria, 
vou acabar me ferrando!! < I don’t understand this subject, I am 
going to end up failING !!; go ahead (Seguir adiante); quite often 
(Muitas vezes); a few (Pouco, poucos); all the time (O tempo todo); 
put on (Vestir); take a day off (Tirar um dia de folga) on the way 
(A caminho); shut off (Fechar na saída); dry up (Evaporar); be in 
trouble; by the time (Quando) feel at home (Sentir-se em casa); sit 
around (Sentar-se por aí); be supposed to (Ter que = MUST ou Ser 
provável) - Exs.: a) É possível que chova - It’s supposed to rain < b) 
I am supposed to work ! - Tenho que trabalhar!; take to (Levar para)
RESUMINDO: OS DEZ TEMPOS VERBAIS 
SINTAXES
PALAVRAS QUE AMARRAM = 
ADVÉRBIOS
SIMPLE
PRESENT
(PRESNTE SIMPLES)
Afirmativo:
HE/SHE/IT + Base-
-form com S
I/YOU/WE/THEY + 
Base-from
LATELY - ULTIMAMENTE
EVERY DAY - DIARIAMENTE
SOMETIMES/ NOW AND THEN DE 
VEZ EM QUANDO
ONCE – UMA VEZ
TWICE – DUAS VEZES
On Sundays/Mondays/Tuesday...
USUAL/USUALLY GERALMENTE OU FRE-
QUENTEMENTE
ALWAYS/NEVER
 SEMPRE NUNCA
Interrogativo:
DO + I/YOU/THEY + 
Base-form
DOES + HE/SHE/IT + 
Base-form
Negativo:
HE/SHE/IT + DOESN’T 
+ Base-form
I/YOU/WE/THEY + 
DON’T + Base-form
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSES INGLÊS – EEAr
18
SIMPLE
PAST
(PASSADO SIMPLES)
 (A AÇÃO É TOTALMENTE
FINALIZADA)
Afirmativo:
SUJEITO + VERBO 
com ED OU TABELA
(regulares) (irregulares) YESTERDAY
 - ONTEM
LAST WEEK – SEMANA PASSADA
LAST MONTH – MÊS PASSADO
IN 1990 - EM 1990
2 HOURS AGO...2 HORAS ATRÁS
Interrogativo:
DID + SUJEITO + 
Base-form
Negativo:
SUSJEITO +DIDN’T + 
Base-form
WILL
FUTURE
(FUTURO DO PRESENT)
Afirmativo:
SUJEITO + WILL + 
Base-form TOMORROW - amanhã
NEXT WEEK – semana que vem
NEXT MONTH – mês que vem
WITHIN <= IN 3 WEEKS... EM 3 SEMANAS. . . 
“ DENTRO DE”
Interrogativo:
 WILL + SUJEITO + 
Base-form
Negativo:
SUJEITO + WON’T + 
Base-form 
WOULDCONDITIONAL
(FUTURO DO PRETERITO)
Afirmativo:
SUJEITO + WOULD + 
Base-from
IF = SE (CONDIÇÃO)
ANY = QUALQUER (frases afirma-
tivas)
Interrogativo:
WOULD + SUJEITO + 
Base-form
Negativo:
SUJEITO + WOULDN’T 
+ Base-form
PRESENT
CONTINUOUS
OU
PROGRESSIVE
Afirmativo:
SUJEITO + AM / IS / 
ARE + ING NOW = AT THIS MOMENT = ON THE 
SPOT = AT (THE) PRESENT = RIGHT 
NOW = AGORA
OU IMPERATIVO
Interrogativo:
AM/ IS / ARE + SUJEI-
TO + ING 
Negativo:
SUJEITO + ‘m not / 
ISN’T /AREN’T + ING
SINTAXES
PALAVRAS QUE AMARRAM = 
ADVÉRBIOS
PAST
CONTINUOUS
OU
PROGRESSIVE
Afirmativo:
SUJ EI TO + WA S / 
WERE + ING
WHEN no SIM-
P L E P A S T a 
o u t r a ( o r a ç ã o 
p r i n c i p a l ) O U 
P A S T C O N T I -
NUOUS OU PAST 
P E R F E C T O U 
SIMPLE PAST
W H I L E N O 
PAST CONTI-
NUOUS
+
A O U T R A 
TAMBÉM NO 
PAST CONTI-
N U O U S O U 
SIMPLE PAST
AS = WHILE = 
AT THE
Interrogativo:
WAS / WERE + SUJEI-
TO + ING
Negativo:
SUJEITO + WASN’T / 
WEREN’T + ING
GOING TO – 
FUTURE
Afirmativo:
SUJEITO + AM/ IS / 
ARE GOING TO + BF
IDEM WILL – FUTURE
Obs.: 
Am going to = vou
Is going to = vai
Are going to = vão / vamos
Interrogativo:
AM/ IS / ARE + Sujeito 
+ GOING TO + BF
Negativo:
SUJEITO + ‘m / isn’t 
/ aren’t +GOING TO 
+ BF
GOING TO –
PAST
Afirmativo:
SUJ EI TO + WA S / 
WERE + GOING TO 
+ BF BUT
(OU QUALQUER OUTRA 
CONJUNÇÃO ADVERSATIVA)
Obs :
WAS GOING TO = ia 
WERE GOING TO = iamos / iam 
Interrogativo:
WAS / WERE + SUJEI-
TO + GOING TO + BF
Negativo:
SUJEITO + WASN’T 
/ WEREN’T + GOING 
+ BF
PAST
PERFECT
Afirmativo: tido/tinha/tiamos 
SUJEITO + HAD + PAR-
TÍCIPIO ALREADY = Já
BEFORE = Antes
AFTER = EVER = Depois
Obs : Também usado para passado 
distante
Interrogativo:
HAD + SUJEITO + PAR-
TICÍPIO
Negativo:
SUJEITO + HADN’T + 
PARTICÍPIO
PRESENT
PERFECT
(AÇÃO TOTALMENTE FI-
NALIZADA OU CONSEQU-
ÊNCIAS QUE CONTINUAM))
Afirmativo:
SUJEITO + HAS / HAVE 
+ PARTICÍPIO
AS MESMAS DO SIMPLE PREENTE
OU
IMPERATIVO
OU
NENHUMA EXPRESSÃO
OU
SINCE / FOR / DURING / JUST / YET
DESDE / POR / DURANTE / ACABOU DE / AINDA (não)
Interrogativo:
HAS + HAVE + SUJEI-
TO + PARTICÍPIO
Negativo:
SUJEITO + HASN’ T 
/ HAVEN’T + PARTI-
CÍPIO
Gabarito:
1. a) opens / closes b) study / studies
c) finishes / finishes d) does / need
e) teaches f) brings
g) have h) has / has
2. a) needs / doesn’t need b) goes / doesn’t go
c) speak / don’t speak d) comes / doesn’t come
e) doesn’t drink / smokes f) have / don’t use 
g) brush / brushes / wakes / goes
3. a) do they play b) does radiation cause
c) do insecticides damage d) do people have
e) do the children play f) does your / our class begin
g) does she see h) Does Helen go
4. text 1
doesn’t talk is doesn’t talk smokes
doesn’t talk bites doesn’t talk eats
doesn’t talk plays doesn’t talk doesn’t like
don’t have don’t talk doesn’t lend
5. a) have b) has c) have d) has e) have
f) has g) has h) has i) have j) has
k) has l) have m) have n) has o) has
p) have q) has r) has s) have t) have
6. a) read b) comes c) walk d) play e) eat
f) works g) like h) chases i) works j) sits
k) play l) prepares m) eat n) use o) take
p) travel q) attend r) speaks
7. a) goes b) does c) try d) tries e) wishes
f) teaches g) go h) watch i) plays
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
19
j) studies k) watches l) kisses m) catch
n) catches o) does p) carries
8. b) He works c) He is d) He owns
e) He is f) He enjoys g) He wants
h) He has i) He speaks j) He wishes
k) He watches l) He passes m) He always goes
n) He tries o) He does p) He plays
q) He has r) He always sits s) He writes
t) He studies
9. a) They like b) They work c) They are
d) They own e) They are f) They enjoy
g) They want h) They have i) They speak
j) He wish k) They watch l) They pass
m) They always go n) They try o) They do
p) They play q) They have r) They always sit
s) They write t) They study
10. a) She works b) She is c) She owns
d) She is e) She enjoys f) She wants
g) She has h) She speaks i) She wishes
j) She watches k) She passes l) She always goes
m) She tries n) She does o) She plays
p) She has q) She always sits r) She writes
s) She studies
11. a) is b) are c) am d) is e) are
f) is g) is h) are i) are j) is
k) is l) is m) is n) are o) is
p) are
12. a) aren’t b) isn’t c) aren’t d) isn’t e) aren’t
f) isn’t g) aren’t h) isn’t i) isn’t j) isn’t
k) isn’t l) isn’t m) isn’t n) isn’t o) aren’t
p) isn’t
13. a) Are they ... ? b) Is John (he) ... ?
c) Are Hen and she ... ? d) Is he ... ?
e) Are both sisters ... ? f) Is she ... ?
g) Are they ... ? h) Is he ... ?
i) Is Mr. Smith (he) ... ? j) Isn’t the sky (it) ... ?
k) Is the office of the principal (it) ... ?
l) Is it ... ? m) Is she ... ?
n) Is it ... ? o) Are the stamps (they)... ?
p) Is he ... ?
14. a) There is b) There is c) There are
d) There is e) There are f) There are
g) There is h) There are i) There is
j) There is k) There are l) There are
m) There is n) There is o) There are
p) There are
15. a) There isn’t b) There aren’t c) There isn’t
d) There aren’t e) There isn’t f) There aren’t
g) There aren’t h) There isn’t i) There aren’t
j) There aren’t k) There isn’t l) There isn’t
m) There aren’t n) There aren’t o) There aren’t
16. a) dropped b) stopped c) opened
d) apologised / happened / asked
e) offered / accepted f) didn’t want / preferred
g) looked / arrived h) injured / tried
17. 01) had 02) were 03) was 04) were
05) didn’t speak 06) could 07) made
08) had 09) knew 10) used
11) questioned 12) saw 13) didn’t know
14) asked 15) began 16) answered
17) was 18) came 19) became
20) asked 21) answered
18. 1) was 2) brought 3) lived 4) made
5) sold 6) was 7) didn’t go 8) was
9) studied 10) got 11) was 12) got
13) got 14) was 15) came 16) had
17) traveled 18) liked
19. 1) b 2) b 3) b 4) a 5) d
6) a 7) b 8) c 9) d
20. a) was b) was c) were d) was e) were
f) was g) were h) was i) were j) was
k) were l) was / was m) was n) were o) was
p) were q) were r) was
21. a) worked b) listened c) talked d) wanted
e) lived f) expected g) lasted h) changed
i) liked j) waited k) painted l) arrived
m) watched n) studied o) mailed p) learned
22. a) came b) told c) sat d) put e) began
f) wrote g) saw h) cost i) had j) drank
k) gave / told l) sold m) heard n) knew o) felt
p) went / got q) read
23. a) They didn’t tell b) He didn’t put
c) They didn’t stay d) I didn’t see
e) He didn’t plan f) The meeting didn’t last
g) The book didn’t cost h) The woman didn’t faint
i) I didn’t know j) They didn’t sell
k) I didn’t speak l) She didn’t come
m) We didn’t sit n) They didn’t go
o) I didn’t give
24. b) Did he give ...? c) Did they stay ... ?
d) Did she tell ... ? e) Did he enter ... ?
f) Did they go ... ? g) Did he arrive ... ?
h) Did they come ... ? i) Did they know ... ?
j) Did he work ... ? k) Did she fell ... ?
l) Did the meeting begin ...?
m) Did he pass ... ? n) Did they put ...?
o) Did he give ... ? p) Did the crowd wait ... ?
25. b) When did they sell ... ?
c) What time did the meeting begin ... ?
d) How much did the tickets cost ?
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSES INGLÊS – EEAr
20
e) How did he pay ... ?
f) How much did he invest ... ?
g) In which row did they sit ... /
h) In what language did he speak ...?
i) How long did the meeting last ?
j) What time did it begin ?
k) What time did he telephone her ?
l) Why did he go ... ?
m) How many times did they mention ... ?
n) Where did they eat lunch ?
o) How many years did he work there ?
p) Where did he put the mail ?
q) How long did she wait ... ?
r) What time did they get home ?
s) With whom did he walk to school ?
t) Where did they go after the lesson ?
26. a) left b) brought c) forgot d) becamee) made f) lost / found g) fought h) rang
i) took j) thought k) taught
l) bought / sold m) kept / gave
n) did / caught o) sang / understood
p) stood
27. a) Why won’t he come tonight ?
b) When will she be at home ?
c) How soon will the plane take off ?
d) Where will your relatives arrive from tomorrow ?
e) Who will you meet at the station ?
28. 1) will be 2) will do 3) will be 4) will have
5) there will be 6) will be 7) there will be
8) there won’t be 9) will blow 10) will end
11) will have 12) will be 13) will have
14) will have 15) will have
29. a) ‘ll call b) ‘ll see c) ‘ll give d) ‘ll help
e) ‘ll clean f) ‘ll close g) ‘ll leave h) ‘ll find
i) ‘ll spend j) ‘ll doing k) ‘ll blowing l) ‘ll meeting
m) ‘ll paying n) ‘ll learning o) ‘ll remaining
30. b) She was ... c) Mr. Smith was ...
d) They were ...
.
.
.
31. b) She will be c) Mr. Smith will be
.
.
.
32. 2) We won’t tell ... 3) I won’t be back ...
.
.
.
33. b) Will he be back at three o’clock ?
c) Will the stores be .. ?
.
.
.
34. b) What time / When will he be back ?
c) How long will the stores be open ?
d) How much will it cost to fix the lamp ?
e) Why will the plant die ?
f) How long will they spend in france ?
g) Where will she meet you ?
h) When will they pay their bill ?
i) What time / When will the meeting begin ?
j) How long will it last ?
k) What will she leave on the table for him ? / Where will 
she leave a message for him ? Who will she leave for a 
message on the table?
l) When will they return ?
m) How many new students will there be in the class ?
n) What time / When will the lesson be over ?
o) When will they write to us ? / Whom ó Who will they 
write to on Wednesday ?
p) Where will they take the children ? / Who ó Whom 
will they take to the park ?
q) Where will you park the car ? / What will you park 
near the hotel ?
r) Where will they stay ?
35 a) are waiting b) is stopping c) is ringing
d) are wearing e) is beginning f) is knocking
g) is sleeping h) is trying i) is making
j) are beginning k) is having l) is playing
m) are traveling n) is acting o) is watching
p) are having
36. a) goes b) meets
c) is teaching / is substituting
d) rings / is ringing e) is taking / takes
f) is knocking g) comes
h) are building i) blows
j) is acting k) are having
l) is preparing m) get
n) stays / comes / stays o) rises / is rising
p) are building
37. a) isn’t ringing b) isn’t beginning
c) isn’t getting d) isn’t working
e) isn’t cleaning f) aren’t taking
g) aren’t having h) isn’t doing
i) aren’t laughing j) aren’t traveling
k) isn’t taking l) aren’t beginning
m) aren’t flying n) isn’t writing
o) aren’t planning p) isn’t looking
38. a) He’s b) They’re c) I’ll
d) I’ve e) It’s f) She’ll
CAPÍTULO 1 – VERBAL TENSESINGLÊS – EEAr
21
g) We’re h) They’re i) It’s
j) The telephone’s k) They’ve l) The train’s
m) There’s n) They’ll o) He’s
p) You’re q) I’m r) There’s
39. a) were eating b) was raining
c) was having d) were traveling
e) was sleeping f) was / ordering
g) were driving h) was working
i) was / taking j) was talking
k) were traveling l) was getting
m) was traveling n) was shining
o) were living
40.
STUDY
1) studied 2) was studying
GO
3) was going 4) went
DRIVE
5) drove 6) were driving
HAVE
7) had 8) were having
COME
9) was coming 10) came
BLOW
11) was blowing 12) blew
RAIN
13) rained 14) was raining
SHINE
15) was shining 16) shone
READ
17) was reading 18) read
SLEEP
19) was sleeping 20) slept
PLAY
21) was playing 22) played
TAKE
23) was taking 24) took
GET
25) got 26) was getting
41. a) was walking / met / asked b) was raining / left
c) fell / hurt / rode d) called / were having
e) broke / was living f) were sitting / drove
g) was getting / slipped / broke
h) was driving / happened i) came / was leaving
j) was leaving / called k) was talking / saw
l) telephoned / was working
42: PESSOAL
43: a) are going to visit b) are going to eat
c) am going to leave d) are going to wait
e) are going to get f) are going to drive
g) are going to h) are going to have
i) are going to j) is going to take
k) is going to be l) is going to rain
m) is going to be
44. a) was going to read b) was going to forget
c) was going to cook d) was going to buy
e) was going to send f) was going to open
g) was going to get
45. a) he had looked b) had left
c) had caught d) had walked
e) had took f) had made
g) had made h) had left
i) had happened
46. a) have spoken b) have finished
c) has visited d) has returned
e) have lost f) have been
g) have studied h) have learnt
i) have told j) have read
k) has gone l) has made
m) has watched n) has lost
o) has become p) has run after
47. a) It hasn’t rained this week.
b) The weather has been cold recently.
c) It was cold last week.
d) I didn’t read a newspaper yesterday.
e) I havn’t read a newspaper today.
f) Ann has earned a lot of money this year.
g) She didn’t earn so much last year.
h) Have you have a holiday recently?
48. PESSOAL
49. a) have spoken b) have finished c) has visited
d) has returned e) have learned f) has traveled
g) I have told h) have lent i) has made
j) has seen
50. a) have visited b) went c) has read
d) read e) has been f) has have
g) fell h) saw i) jumped / ran
j) have tried k) went l) started
m)had n) have given up o) has never been
p) began / finished q) lost
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 2 – PRONOUNS INGLÊS – EEAr
22
Capítulo 2
PRONOMES
A B C D
Subject Object Posses. Adjective Posses. Pronoun
I ME MY MINE
YOU YOU YOUR YOURS
HE HIM HIS HIS
SHE HER HER HERS
IT IT ITS ITS
WE US OUR OURS
YOU YOU YOUR YOURS
THEY THEM THEIR THEIRS
Observações:
A. Anotar, E COM ATENÇÃO, que na tabelinha acima po-
demos observar funções gramaticais diferentes com 
algumas coincidências ortográficas (Legenda):
Exemplos:
You gave me this present.
sujeito Aqui, YOU inicia a frase !!
I gave you that one.
objeto Aqui, vem depois do verbo!!
O AGT para o pronome sujeito / subject é: 
 ⇒ PRONOME + ORAÇÃO, pois sempre vem antes de oração.
O AGT para um pronome objeto / object (também chamado 
de oblíquo) é:
B. VERBO + PRONOME OBJETO ⇔ PREPOSIÇÃO + PRONOME 
OBJETO
Exemplos:
We saw them at the movies.
Vindo após uma preposição (“about”, “of”, “to”, “for”, etc.):
My parents are worrying ABOUT me.
Some OF them are hurt.
C. Possessive Adjectives
 ⇒ Posição: sempre antecedem um substantivo. Logo, o 
AGT será:
 ⇒ POSSE + SUBSTANTIVO.
Muito importante quando temos essas sintaxes, pois as 
questões gramaticais dos concursos são, em geral, de forma 
lacunada. Então observe:
____ house is very expensive.
a) Yours b) Mine c) My d) Hers
1o passo: Olhar com que matéria a questão está lidando. Ao 
observarmos as opções, veremos que todas elas tem relação 
com posse.
2o passo: Olhar a própria lacuna. Como após a mesma vem a 
palavra “house” (casa) que é substantivo, a única opção é a “C”, 
pois trata-se de um ADJETIVO POSSESSIVO (posse + substantivo !!!)
a) ele concorda com o possuidor (sujeito):
Exemplos:
 
David and his mother arrived.
He (possuidor)
 
The girls and their brothers sing well.
They (possuidor)
b) se o possuidor for INDEFINIDO, o seu respectivo posses-
sivo será “his”.
Exemplo:
Everybody
Someone
Nobody wants his own happiness.
No one
(etc.)
c) se o possuidor for o pronome “ONE”, o correspondente 
será “ONE’S”.
Exemplo:
One must respect one’s own religion.
(possuidor)
“Cada um deve respeitar SUA própria religião”
D. Possessive Pronouns:
Função: SUBSTITUEM um substantivo já citado.
Exemplo:
His family is poor but hers is rich.
(a dela)
"a dela" o quê??!! família. A palavra já foi citada antes. 
SEMPRE VAI SER ASSIM. SEMPRE haverá uma palavra que 
já foi repetida antes e o pronome fará a vez dessa palavra 
para evitaro pleonasmo.
O AGT pode ficar:
POSSE + SUBSTANTIVO ,
Exemplo:
Helen went to her house and I went to mine. (my house)
 
Observar no exemplo acima que depois do “mine” não 
vem substantivo. Logo, não pode ser MY, tem que ser MINE. 
Ou seja, não pode ser um adjetivo possessivo, tem que ser 
um PRONOME POSSESSIVO.
“Tenha sempre um DICIONÁRIO por perto!!, SE NÃO... 
TENHO PENA!
1 - Substitute the pronouns (personal and objective case) for the 
underlined words:
a) Jane (01) _____ met Mary and Peter (02) _______ last night.
b) Bill (03) _____ wasn’t happy with the present (04) _______.
c) Thousands of people (05) _____ go to the beaches (06) 
_______ every year.
 
CAPÍTULO 2 – PRONOUNSINGLÊS – EEAr
23
d) My brother-in-law and my sister (07) __________ are talking 
about John and me (08) __________.
e) Everyone likes my sister (09) __________.
f) My brother is sometimes horrible, but I like my brother (10) 
_________.
2 - Complete with the correct pronoun (Personal, Objective r Posses-
sive adjective)
g) Ann was surprised when I was able to describe (01) __________ 
purse to (02) __________.
h) My husband and I have one son and one daughter. (03) 
__________ son is 20. (04) __________ name is Jim. (05) 
__________ daughter is 25. (06) __________ name is Diana. 
(07) __________ has 3 children (08) __________ names are 
Eva, Mary and Joe.
i) You and Grace always spend a lot of time on (09) __________ 
homework.
3 - What’s the correct alternative?
1) His nephew has ____ meals in town.
a) your b) her c) his d) my
2) Give the dogs ____ food and the cat ____ milk.
a) its, its b) their, its c) his, your d) our, ours
3) The teacher corrected the students’ compositions. He corrected 
____ compositions.
a) his b) her c) heir d) its
4) We saw Mrs. Allison’s car in front of the cinema. We saw ____ 
car really!
a) its b) their c) his d) her
4 - Complete with the correct personal pronoun, objective pronoun 
or possessive adjective
a) Ann was surprised when I described (01) ___ purse to (02) ___.
b) My husband and I have a son and a daughter. (03) ____ son is 
20. (04) ____ name is Jim. (05) ____ daughter is 25. (06) ____ 
name is Diana. (07) ____ has 3 children (08) ____ names are 
Eva, Mary and Joe.
c) You and Grace always spend a lot of time on (09) _____ ho-
mework.
5 - His nephew has ____ meals in town.
a) your b) her c) his d) my
6 - Give the dogs ____ food and the cat ____ milk.
a) its, its b) their, its c) his, your d) our, ours
7 - The teacher corrected the students’ compositions. He corrected 
____ compositions.
a) his b) her c) their d) its
8 - We saw Mrs. Allison’s car in front of the cinema. We saw ____ car 
really!
a) its b) their c) his d) her
 ⇒ ATENÇÃO:
1) my (posse + substantivo) = Poss. Adj.
2) her (Verbo + Object Pronoun)
3) Our (posse + substantivo) = Poss. Adj.
4) His (posse + substantivo) = Poss. Adj.
5) Idem 3.
6) Her (posse + substantivo) = Poss. Adj.
7) She (Subject Pronoun + Oração)
8) Their (posse + substantivo) = Poss. Adj.
9) Their (posse + substantivo) = Poss. Adj.
10) His (posse + substantivo) = Poss. Adj.
11) Their / its (posse + subst.) = Poss. Adj.
 ⇒ Lembrar que mais de um cachorro é THEY e não IT. IT seria 
apenas “ UM “ cachorro !!!!!
12) their (posse + substantivo) = Poss. Adj.
13) Her (posse + substantivo) = Poss. Adj.
9 - Choose the correct form of possessive to complete each sentence:
1) Her husband bought _______ clothes in London, but she 
bought _______ at Lojas Americanas.
a) theirs – their b) hers – hers c) his – hers d) his – his
2) Excuse me, are those socks _______?
 No, they are not _______.
 _______ socks are pink.
a) your - my - my b) yours - mine - mine
c) your - my - mine d) yours - mine - my
3) We finished _______ test before they finished _______.
a) our - theirs b) ours - theirs c) our - their d) ours - their
4) He spends all _______ money on books, while his niece spends 
_______ on clothes.
a) my - my b) its - his c) his - her d) his - hers
5) Your aunt wants to sell _____ car, but _____ engine is too old.
a) his - her b) her - its c) her - her d) his - it
6) You know it is not _______ money. It’s _______.
a) her - your b) theirs - our c) their - ours d) your - yours
7) _______ car wasn’t working, so I used _______.
a) Mine - hers b) His - your c) My - yours d) her - her
8) Everybody changes _______ opinion but Alice never changes 
_______.
a) their - its b) her - her c) his - hers d) your - it
DEMONSTRATIVE PARTICLES
1. THIS (isto, este, esta) é usado para indicar algo ou alguém 
localizado perto de quem está falando. 
THIS is my shirt. (Esta é minha camisa.) 
THIS is my daughter. (Esta é minha filha.) 
2. THAT (aquele, aquela, aquilo) é usado para indicar algo 
ou alguém localizado longo de quem está fa- lando. 
THAT is your uncle. (Aquele é teu tio.) 
THAT is your Purse. (Aquela é tua bolsa.) 
CAPÍTULO 2 – PRONOUNS INGLÊS – EEAr
24
3. THESE (estes, estas) é o plural de this e só pode ser usado 
da mesma maneira que o singular. THESE are your starnps. 
(Estes são teus selos.) 
THESE are my aunts. (Estas são minhas tias.) 
4. THOSE (aqueles, aquelas) plural de that e é usado do 
mesmo modo que o singular. 
THOSE are my ties. (Aquelas são minhas gravatas.) 
THOSE are your books. (Aqueles são teus livros.) 
CLICK <<<
o primeiro THE FORMER
 DE DOIS ELEMENTOS MENCIONADOS
o segundo THE LATTER
(o último)
10 - Choose the correct form.
a) I often see (they, them) on the bus. 
b) She lives near (we, us).
c) (We, us) always walk to school together. 
d) He teaches (we, us) English.
e) She sits near (I, me) during the lesson. 
f) I know both of (they, them) well.
g) I always speak to (he, him) in English.
h) What is the matter with (he, him) today?
i) He explains the lesson to (we, us) each morning. 
j) There are some letters here for you and (I, me). 
k) We want to divide the money between (we, us). 
l) (They, them) are both Venezuelans.
m) I know (she, her) and her sister very well. 
n) (He, him) is a very studious person. 
o) He sends (she, her) a lot of presents.
p) He seldom speaks to (we, us) in Spanish.
q) He looks at (she, her) all during the lesson.
r) She always helps (I, me) with my homework. 
s) He always sits between Mary and (I, me). 
t) He wants to talk with (she, her).
11 - Substitute the correct object pronoun for the word or words in 
italics.
a) I see Mr. Smith on the bus every morning.
 (I see him on the bus every morning.)
b) I sit near Grace and Frances during the lesson. 
c) All the boys like Helen very much.
d) I often see you and your sister in the school cafeteria. 
e) He always goes to the movies with his parents. 
f) I know both boys very well.
g) Frank always waits for John and me after the lesson. 
h) He drives Helen and Grace to school every morning. 
i) I sit next to Henry.
j) I also sit directly in front of Grace.
k) He writes a lot of letters to his relates. 
l) This book belongs to William.
m) I know the bus driver very well.
n) The doctor relies on his nurse in many ways.
o) I understand my teacher, Mr. Jones, very well. 
p) He always speaks to his students in English.
q) Everyone in our house watches television except my brother. 
r) He sends his parents money every week.
s) I talked to Mr. and Mrs. Nelson yesterday. 
t) He saw the girls after school.
12 - ln the following sentences, substitute the possessive pronoun 
for the words in italics.
a) This pen is my pen. (This pen is mine.)
b) These seats are our seats.
c) This umbrella is her umbrella. 
d) These pencils are your pencils.
e) That fountain pen is my fountain pen. 
f) That overcoat is his overcoat.
g) These cigarettes seem to be your cigarettes; they are not my 
cigarettes.
h) I believe this pen is her pen; it is not my pen. 
i)Is this notebook your notebook or John’s?
j) Is this package of cigarettes your package of cigarettes or 
William’s?.
k) This pair of scissors is her pair of scissors.
l) These seats are their seats; they are not our seats.
m) This book is your book; the one over there on the desk is my 
book.
n) He drives his car to work every day and I drive my car.
o) You take care of your things and I’ll take care of my things. 
p) Their home is pretty but our home is prettier.
q) His pronunciation is bad, and my pronunciation is too.
r) His car was expensive but your car was more expensive.
13 - In the following sentences substitute the verb TO BELONG for 
the verb TO BE. Then introduce a possessive pronoun or the 
possessive form of the noun.
a) This book belongs to him. (This book is his.)
b) That notebook belongs to her. 
c) That umbrella belongs to me.
d) I’m sure this pen belongs to them. 
e) No, it belongs to me.
f) These magazines belong to them. 
g) These pencils belong to us.
h) These books belong to them.
i) This book doesn’t belong to me. 
j) This pen belongs to him.
k) I think this desk belongs to Mrs. Jones and me. 
l) That car belongs to Jim and my sister.
m) These green apples belong to us, but those yellow ones 
belong to them.
n) I think this pencil belongs to me, but the yellow one belongs 
to you.
o) This package of cigarettes must belong to him. 
p) This umbrella belongs to your teacher. 
 
CAPÍTULO 2 – PRONOUNSINGLÊS – EEAr
25
q) These seats belong to them.
r) This watch doesn’t belong to me; it belongs to my father.
s) The red sweater belongs to me; the blue one belongs to Jim. 
14 - Complete the following sentences with a possessive adjective or 
a possessive pronoun.
a) William lost (his) pen. Will you please lend him (yours)?
b) I was on time for ______ class, but Helen was late for ______ .
c) They have ______ methods of travel, and we have ______.
d) We naturally prefer ______ methods, and they naturally prefer 
______ .
e) I found ______ notebook, but John couldn’t find ______.
f) They think that ______ home is the prettiest on the block, 
and we think ______ is.
g) I left _____ pen at home. May I borrow _____ for a moment?
h) He drives to work in ______ car, and she drives to work in 
______.
i) Tell William not to forget to bring ______ tennis racket, and 
don’t forget to bring ______.
j) They swim in ______ pool, and we swim in ______.
k) I have ______ vacation in June, and Helen has______ In July.
l) I found ______ umbrella, but Helen couldn’t find ______.
m) We were late for ______ class, and Helen and Grace were also 
late for ______.
n) John enjoys ______,work, and I enjoy ______.
o) Each student in the school has ______ own desk and ______ 
own locker.
p) I borrowed money from all ______ friends, but Helen refused 
to borrow any money from ______.
q) We have a television set in ______ bedroom, and the boys 
have another set in ______.
r) Where are you going on ______ vacation? I hope to spend 
______ in Europe.
s) They have ______ ideas on such matters, and we have 
______ .
t) We spend ______ money in one way; they spend ______ 
in another way.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS:
Reflexive
Pronouns
Translation
myself
yourself
himself
herself
itself
ourselves
yourselves
themselves
me, mim mesmo(a), próprio(a)
te, si, ti, você mesmo(a), próprio(a)
se, si mesmo, próprio, ele mesmo, próprio
se, si mesma, própria, ele mesma, própria
se, si mesmo(a), próprio(a), ele / ela mesmo(a), próprio(a)
nos, nós memos(as), próprios(as)
vos, vós mesmos(as), próprios(as)
se, si mesmos(as), próprios(as), eles / elas mesmos(as), 
próprios(as)
3 usos distintos, diferenciados pela sintaxe:
10 uso) REFLEXIVE USE (Uso Reflexivo): LOGO APÓS O 
VERBO, a traduçaão será: “me, te, se, nos, vos, se.” 
Ex.:
I always CUT MYSELF with my razor. (Eu sempre me corto 
com o meu barbeador.)
20 uso) EMPHASIZING USE (Uso Enfático): ANTES DO 
VERBO ou APÓS SEU COMPLEMENTO, seu uso será enfático 
e a tradução será: “mesmo, mesma”. 
Ex.:
She HERSELF cuts the cake
⇔
She cuts the cake HERSELF.
= Ela mesma cortou o bolo.
30 uso) IDIOMATIC USE (Uso Idiomático): Se os pronomes 
reflexivos vêm precedidos de BY, isto signica: “a sós, sozinho (a)”.
Ex.:
She is preparing a cake BY HERSELF (Ela está preparando 
um bolo SOZINHA.)
ONE / ONES
Nós usamos “one” ou “ones” no lugar do substantivo que já 
foi mencionado ou é conhecido na situação, geralmente quan-
do estamos adicionando informação ou fazendo comparação 
entre duas coisas da mesma espécie.
Ex:
My car is the blue one. (Meu carro é o azul. – Não preciso 
repetir a palavra “car”)
I didn’t understand the first text and I don’t understand 
the second one (Eu não entendi o primeiro texto e não en-
tendo o segundo – não preciso repetir a palavra “text”)
Are the new curtains longer than the old ones? – As novas 
cortinas são maiores do que as velhas? – Não precisa 
repetir a palavra “curtains”)
PALAVRAS INTERROGATIVAS
São adjetivos, pronomes ou advérbios usados geralmente 
no início da frase interrogativa.
São elas:
1 - “How” (como, de que modo)
Exemplo:
How are you feeling now?
I’m better, thanks.
How + adjetivos ou advérbios
1.1 - “How old” (que idade)
Exemplo:
How old are your children?
1.2 - “How deep” (que profundidade)
Exemplo:
How deep is that pool?
1.3 - “How far” (que distância)
Exemplo: 
How far is it from São Paulo to Rio de Janeiro?
1.4 - “How fast” (a que velocidade)
Exemplo:
How fast did you drive?
CAPÍTULO 2 – PRONOUNS INGLÊS – EEAr
26
1.5 - “How high” (que altura) - usado para coisas.
Exemplo:
How high is the wall?
1.6 - “How long” (que altura) - que comprimento / quanto)
Exemplo:
How long did you stay there?
How long is the avenue?
1.7 - “How long ago” (há quanto tempo)
Exemplo:
How long ago did you fly to Africa?
1.8 - “How much” (quanto/a) usado com coisas incontáveis.
Exemplo:
How much books did you buy?
1.9 - “How many” (quanto/as usado com coisas contáveis.
Exemplo:
How many books did you buy?
1.10 - “How often” (quantas vezes)
Exemplo:
How often did the bell ring?
1.11 - “How soon” (dentro de quanto tempo)
Exemplo:
How soon are you coming back?
1.12- “How tall” (que altura) - usado para pessoas.
Exemplo:
How tall is your youngest son?
1.13 - “How thick” (que espessura).
Exemplo:
How thick is the dicionary?
1.14 - “How wide” (que largura)
Exemplo:
How wide is the avenue?
1.15 - “How quickly” (com que rapidez)
Exemplo:
How quickly did he make the speech?
1.16 - “How about” (que, tal, e ...)
Exemplo:
How about going home now?
15 - Use “how” + adjetive or adverb, as appropriate:
a) ________ is Mount Everest? It’s 29,002 feet above sea level.
b) ________ is she? She’s 18 years old.
c) ________ was Brazil discovered?
It was discovered almost 500 years ago.
d) ________ is it from Porto Alegre to Florianópolis? It is 500km.
e) ________ do they go to their country?
They go there every year.
f) ________ was the red boat?
it was 5 meters long.
g) ________ is your grandfather?
He is 6 feet tall.
h) ________ languages do people speak in Canada? They speak 
two languages.
i) ________ is this dirty lake? It’s four meters deep.
j) ________ does a dog live? Maybe 10 or 12 years.
k) ________ coffee is exported from Brazil?
l) ________ can we sign the contract?
The sooner the better.
2. “What” (o que, que, qual, quais) - é usado para perguntas 
de modo geral, sobre ações, profissões ou nacionalidade e 
refere-se a um número ilimitado de coisas não é seletivo.
Exemplo:
What is that?
What are you doing?
What are you? I’m a teacher.
What spacecraft is this? It’s the American’s.
What is that man? He’s a doctor.
2.1 - “What ... for” (para que, por que)
Exemplo:
What is the machine for?
2.2 - “What + be ... like”(como é)
Exemplo:
What is you new apartment like?
It’s big and comfortable.
2.3 - “What about” (que tal? E quanto a ...?)
Exemplo:
What about going to the movies?
3. - “Which” (qual, quais, o que, que) é usado para perguntas 
específicas com a finalidade de uma escolha (expressa ou su-
bentendida) restrita a um pequeno grupo. É seletivo e refere-se 
a um número limitado.
Exemplo:
Which came first, the appetizers or the vegetables?
Here we have two magazines. Which is yours?
Which of these girls is your daughter?
4. - “Who” (quem) como sujeito da oração:
4.1 - “Who” como sujeito da oração:
Exemplo:
Who came with you? My sister did.
sujeito
 ⇒ Atenção:
Observe que a pergunta foi feita sem o verbo auxiliar “do” 
/ “does” / “did”.
Veja outro exemplo:
Who types this report for me?
sujeito
4.2 - “Who” como objeto da oração:
Exemplo:
Who are you waiting for dinner?
objeto sujeito
CAPÍTULO 2 – PRONOUNSINGLÊS – EEAr
27
5. - “Whom” (quem) sempre funciona como objeto da ora-
ção. É considerado um uso muito formal.
Exemplo:
1) Whom have you loved since you were a teenager?
 objeto sujeito
(uso formal) Exemplo:
2) Who have you loved since you were a teenager?
 objeto sujeito
5.1 - “Whom” deve ser usado após uma preposição.
Exemplo:
3) For whom did Cathy work?
 prepos.
4) At whom are you looking?
 prepos.
 ⇒ Atenção:
Estas frases poderiam ser ditas com a preposição no final e 
elas seriam mais informais. Confira:
Exemplo:
5) Who did Cathy work for?
 prepos.
6) Who are you looking at?
 prepos.
Memorize:
whom - uso formal - veja exemplos 1, 3 e 4; é obrigatório 
após uma preposição - veja exemplos 3 e .
who - uso informal - veja exemplos 2, 5 e 6.
6. “Whose” (de quem) é usado para saber quem é o possui-
dor de uma determinada coisa que pode vir logo após “whose” 
ou não.
Exemplo:
Whose wallet is this? ou Whose is this wallet?
7. “Why” (por que)
Exemplo:
Why are you so angry?
8. “When” (quando)
Exemplo:
When are you going to travel?
9. “Where” (onde)
Exemplo:
Where did you study in 1980?
16 - Fill in the blanks using, “who”, “whom”, or “whose”:
a) For _______ does that woman work?
b) _______ did you meet at the dinner party?
c) _______ dog s are these? _______ are their owners?
d) _______ were you talking to when I entered the room?
e) _______ knows the best shoemaker in this city?
f) _______ pictures did you take? Only my son’s.
g) From _______ did the boy receive so many gifts?
17 - Read this text and DON’T FORGET to look up the new words in 
the dictionary 
IN A WORD
The English writer Rudyard Kipling, author of Kim, the Jungle 
Books, and the famous poem “If” , was very popular. His stories 
about a boy named Mowgli that was raised by animals in the 
jungle were a great success among children and adults all over 
the world. In 1890 an American magazine 
offered Kipling a contract to write a series of stories for which 
they would pay him a dollar a word, a fantastic offer at the time. 
A rich American lady had the hobby of collecting autographs of 
famous people and she sent Kipling a letter together with a one-
-dollar bill, asking him to write her “a word”. A few days later she 
received Kiplings reply. It contained exactly one word.- “Thanks”.
 Complete the questions with the correct interrogative word. 
a) _______ was Rudyard Kipling? (Who) (Whom) 
He was the author of Kim, the Jungle.. Books, “If”, and others.
b) _______ was Rudyard Kipling? (Which) (What) 
He was a writer. 
c) _______ was Mowgli? (Whom) (Who) 
He was a boy that was raised by animals in the jungle. 
d) _______ did an American magazine contact Kipling? (Where) 
(When) 
In 1890. 
e) _______ did the American magazine owners offer Kipling? 
(What) (Which) 
They offered him a contract. 
f) _______ would they pay him for a series of stories? (How 
much) (How Many) 
They would pay him a dollar a word. 
g) _______ was it a fantastic offer? (How) (why) 
Because it was a fot of money at that time. 
h) _______ hobby did the lady have, collecting stamps or col-
lecting autographs? (What) (Which) 
The lady’s hobby was collecting autographs, 
i) _______ did the lady receive Kipling’s reply? (When) (Where) 
She received his reply a few days later, 
j) _______ words did Kipling’s reply contain? (How much) 
(How many) 
lt contained just one word “Thanks”. 
18 - Choose the best alternative or interrogative word to complete 
these sentences: 
1) (UFSC) _______ university did he go to, PUC or Federal?
a) What b) Whose c) Which d) Where
2) (Fuvest) Complete com a palavra “qual”: 
a) _______ is the reason for tragedy? 
b) _______ of the reasons he presented did they accept?
3) (Fuvest) Complete a pergunta:
a) _______ do you know she’s twenty-one? She told me.
b) _______ friends visited you at Easter? Suzan’s friends did.
4) (Fuvest) Complete com o pronome interrogativo adequado.
a) _______ house is this? It’s John’s.
b) _______ is your handbag? On the table.
c) _______ difficult was it? Not so difficult.
CAPÍTULO 2 – PRONOUNS INGLÊS – EEAr
28
5) (UFGO) _______ did you put the bird’s cage?
a) When b) Where c) Why d) Whose
6) (UFMG) _______ were their names? Their names were Arms-
trong and Aldrin.
a) Whose b) What c) Whom d) Who
7) (UFSP) _______ do you work hard? Because I’m not rich.
a) Where b) What c) How d) Why
8) (CESGRANRIO) Mark the item which contains the correct ques-
tion for the answer: “... in a dark forest.”
a) When did a big wolf wait for the little girl?
b) Why was a big wolf waiting for the little girl?
c) Who waited in a dark forest for the little girl?
d) Where did a big wolf wait for the little girl?
9) (CESGRANRIO) Mark the question to which the following sen-
tences could be the answer: “he decided to get out of the car.”
a) Whose decision was that?
b) Where did he decide to get out of the car?
c) When did he decide to get out of the car?
d) What did he decide to do?
10) The scientist _______ biography I’m reading and _______ 
discovered the cure for tuberculosis, did not receive the prize 
_______ he deserved.
a) Who - whose - which
b) Which - that - that
c) Whose - who - that
d) Whose - whom - which
Gabarito:
1) a) She / them b) He / it c) They / them
d) They / us e) her f) him
2) a) my / her b) Our / His / Our / Her / She / Their
c) your
3) 1) c 2) b 3) c 4) d
4) a) my / her b) our / his / our / her / she / their c) your
5) c 6) b 7) c 8) d
9. 1) c 2) d 3) a 4) d 5) b
6) c 7) c 8) c
10. a) them b) us c) We d) us e) me
f) them g) him h) him i) us j) me
k) us l) they m) her n) He o) her
p) us q) her r) me s) me t) her
11. b) them c) her d) you e) them f) them
g) us h) them i) him j) her k) them
l) him m) him / her / it n) her o) him
p) them q) him r) them s) them t) them
12. b) ours c) hers d) yours e) mine f) his
g) yours / mine h) hers / mine i) yours
j) yours k) hers l) theirs / ours m) yours / mine
n) mine o) mine p) ours q) mine r) yours
13. b) ... is hers c) ... is mine d) ... is theirs
e) ... is mine f) ... are theirs g) ... are ours
h) ... are theirs i) ... isn’t mine j) ... is his
k) ... is ours l) ... is theirs
m) ... are ours / ... are theirs
n) ... is mine / ... is yours
o) ... be his (após MUST, CAN. COULD, MAY, MIGHT o verbo 
vem na base-form.)
p) ... is his / hers / its q) ... are theirs
r) ... isn’t mine / ... is his s) ... is mine / ... is his
14. b) my / hers c) their / ours d) our / theirs
e) my / his f) their / ours g) my / yours
h) his / hers i) his / yours j) their / ours
k) my / hers l) my / hers m) our / hers
n) his / mine o) his / his p) my / hers
q) our / theirs r) your / mine s) their / ours
t) our / theirs
15. a) How high b) How old
c) How long ago / When d) How far
e) How often f) How long g) How tall
h) How many i) How dep j)How long
k) How much l) Where
16. a) Who b) Who ⇔ Whom
c) Whose / Who d) Who ⇔ Whom
e) Who f) Whose g) Whom
17. a) Who b) What c) Who d) When
e) What f) How much g) Why h) Which
i) When j) How many
18. 1) c 2) a) What / b) Which
3) a) How / b) Whose
4) a) Whose / b) Where / c) How
5) c 6) c 7) a 8) d 9) d
10) c 11) c
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 3 – PREPOSITIONSINGLÊS – EEAr
29
Capítulo 3
PREPOSITIONS
 ⇒ Among (entre): dando a ideia de divisão, uns com os 
outros ou no grupo, na companhia de.
Exemplo:
Divide these sweets among the children.
He is the only one among my friends who supports my 
mood.
 ⇒ At: Usado para expressar
a) horas, tempo;
b) uma posição exata ou um lugar exato;
c) com uma cidade ou vila se nos interessa somente um 
ponto particular ou atividade dela;
d) na direção de.
Exemplo:
The train left at 8:30 p.m.
The girls is at the corner of down street.
The train stops at Birmingham (train station).
Look at my new car.
 ⇒ Between (entre): expressando uma posição no meio de 
duas coisas ou pessoas e dando a ideia de dúvida, segredo 
ou reunião de duas ou mais coisas ou pessoas.
Exemplo:
The bank is between the pharmacy and the baker’s.
I can’t choose between these three dresses.
Just between you and me: she is pretty !!
 ⇒ Beyond (além, melhor ou mais do que):
Exemplo:
The house lies beyond that field !
She is beyond what I dreamed !
The success of the plan was beyond any expectation.
 ⇒ By (pelo, pela, perto de, não além de):
Exemplo:
The book was written by Shakespeare.
The bank is by the post office.
By next week I’ll have finished the exercises.
 ⇒ Except (exceto):
Exemplo:
All the boys had a pen except him.
 ⇒ From (de): indicando procedência, origem, ou início de 
algo.
Exemplo:
He is from Belém.
He works from 9 to 12.
 ⇒ For (por, para): usado para indicar:
a) “pertence a”;
b) duração de tempo;
c) distância
d) a favor de
e) razão;
f) propósito;
g) um movimento.
Exemplo:
This is for you
We’ve lived there for 5 years.
What did you do that for?
We talked for hours
Let’s go out for a dinner 
They left for America yesterday.
 ⇒ In - no , na , em: Usado para indicar lugar , período no tem-
po, profissão, situação , como “dentre de um certo tempo”.
Exemplo:
They’re in the kitchen 
I was born in July 
I’ll be back in an hour
He’s in the local police
 ⇒ Into - para dentro: Usado para indicar movimento ou 
transformação física.
Exemplo:
They game into the room.
This cup of water got into ice because of the low tem-
perature !!
 ⇒ Of - do, de, da → Usado para expressar:
a) “pertencendo a” b) medida
c) causa d) descrição
Exemplo:
The cover of this book is interesting
A pound of potatoes
He died of starvation
A man of 40
It’s made of gold
 ⇒ Off → Usado para indicar movimento para fora de algo; 
interrupção; “a uma certa distância de” 
Exemplo:
A tile has come off the roof
Our house is off high street
 ⇒ On - no, sobre → Usado para expressar:
a) contato com uma superfície;
b) datas, dias da semana , um período
c) com entretenimento;
d) com respeito a ou a respeito de.
CAPÍTULO 3 – PREPOSITIONS INGLÊS – EEAr
30
Exemplo:
The book is on the table
See you on sunday
This book is on insects
Born on 4th July 
What’s on TV tonight?
 ⇒ To - para , até ,à
Exemplo:
We’re going to Paris.
He worked from 6 to 12.
Brazil won by 3 goals to zero.
 ⇒ Under - sob, debaixo, em processo de 
Exemplo:
The box is under the stairs.
Don’t sweep the dust under the carpet
The bridge is under repair.
 ⇒ Up - para cima
Exemplo:
Don’t run up the stairs
 ⇒ With / Without - com / sem
Exemplo:
Be patient with the children.
Yo’ll have to go with / without me.
Special Difficulties
 ⇒ By X With
BY denota o agente, WITH o instrumento:
Bill was bitten by a dog.
He did it by working hard.
The rat was killed with a stick.
They broke the window with a stone.
 ⇒ On + Verb (+ ING)
On arriving in Paris, I learnt that my house was burned down. 
(= When I arrived in Paris)
 ⇒ About X On
ABOUT e ON são empregadas para indicar um tema ou 
assunto.
They made a research on tropical diseases.
We attended a course of lectures on greek philosophy.
I read a book about/on the origin of English names.
 ⇒ Of X From
OF após o verbo make indica que a substância de que algo 
é feito não sofreu uma transformação. FROM indica a existência 
de um processo de transformação:
OF
Tires are made of rubber.
Tables are usually made of wood.
That bridge is made of steel and concrete.
A window is made of glass.
FROM
A cake is made from sugar, flour and eggs.
Glass is made from sand and line.
Wine is made from grapes.
Steel is made from iron.
Preposições como REGÊNCIAS de verbos transi-
tivos indiretos (REGÊNCIAS VERBAIS):
PREPOSITIONAL VERBS (INSEPARABLE): Vale destacar que 
nestes casos não se pode separar o verbo de sua preposição, 
ou seja, nenhuma classe gramatical dever ser intercalada entre 
os dois!!!!
 ⇒ ALLOW FOR – Airplane passengers should allow for delays 
at the check-in counter. – Passageiros de avião devem estar 
preparados para demoras na fila de embarque. 
 ⇒ APPLY FOR – He wants to apply for the job. – Ele quer se 
candidatar ao emprego. 
 ⇒ APPROVE OF – My mom doesn’t approve of me arriving 
home after midnight. – Minha mãe não aprova que eu 
chegue em casa após a meia-noite. 
 ⇒ ATTEND TO – The clerk will attend to your problem as soon 
as she is free. – A funcionária vai cuidar de seu problema 
assim que ela estiver desocupada. 
 ⇒ BREAK INTO – We put an alarm in our house after a thief 
broke into it last year. – Instalamos um alarme em nossa 
casa depois de ela ter sido arrombada por um ladrão no 
ano passado. 
 ⇒ CALL FOR – The job calls for English fluency. – O emprego 
exige fluência em inglês. 
 ⇒ CALL ON – I sometimes call on my friends for help with 
problems. – Eu às vezes recorro a meus amigos em busca 
de ajuda para meus problemas. 
 ⇒ CARE FOR – He is not the kind of person who cares for 
others. – Ele não é do tipo que se preocupa com os outros. 
 ⇒ COME ACROSS – He came across an old friend. – Ele en-
controu um velho amigo. 
 ⇒ COMMENT ON – The reporter commented on the need for 
better health care. – O egative comentou a respeito da 
necessidade de melhor atendimento à saúde. 
 ⇒ CONFORM TO – The army requires that all soldiers conform 
to strict rules. – O exército exige que todos soldados 
submetam-se a regras rígidas. 
 ⇒ CONSENT TO – He will only consent to signing the contract 
if it complies with his demands. – Ele só vai concordar em 
assinar o contrato se o mesmo atender às suas egativet. 
CAPÍTULO 3 – PREPOSITIONSINGLÊS – EEAr
31
 ⇒ COUNT ON – We can’t count on you because you are never 
here when we need you. – Não podemos egati com você 
porque você nunca está aqui quando precisamos de você. 
 ⇒ DEAL WITH – You’ll have to deal with the situation. – Você 
terá que saber lidar com a situação. 
 ⇒ DO WITHOUT – I egat have a car, so I’ll have to do without 
one egat I get a job. – Não tenho carro, portanto vou ter 
que me virar sem até conseguir um emprego. 
 ⇒ GET INTO – 1. She got into the Federal University in her first 
try. – Ela conseguiu entrar na Universidade Federal em 
sua primeira egative. 2. His behavior isn’t normal. I don’t 
know what has got into him. – Seu comportamento não 
é normal. Não sei o que deu nele. 
 ⇒ GET OVER – She got over the flu after being sick for a week. 
– Ele se recuperou da gripe depois depois de estar doente 
durante uma semana. 
 ⇒ GO INTO – I went into the museum when it started raining. 
– Entrei no museu quando começou a chover. 
 ⇒ GO OVER – She will go over the essay to check for errors. – Ela 
vai egativ o texto para verificar se não há erros.⇒ GO THROUGH – 1. My grandmother went through difficult 
times when my grandfather died. – Minha vó passou por 
momentos difíceis, quando meu vô faleceu. 2. I’ve found 
a box of old documents but haven’t had time to go through 
them yet. – Achei uma caixa com documentos antigos mas 
ainda não tive tempo para examiná-los. 
 ⇒ INSIST ON – I insist on having a native speaking English 
teacher. – Insisto em ter um falante nativo como profes-
sor de egati. 
 ⇒ LISTEN TO – I like to listen to jazz music. – Gosto de escutar 
música jazz. 
 ⇒ LIVE ON – They live on a small retirement pension. – Eles 
vivem de uma pequena aposentadoria. 
 ⇒ LOOK AFTER – When you grow up you’ll have to look after 
your parents. – Quando cresceres, terás que cuidar dos 
teus pais. 
 ⇒ LOOK FOR – What are you looking for? – O que é que você 
está procurando? 
 ⇒ LOOK INTO – I’ll look into that matter after the meeting. – 
Vou egative essa questão depois da reunião. 
 ⇒ RESORT TO – There is no need to resort to violence when 
resolving a problem. – Não é necessário recorrer à violência 
para resolver um problema. 
 ⇒ RUN INTO – I ran into an old friend yesterday. – Encontrei 
um velho amigo ontem. 
 ⇒ SEND FOR – 1. You are very sick. I’ll send for the doctor. – Você 
está muito doente. Vou mandar chamar o médico. 2. I’m 
going to send for information on American universities. – Vou 
pedir informações sobre universidades norte-americanas. 
 ⇒ STAND BY – He stood by her during the good times and the 
bad. – Ele manteve-se ao lado dela durante os bons e os 
maus momentos. 
 ⇒ STAND FOR – 1. BBC stands for British Broadcasting Corpora-
tion. – BBC significa British Broadcasting Corporation. 2. Our 
group stands for the rights and welfare of animals. – Nosso 
grupo defende os direitos e o bem estar dos animais.
Preposições como REGÊNCIAS de ADJETIVOS 
(REGÊNCIAS NOMINAIS):
 ⇒ PREPOSITION-DEPENDENT VERBS (PREPOSITIONAL VERBS):
a) Advise 
on: Who is the best man to advise me on this question?
to: What do you advise me to do?
b) Agree
to: The teacher agreed to accompany us.
with: I think they all agree with you.
* aim – at: His speech was aimed at the boys who were cheating.
* apologize
for: You must apologize me for being so rude.
to: He apologize to the principal.
c) ask
after: My sister asked after your health.
for: Do you know what he asked for the car?
about: The detective has been asking about everybody.
* base – on: His large business was based on good service.
* become – of: What has become of the box of candy?
* benefit – by: My grandfather benefited by the medicine.
* break
* into: The robbers broke into the building and shot the manage.
* through: Our army has broken through the enemy’s lines.
* with: If you want to pass you have to break with some of 
your habits.
* bump
against: It was so dark that we bumped against each other.
into: I bumped into an old friend on the way to work.
d) care
for: Would you care for a drink
about: He doesn’t seem to care about the job.
e) climb
down: The men climbed down the mountain.
up. He climbed up the stairs.
f) compare
to: He compared his love to a flower.
with: He cannot compare with Shaw as a playwright.
*compliment – on: The principal complimented the boy 
on his good marks.
* congratulate – on: I congratulated my friend on his success.
* count – on: You can count on my help. (but: You can 
count me out)
CAPÍTULO 3 – PREPOSITIONS INGLÊS – EEAr
32
*deduce – from: I deduced that he was worse from what 
he said to his mother.
* deduct – from: They deduct R$ 200 from my salary.
* depend – on: Children depend on their parents.
* desist – from: She finally desisted from gossiping.
* disagree
about: I disagreed with him about the time of the accident.
with: The witness disagreed with the lawyer.
* discord – from: The pupil discorded from the teacher.
* dissuade – from: The father dissuaded his son from leaving school.
* dream – of (about): The boy always dreamed of being a hero.
* enter
into: We entered into conversation with the students. 
(begin, open)
for: James entered for the competition. (= give the name for)
* fight – against (with): Our country fought against/with 
the enemy.
* fill – with: The children filled the hole with sand. (but = 
the hole was full of sand)
* know
by: I know her by sight, but we have not been introduced.
of: I don’t know the man you mention, but of course I 
know of him.
* laugh – at: Nobody laughed at my joke.
* leave – for: William left for England last wednesday.
* live
at: Mary lives at 36 Main Street.
in: We have lived in this house for 20 years.
on: He lives on fruit.
with: Joan is living with her sister in Miame.
* mistake – for: Don Quixote mistook the windmills for giants.
* operate
for: He was operated for appendicitis.
on: The doctor operated on the injured man.
* point – at: She pointed her forefinger at me reprovingly. 
(but: the needle points to the north).
* profit – by (from): A wise person profits by his mistakes.
* prohibit – from: They were prohibited from using the 
promenade deck.
* regret – to: I regret to have to leave so soon.
* rely – on: You should rely on your own efforts.
* remind – for: She reminds me of someone I met in France 
many years ago.
* revenge – on: I revenged myself on her for letting me down.
*ride
in: a car, a bus.
on: a bicycle, horseback.
* rob – of: The poor man was robbed of everything he had.
* shoot – at: The pupils shot question after question at me.
* sit
at: The young executive sat at his desk and summoned an 
assembly.
in: The lady was sitting in a comfortable armchair.
for: He is sitting for his school Certificate Examination (= is 
a candidate for)
on: The little boy sat on a stool and waited for the principal.
*spy
into: He is used to spying into other people’s affairs.
on: Mr. Smith saw two men spying on him from behind a tree.
throw
at: The boy threw a stone at the man.
to: Throw that ball to me please.
g) vote
against: They voted against my motion.
for: Jim voted for our candidate.
* yield – to: The disease yielded to treatment.
 ⇒ PREPOSITION-DEPENDENT ADJECTIVES:
abreast of 
absent from 
accused of/by 
accustomed to 
acquainted with 
addicted to 
adjacent to 
afraid of / to (infini-
tive) 
angry at 
annoyed with/by 
associated with 
aware of 
blessed with 
bored with/by 
capable of 
close to 
cluttered with 
committed to 
compatible with 
composed of 
concerned about 
confronted with 
connected to 
conscious of 
consistent with 
content with 
contrary to 
convinced of 
coordinated with
covered with
interested in
crowded with
dedicated to 
devoted to 
disappointed with 
discriminated 
against 
divorced from 
done with 
dressed in 
 engaged in/to 
envious of 
equipped with 
equivalent to 
excited about 
exhausted from 
exposed to 
faithful to 
familiar with 
filled with 
finished with 
fond of 
friendly to/with 
frightened of/by 
full of 
furnished with 
gone from 
grateful to/for 
guilty of 
innocent of
known for 
invited to 
involved in 
jealous of
limited to 
located in 
made of/from 
married to 
mistaken for
opposed to 
patient with 
pleased with 
polite to 
prepared for 
protected from 
proud of 
qualified for 
related to 
relevant to 
remembered for 
responsible for 
satisfied with 
scared of/by 
suitable for 
terrified of/by 
tired of/from 
upset with 
used to 
useful to 
worried about 
1 - Complete these with prepositions:
a) Cheese is made __________ the thick part of milk.
b) I found a book __________ animals in that shop.
c) My raincoat is made __________ plastic.
d) Open it __________ cutting along this line.
e) What’s this book _________? It’s _________ verb tenses.
CAPÍTULO 3 – PREPOSITIONSINGLÊS – EEAr33
f) This church was designed _________ a friend of mine.
g) My watch is made __________ gold.
h) “Romeo and Juliet” was written _______ William Shakespeare.
i) Will you have finished the exercise ________9? No, perhaps 
____________ 9:15.
j) Whose is that house made _________ stone?
k) What are they talking _________?
l) ___________ leaving the hotel, he was hit _________ a boy 
__________ a stone.
2. Match the columns:
1) accused ( 7 ) for
2) accustomed ( 2 ) to
3) acquainted ( 10 ) to
4) envious ( 4 ) of
5) excited ( 8 ) in
6) exhausted ( 3 ) with
7) known ( 9 ) of/from
8) involved ( 6 ) from
9) made ( 1 ) of/by
10) married ( 5 ) about
3. From 1 to 20, fill in the blanks with the correct answers.
1. I was born _______ April 21st, 1970.
2. __________ those days we lived ________ a house 
__________ a small village.
3. I profited _________ the experience.
4. Don’t you agree __________ me that the teacher is right?
5. The boys are sitting _________ an examination _________ 
November 16 th.
6. Our house was broken _________ by burglars.
7. Lucy’s father has lived _________ a milk diet _________ 1970.
8. You may rely _________ my early arrival.
9. My mother agreed ________ my marrying Jim.
10. Their defenses were strong, but our soldiers broke _________
11. The pupils were prohibited ________ smoking in school.
12. Jack aimed ________ the bird, fired and missed.
13. Can I depend ________ this railway guide?
14. My sister is leaving _______ the United States ________ April.
15. Bob is always mistaken _________ his brother.
16. I wouldn’t dream _________ lying to you.
17. You didn’t congratulate him __________ his marriage.
18. John sat ______ his desk and worked ______ 9 _______5.
19. This reminds me _________ what we did when we were 
_________ Japan.
20. I was robbed _________ my watch.
4. (Udesc 96) Choose the CORRECT alternative to complete the 
sentence:
That girl … the corner told everybody she is going … leave … 
New York … seven tomorrow night, … a huge airplane.
a) by – for – on – in – at
b) under – below – by – at – for
c) through – into – onto – on – on
d) on – to – for – at – by
e) on – to – for – in – by
5. (Vunesp 94) Assinale a alternativa que preenche corretamente a 
lacuna:
Something is cooking … the oven.
a) up b) to c) in d) into e) for
6. (Ita 95) A preposição que deve acompanhar o verbo rely, relacionado 
no texto abaixo, é:
It’s clear that Gossard and the rest of Pearl Jam no longer want to 
rely … anger and craziness to drive the band.
a) at b) on c) in d) for e) with
7. (Ita 95) A preposição que preenche a lacuna corretamente é:
Scientists have been talking about producing better foods … 
genetic engineering ever since the technology first became 
available more than 20 years ago.
a) by b) for c) over d) through e) with
8. (Vunesp 93) Assinale a alternativa que preenche corretamente a 
sentença a seguir:
He walked … the room.
a) at b) on c) between d) into e) among
9. (Personal 00) Choose the alternative that best completes the follo-
wing sentence:
The cat jump … the table in order … get the food that was … it.
a) up – to – on b) about – for – up 
c) over – for – about d) on – to – on
e) onto – to – on 
10. (Vunesp 95) Assinale a alternativa que preenche a lacuna da frase 
a seguir corretamente:
I read a chapter … politics.
a) on b) at c) above d) before e) after
11. (Cesgranrio 95) Mark the item which contains the prepositions that 
complete the passage below:
The program Dr. Black is working … his colleagues … the department 
… psychiatry will build on a pioneering study done … 1989.
a) with, of, about, in b) with, on, from, in
c) with, in, of, in d) without, at, by, on
e) without, from, after, on
12. (Fuvest 79) Assinale a alternativa correta:
… the circumstances you must go … foot.
a) Under – with b) Under – by
c) On – on d) Under – on
e) On – under 
CAPÍTULO 3 – PREPOSITIONS INGLÊS – EEAr
34
13. (Faap 96) Quais preposições completam corretamente o texto 
abaixo?
An executive presiding over a lunchtime meeting … a busy San 
Francisco restaurant was having no luck getting the waiter’s 
attention. So, using his cellular phone, he called the restaurant 
and asked … have some menus sent over … his table. It worked. 
(Reader’s Digest – Sep./95)
a) in, about, to b) at, to, in
c) in, for, on d) for, for, to
e) in, to, to
14. (Mackenzie 96) Complete with the appropriate preposition:
I – My wife was very glad … taking a trip abroad.
II – Are you hopeful … receiving a nice gift?
III – Whatever is good … you will be acceptable … me.
IV – Criminals belong … jail.
a) I – in; II – about; III – for, for; IV – to
b) I – on; II – of; III – about, for; IV – to 
c) I – with; II – for; III – for, to; IV – on
d) I – about; II – of; III – for, to; IV – in 
e) I – of; II – in; III – to, to; IV – at
15. (Mackenzie 96) Complete with the appropriate preposition:
I – How kind … you to invite us … your party!
II – I’m sorry … him but even so I’m not sorry … what I did.
III – Is the director confident … his abilities?
a) I – for, for; II – about, for; III – about
b) I – of, to; II – for, about; III – of
c) I – in, for; II – for, about; III – of
d) I – on, to; II – for, in; III – in
e) I – for, on; II – of, for; III – with
16. (Vunesp 96) Complete the sentence below with the appropriate 
preposition: 
She is very proud … her children.
a) at b) in c) on d) with e) of
17. (Vunesp 89) That experiment was performed … important scientists.
a) by b) to c) from d) against e) for
18. (Vunesp 86) Fried potatoes are called “French Fries” … the United States.
a) on b) about c) of d) from e) in
19. (Vunesp 87) Marque a alternativa correta:
Very little is known … nuclear energy.
a) of b) over c) in d) into e) about
20. (Vunesp 88) Complete with the appropriate preposition: 
Aspirin is the best drug to fight … headache.
a) on b) against c) with d) to e) for
21. (Cesgranrio 90) The sentence in which FOR is used in the same way 
as in These knives are now used for some general surgery is…
a) The laser has been used for years.
b) The technician is leaving for Tokyo.
c) This telephone records word for word.
d) The laser has become popular for its wide applicability.
e) Doctors use laser for several types of operations.
22. (Cesgranrio 91) In The sweet-and-lovely look is OUT; the aggressive 
punk pose is IN the capital words stand for:
a) out of work/ in vogue
b) out of sight/ in mind
c) out of order/ in memory
d) out of date/ in fashion
e) out of mind/ in sight
23. (Uel 97) A palavra OVER, na última frase do texto abaixo significa:
Olajuwon should have no trouble promoting his product. ‘All I 
drink is water’, says he. OVER a gallon a day.
a) sobre b) em cima de
c) super d) mais do que
e) abaixo de
24. (Mackenzie 97) Indicate the alternative that best completes the 
following sentence:
… the end, he gave … discussing … his father and said he would 
go … medicine.
a) In – up – with – in for b) At – up – with – in 
c) In – out – about – into d) At – in – with – out in
e) In – at – on – up at
25. (Vunesp 97) We stayed in Rome … two months.
a) since b) at c) in d) on e) for
26. (Vunesp 97) Marque a alternativa correta:
Charles … Mary are brother … sister.
a) or/ and b) and/ or
c) and/ but d) and/ and
e) but/ and
27. (Unirio 97) The word LIKE in Premier researchers use the Net to 
test projects like real-time, 3D models of colliding galaxies or 
rampaging tornadoes introduces elements of:
a) exemplification b) generalization 
c) reformulation d) comparison 
e) addition
28. (Ita 97) Mensagem Capadócia. 
Um adesivo “made in Paraguai” anda circulando nos vidros dos 
carros paulistanos: “Good girls go to heaven, bad girlsgo to 
everywhere”. É de doer, posto que o correto seria: “...”.
Bárbara Gancia, Folha do São Paulo de 07/06/96.
CAPÍTULO 3 – PREPOSITIONSINGLÊS – EEAr
35
– A perspicácia da colunista se faz notar de diversas formas no 
texto anterior. Uma delas é através da correção de uma im-
propriedade normativa. Qual seria a frase final do texto, aqui 
omitida propositalmente?
a) Good girls go heaven, bad girls everywhere.
b) Good girls go heaven, bad girls go everywhere.
c) Good girls go to heaven, bad girls to go to everywhere.
d) Good girls go to heaven, bad girls go everywhere.
e) Good girls go heaven, bad girls go to everywhere.
29. (Vunesp 98) Assinale a alternativa correta:
I … the river in a boat and swam … the stream.
a) across – cross b) cross – crossed
c) acrossed – crossing d) crossed – across 
e) crossing – across 
30. (Cesgranrio 98) The following sentences must be completed with 
between or among:
I – There were no radicals … her close friends.
II – The students talked quietly … themselves before the test 
started.
III – The father and the mother sat in the sofa, with the baby … 
them.
IV – The Queen of England is not very popular now … the British 
people.
V – There is much difference … the American and the Brazilian 
education systems.
– Between must be used in sentences:
a) III and V only. b) I, II and III only. 
c) II, III and IV only. d) II, IV and V only. 
e) I, II, III and V only.
31. (Cesgranrio 98) Fill in the blanks with the correct prepositions:
No higher education reforms are likely to be adopted … time to 
affect the choice that a student or his family makes about where 
the student should go to college today. For a student, not having 
to worry about cost would be a wonderful option. But … almost 
every student to be able to go to school these days, working out 
matters of cost is an essential part … choosing the best college.
a) on, to and in b) on, for and at
c) in, for and of d) in, before and in 
e) about, to and of
32. (Ufrs 97) Fill in the blank below with the best alternative:
Political corruption and civil unrest are … Mexico’s modern 
problems.
a) because b) between
c) throughout d) among
e) although
33. (Fei 97) Complete:
Pablo said that … Spain, everybody sleeps … 1 and 4 PM.
a) with – among b) among – between 
c) between – among d) among – at 
e) in – at
34. (Fei 96) Preencha a lacuna de acordo com o texto Who was the 
statue presented ... ? assinalando a resposta correta:
a) from b) for c) by d) at e) in
35. (Ita 91) A alternativa abaixo que preenche a lacuna de:
Buses here never arrive … time.
– Dando idéia de pontualidade:
a) on b) at c) in d) by e) up
Gabarito
1. a) from b) on ⇔ about c) of d) on
e) on ⇔ about / on ⇔ about f) by g) of
h) by i) at ⇔ by / at ⇔ by j) of
k) on ⇔ about l) On / by / with
2. ( 7 ) for ( 2 ) to ( 10 ) to ( 4 ) of ( 8 ) in ( 3 ) with
( 9 ) of/from ( 6 ) from ( 1 ) of/by ( 5 ) about
3. 1. on 2. on / in / in 3. from 4. with 5. for / on
6. into 7. on / in 8. on 9. to 10. through
11. from 12. at 13. on 14. for / in
15. for 16. of 17. on 18. from / to
19. of / in 20. of
4. D 5. C 6. B 7. D 8. D 9. E
10. A 11. C 12. D 13. E 14. D 15. B
16. E 17. A 18. E 19. E 20. B 21. E
22. D 23. D 24. A 25. E 26. D 27. A
28. D 29. D 30. A 31. C 32. D 33. B
34. C 35. A
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 4 – PASSIVE VOICE INGLÊS – EEAr
36
Capítulo 4
VOZ PASSIVA (PASSIVE VOICE)
 ⇒ TO BE + PARTICÍPIO
É a mesma sintaxe da língua portuguesa. A tradução é literal, 
nenhum problema. Porém meu amigo candidato, as únicas 
formas de você ter problemas com essa matéria facílima são: 
OU você não sabe conjugar o TO BE nos DEZ tempos verbais OU 
não sabe se o particípio do verbo que a questão está é regular 
ou irregular. Com o 1o problema, eu te ajudo com a tabelinha 
abaixo. Quanto ao 2o, “tu vai” tomar vergonha e DECORAR a 
tabela de verbos irregulares, VALEU???!!! (Caraca, taquei moral !!)
VERBO TO BE
Tempos V e r b a i s As conjugações
Simple Present AM / IS / ARE
Simple Past WAS / WERE
Will - Future WILL BE
Would - Conditional WOULD BE
Present Continuous AM / IS / ARE + BEING
Past Continuous WAS / WERE + BEING
Going to - Future AM / IS / ARE + GOING TO BE
Going to - Conditional WAS / WERE + GOING TO BE
Past Perfect HAD BEEN
Present Perfect HAS / HAVE BEEN
 ⇒ FALSOS COGNATOS - FALSE FRIENDS
Falsos conhecidos, também chamados de falsos amigos 
ou falsos cognatos, são palavras normalmente derivadas do 
latim, que têm portanto a mesma origem e que aparecem em 
diferentes idiomas com ortografia semelhante, mas que ao 
longo dos tempos acabaram adquirindo significados diferentes. 
No caso de palavras com sentido múltiplo, esta não-equi-
valência pode ocorrer em apenas alguns sentidos da palavra. 
Aqui neste trabalho são considerados falsos cognatos apenas 
aquelas palavras que predominantemente ocorrem como tal 
no inglês moderno. Longe de ser exaustiva, esta lista de falsos 
cognatos serve apenas para exemplificar o problema com 
ocorrências comuns e frequentes.
INGLÊS - PORTUGUÊS PORTUGUÊS - INGLÊS 
1. Actually (adv) - na verdade ..., o 
fato é que ... 
1. Atualmente - today, nowadays 
2. Agenda (n) - pauta do dia, pauta 
para discussões 
2. Agenda - appointment book; 
agenda 
3. Amass (v) - juntar, acumular. 3. Amassar - crush 
4. Anticipate (v) - prever; aguardar, 
ficar na expectativa 
4. Antecipar - to bring forward, to 
move forward
5. Application (n) - inscrição, regis-
tro, uso 
5. Aplicação (financeira) - invest-
ment 
6. Appointment (n) - hora marcada, 6. Apontamento - note 
7. Appreciation (n) - gratidão, reco-
nhecimento 
7. Apreciação - judgement 
8. Argument (n) - discussão, bate boca 8. Argumento - reasoning, point 
9. Assist (v) - ajudar, dar suporte 9. Assistir - to attend, to watch 
10. Assume (v) - presumir, aceitar 
como verdadeiro 
10. Assumir - to take over 
11. Attend (v) - assistir, participar de 11. Atender - to help; to answer; to 
examine 
12. Audience (n) - platéia, público 12. Audiência - court appearance; 
interview 
13. Balcony (n) - sacada 13. Balcão - counter 
14. Baton (n) - batuta (música), cacetete 14. Batom - lipstick 
15. Beef (n) - carne de gado 15. Bife - steak 
16. Cafeteria (n) - refeitório tipo uni-
versitário ou industrial 
16. Cafeteria - coffee shop, snack bar 
17. Camera (n) - máquina fotográfica 17. Câmara - tube (de pneu) chamber 
(pessoas) 
18. Carton (n) - caixa de papelão, 
pacote de cigarros (200) 
18. Cartão - card 
19. Casualty (n) - baixas (mortes ocor-
ridas em acidente ou guerra) 
19. Casualidade- chance 
20. Cigar (n) - charuto 20. Cigarro – cigarette
21. Collar (n) - gola, colarinho, coleira 21. Colar - necklace 
22. College (n) - faculdade, ensino 
de 3º grau 
22. Colégio (2º grau) - high school 
23. Commodity (n) - ar tigo, mer-
cadoria 
23. Comodidade - comfort 
24. Competition (n) - concorrência 24. Competição - contest 
25. Comprehensive (adj) - abrangente, 
amplo, extenso 
25. Compreensivo - understandable 
26. Compromise (v) - entrar em acor-
do, fazer concessão 
26. Compromisso - appointment; date 
27. Contest (n) - competição, concurso 27. Contexto - context 
28. Convenient (adj) - prático 28. Conveniente - appropriate 
29. Costume (n) - fantasia (roupa) 29. Costume - custom, habit 
30. Data (n) - dados (números, infor-
mações) 
30. Data - date 
31. Deception (n) - logro, fraude, o ato 
de enganar 
31. Decepção - disappointment 
32. Defendant (n) - réu, acusado 32. Advogado de defesa - defense 
attorney 
33. Design (v, n) - projetar, criar; pro-
jeto, estilo 
33. Designar - to appoint 
34. Editor (n) - redator 34. Editor - publisher 
35. Educated (adj) - instruído, com 
altograu de escolaridade 
35. Educado - with a good upbringing, 
polite 
36. Emission (n) - descarga (de gases, 
etc.) 
36. Emissão - issuing (of a document, 
etc.) 
37. Enroll (v) - inscrever-se, alistar-se, 
registrar-se 
37. Enrolar - to roll; to wind; to curl 
38. Eventually (adv) - f inalmente, 
consequentemente 
38. Eventualmente - occasionally 
39. Exciting (adj) - empolgante 39. Excitante - thrilling 
40. Exit (n, v) - saída, sair 40. Êxito - success 
41. Expert (n) - especialista, perito 41. Esperto - smart, clever 
42. Exquisite (adj.) - belo, refinado 42. Esquisito - strange, odd 
43. Fabric (n) - tecido 43. Fábrica - plant, factory 
44. Genial (adj) - afável, aprazível 44. Genial - brilliant 
45. Graduate program (n) - Curso de 
pós-graduação 
45. Curso de graduação - undergra-
duate program 
46. Gratuity (n) - gratificação, gorjeta 46. Gratuidade - the quality of being 
free of charge 
CAPÍTULO 4 – PASSIVE VOICEINGLÊS – EEAr
37
47. Grip (v) - agarrar firme 47. Gripe - cold, flu, influenza 
48. Hazard (n,v) - risco, arriscar 48. Azar - bad luck 
49. Idiom (n) - expressão idiomática, 
linguajar 
49. Idioma - language 
50. Income tax return (n) - declaração 
de imposto de renda 
50. Devolução de imposto de renda 
- refund 
51. Ingenuity (n) - engenhosidade 51. Ingenuidade - naiveté / naivety 
52. Injury (n) - ferimento 52. Injúria - insult 
53. Inscription (n) - gravação em 
relevo (sobre pedra, metal, etc.) 
53. Inscrição - registration, application 
54. Intend (v) - pretender, ter intenção 54. Entender - understand 
55. Intoxication (n) - embriaguez, 
efeito de drogas 
55. Intoxicação - poisoning 
56. Journal (n) - periódico, revista 
especializada 
56. Jornal – newspaper
57. Lamp (n) - luminária 57. Lâmpada - light bulb 
58. Large (adj) - grande, espaçoso 58. Largo - wide
59. Lecture (n) - palestra, aula 59. Leitura – reading 
60. Legend (n) - lenda 60. Legenda - subtitle 
61. Library (n) - biblioteca 61. Livraria - book shop
62. Lunch (n) - almoço 62. Lanche - snack 
63. Magazine (n) - revista 63. Magazine - department store 
64. Mayor (n) - prefeito 64. Maior - bigger 
65. Medicine (n) - remédio, medicina 65. Medicina - medicine 
66. Moisture (n) - umidade 66. Mistura - mix, mixture, blend 
67. Motel (n) - hotel de beira de estrada 67. Motel - love motel 
68. Notice (v) - notar, aperceber-se; 
aviso, comunicação 
68. Notícia - news 
69. Novel (n) - romance 69. Novela - soap opera 
70. Office (n) - escritório 70. Oficial - official 
71. Parents (n) - pais 71. Parentes - relatives 
72. Particular (adj) - específico, exato 72. Particular - personal, private 
73. Pasta (n) - massa (alimento) 73. Pasta - paste; folder; briefcase 
74. Policy (n) - política (diretrizes) 74. Polícia - police 
75. Port (n) - porto 75. Porta - door 
76. Prejudice (n) - preconceito 76. Prejuízo - damage, loss 
77. Prescribe (v) - receitar 77. Prescrever - expire 
78. Preservative (n) - conservante 78. Preservativo - condom 
79. Pretend (v) – fingir 79. Pretender - to intend, to plan 
80. Private (adj) - particular 80. Privado - private 
81. Procure (v) - conseguir, adquirir 81. Procurar - to look for 
82. Propaganda (n) - divulgação de 
ideia com intuito de manipular 
82. Propaganda - advertisement, 
commercial 
83. Pull (v) - puxar 83. Pular - to jump 
84. Push (v) - empurrar 84. Puxar - to pull 
85. Range (v) - variar, cobrir 85. Ranger - to creak, to grind 
86. Realize (v) - notar, perceber, dar-se 
conta, conceber uma ideia 
86. Realizar - to carry out, make come 
true 
87. Record (v, n) - gravar, disco, grava-
ção, registro 
87. Recordar - to remember, to recall 
88. Requirement (n) - requisito 88. Requerimento - request, petition 
89. Refrigerant (n) - substância refri-
gerante usada em aparelhos 
89. Refrigerante - soft drink, soda, 
pop, coke
90. Resume (v) - retomar, reiniciar 90. Resumir - summarize 
91. Résumé (n) - curriculum vitae, 
currículo 
91. Resumo - summary 
92. Retired (adj) - aposentado 92. Retirado - removed, secluded 
93. Senior (n) - idoso 93. Senhor - gentleman, sir 
94. Service (n) - atendimento 94. Serviço - job 
95. Stranger (n) - desconhecido 95. Estrangeiro - foreigner 
96. Stupid (adj) - burro 96. Estúpido - impolite, rude 
97. Support (v) - apoiar 97. Suportar (tolerar) - can stand 
98. Tax (n) - imposto 98. Taxa - rate; fee 
99. Trainer (n) - preparador físico 99. Treinador - coach 
100. Turn (n, v) - vez, volta, curva; 
virar, girar 
100. Turno - shift; round
101. Vegetables (n) - verduras, legumes 101. Vegetais - plants
 Exercite no texto abaixo alguns falsos cognatos: 
A DAY AT WORK
In the morning I attended a meeting between management and 
union representatives. The discussion was very comprehensi-
ve, covering topics like working hours, days off, retirement age, 
etc. Both sides were interested in an agreement and ready to 
compromise. The secretary recorded everything in the notes. 
Eventually, they decided to set a new meeting to sign the final 
draft of the agreement.
Back at the office, a colleague of mine asked me if I had realized 
that the proposed agreement would be partially against the 
company policy not to accept workers that have already retired. 
I pretended to be really busy and late for an appointment, and 
left for the cafeteria. Actually, I didn’t want to discuss the matter 
at that particular moment because there were some strangers 
in the office.
After lunch I attended a lecture given by the mayor, who is an 
expert in tax legislation and has a graduate degree in political 
science. He said his government intends to assist welfare progra-
ms and senior citizens, raise funds to improve college education 
and build a public library, and establish tougher limits on vehicle 
emissions because he assumes this is what the people expect 
from the government.
1. (Fasm 2000) Critics call the data misleading in the Passive Voice is: 
a) Misleading is called data by critics. 
b) Data is called misleading by critics. 
c) Data misleading is called by critics. 
d) Data are called misleading by critics. 
e) critics ale called misleading by data. 
2. (Cesgranrio 93) Mark the option which completes the sentence In 
only a short time, the computer … the way in which many jobs … .
a) had changed – do 
b) changed – have done
c) has changed – are done 
d) are changing – were done
e) will change – have been doing
CAPÍTULO 4 – PASSIVE VOICE INGLÊS – EEAr
38
3. (Mackenzie 96) Choose the correct alternative:
A: “Where’s your mother?”
B: “She’s … tonight.
a) being operated on b) going to be operated
c) operating on d) having to be operated
e) been operated
4. (Mackenzie 96) Marque a altermativa correta:
You don’t need to wind this wonderful watch.
a) This wonderful watch isn’t needed to be wind.
b) This wonderful watch doesn’t need to winded.
c) This wonderful watch doesn’t need to be wound.
d) This wonderful watch don’t need to be wounded.
e) You don’t need to be wounded by this wonderful watch.
5. (Mackenzie 96) A voz egativ de Somebody must send me the new 
books é:
a) I must send the new books.
b) The new books must be sent to me.
c) I will be sent the new books.
d) The new books would be sent to me.
e) The new books must be send by somebody.
6. (Unitau 95) Assinale a alternativa que corresponde à forma ativa 
da frase a seguir:
A detailed description […] is given by the authors.
a) The authors give a detailed description.
b) The authors will give a detailed description.
c) The authors have given a detailed description.
d) The authors gave a detailed description.
e) The authors will have given a detailed description.
7. (Unitau 95) Assinale a alternativa que correspondeà voz ativa da 
sentença a seguir:
The 1994 cup was hosted by the United States.
a) The United States hosted the 1994 Cup.
b) The United States will host the 1994 Cup.
c) The United States have hosted the 1994 Cup.
d) The United States had hosted the 1994 Cup.
e) The United States will have hosted the 1994 Cup.
8. (Ciaba 00) She had been told about the meeting, the active voice is:
a) Nobody told her about the meeting.
b) Somebody had told her about the meeting.
c) Everybody would tell her about the meeting.
d) She had told somebody about the meeting.
e) The meeting was told about her.
9. (Unitau 95) Assinale a alternativa que corresponde à forma passiva 
da sentença a seguir:
We encourage the kids to go swimming.
a) The kids were encouraged to go swimming.
b) The kids have been encouraged to go swimming.
c) The kids will be encouraged to go swimming.
d) The kids may be encouraged to go swimming.
e) The kids are encouraged to go swimming.
10. (Unitau 95) Assinale a alternativa que relaciona as construções 
adequadas e as inadequadas em inglês dentre as listadas a seguir:
1 – Mary is likeing John.
2 – Mary needs to help sheself.
3 – I can see him.
4 – John was expected to win the world cup.
5 – Americans films are goods.
6 – They has a big farm in downtown.
a) Adequadas: 3, 4. Inadequadas: 1, 2, 5, 6.
b) Adequadas: 1, 2, 5. Inadequadas: 3, 4, 6.
c) Adequadas: 3, 4, 5. Inadequadas: 1, 2, 6.
d) Adequadas: 1, 3, 6. Inadequadas: 2, 4, 5.
e) Adequadas: 2, 3, 5, 6. Inadequadas: 1, 4.
11. (Cesgranrio 94) Mark the sentence below which is NOT in the 
passive voice:
a) A revolutionary telephone system was unveiled.
b) A sophisticated computer was programmed.
c) It was instructed to translate “out of sight, out of mind”.
d) The Russian translation was then fed into the computer.
e) A computer will invariably have difficulty in making sense of it. 
12. (Fei 95) Assinale a alternativa que possui a sentença na VOZ PASSIVA:
a) We were experimenting with the use of sound waves.
b) It was a very low-tech start.
c) Madonna has now been replaced by high energy waves.
d) All glass is weak because it cracks.
e) Glass products have microscopic cracks in them.
13. (Fuvest 77) Qual a sentença correta?
a) We were deprived from playing games for a week.
b) We were deprived of playing games for a week.
c) We were deprived of playing games through a week.
d) We were deprived at playing games for a week.
e) We were deprived from playing games by a week.
14. (Vunesp 91) Assinale a alternativa que preenche corretamente a 
lacuna da frase a seguir:
Those people are happy because they … love in their childhood.
a) was given b) has given
c) were given d) have being given 
e) be given
15. (Faap 96) The passive form of the sentence The International Court 
of Hague rejected an attempt by New Zealand to stop further 
French nuclear tests in the South Pacific is: 
CAPÍTULO 4 – PASSIVE VOICEINGLÊS – EEAr
39
a) An attempt by New Zealand to stop further French nuclear tests 
in the South Pacific have been rejected by The International 
Court of Justice in Hague.
b) An attempt by New Zealand to stop further French nuclear 
tests in the South Pacific would be rejected by The International 
Court of Justice in Hague.
c) An attempt by New Zealand to stop further French nuclear tests 
in the South Pacific was rejected by The International Court of 
Justice in Hague.
d) The International Court of Justice has rejected an attempt by New 
Zealand to stop further French nuclear tests in the South Pacific.
e) An attempt by New Zealand to stop further French nuclear 
tests in the South Pacific is being rejected by The International 
Court of Justice in Hague.
16. (Mackenzie 96) Change the sentence below to the Passive Voice:
They feed the seals twice a week.
a) The seals are fed twice a week.
b) The seals are feeded twice a week.
c) The seals are found twice a week.
d) Twice a week they are feeding the seals.
e) The seals are being fed twice a week.
17. (Mackenzie 96) Change to the Passive Voice:
Somebody left the lights on all night.
a) All night somebody left the lights.
b) The lights are left on all night.
c) The lights didn’t leave on all night.
d) The lights were left on all night.
e) The lights was left on all night.
18. (Uel 94) Assinale a alternativa que preenche corretamente a lacuna 
da frase apresentada:
In many parts of the world, the future productivity of the soil … 
by man’s ill use of it.
a) endangers b) endangered 
c) will endanger d) are endangered 
e) is endangered
19. (Cesgranrio 91) The sentence below is in the passive voice: 
Young people today think that ‘Thank you’, ‘You’re welcome’ and 
‘Excuse me’ are servilities that must be avoided. 
– Mark the option which does NOT have a verb in the passive voice:
a) The most famous model in the world was born in Brazil.
b) The same syndrome is reflected in some advertisements.
c) Children who haven’t been raised in boarding schools are 
happier.
d) This piece of advertising was chosen among many others.
e) If she hadn’t been taught how to model, she wouldn’t be 
famous now.
20. (Mackenzie 97) The Passive Voice of It is alleged that he stole a car is:
a) He is alleged to have stolen a car.
b) The car is alleged to have stolen by him.
c) It was alleged that the car is stolen by him.
d) It is alleged that he has stolen a car.
e) He alleged that the car was stolen by him.
21. (Mackenzie 97) Change the following sentence to the Passive Voice:
Thousands of people ride the underground every morning.
a) The underground is ridded by thousands of people every 
morning.
b) The underground was rode by thousands of people every 
morning.
c) The underground is rode by thousands of people every morning.
d) Thousands of people is ride by the underground every morning.
e) The underground is ridden by thousands of people every 
morning.
22. (Mackenzie 97) The Passive Voice of Man has made the world 
much more complex is:
a) Much more complex has made the world.
b) The world was been made much more complex by man.
c) Much more complex was the world made.
d) Complex has been made the world much more by man.
e) The world has been made much more complex.
23. (Pucpr 97) Choose the correct form in the passive voice for the 
sentence below: 
Mr. Brown gave us a lesson.
a) We had given a lesson.
b) A lesson will be given us by Mr. Brown.
c) A lesson is being given us by Mr. Brown.
d) We were giving a lesson.
e) We were given a lesson by Mr. Brown.
24. (Mackenzie 97) Change the following sentence to the Passive Voice:
Did the army surround the city?
a) Is the city surrounded by the army?
b) Was the city surround by the army?
c) The city was surround by the army.
d) Was the city surrounded by the army?
e) Was the army surrounded by the city?
25. (Mackenzie 97) Change the following sentence to the Passive Voice:
In 1945 the allied powers defeated Germany.
a) In 1945 Germany was defeated by allied powers.
b) In 1945 Germany did defeated by the allied powers.
c) In 1945 Germany are defeated by the allied powers.
d) The allied powers were defeated by the Germany in 1945.
e) In 1945 Germany was defeat by the allied powers.
26. (Personal 99) Change the following sentence into the Passive Voice: 
The helicopter is dropping the food supplies. 
CAPÍTULO 4 – PASSIVE VOICE INGLÊS – EEAr
40
a) The food supplies is being dropped by the helicopter.
b) The food supplies are been dropped by the helicopter.
c) The food supplies are being dropped by the helicopter.
d) The food supplies are being droped by the helicopter.
e) The food supplies have been being dropped by the helicopter.
27. (Mackenzie 97) Choose the correct alternative:
I had hoped … my letter. “I had hoped ___ my letter.
a) that shewould answer
b) that she answer
c) to answer 
d) her answer
e) to have been answered
28. If you are guilty of this crime you must ______.
a) punishe b) have punished
c) been bunished d) punish 
e) be punished
29. Our school system must ______.
a) be improved b) been improved
c) had improved d) being improved
e) improved
30. I’m always ready to learn, although I do not always like being 
______.
a) taught b) teach c) to teach d) teacher
31. A modern shpping center is already ______ near my house.
a) build b) been erected
c) construct d) being built
e) building
32. “This discovery was made by various people.” The active voice of 
the sentence above is:
a) Various people have made this discovery.
b) Various people made this discovery.
c) Various people had made this discovery.
d) Various people are making this discovery.
e) Various people make this discovery.
33. The passive voice of “Thousands of people welcomed the President 
at the airport.” is:
a) The President was welcomed by thousands of people at the 
airport.
b) The President at the airport welcomed thousands of people.
c) The President is welcome at the airport by thousands of people.
d) At the airport the President be welcomed by thousands of 
people.
e) The President was welcome at the airport by thousands of 
people.
34. “They were told” traduz-se por:
a) contaram-lhe b) elas disseram
c) ordenaram-lhes d) eles foram mandados
e) elas estavam garantidas
35. The passive form of “Nobody will lay the stones on the wall” is:
a) The stones will be lain on the wall.
b) Nobody will be laid the stones on the wall.
c) The stones will be lied on the wall by nobody.
d) The wall will be lay the stones by nobody.
e) The stones will not be laid on the wall.
36. “Do you know the meaning of couch potato, Sam?”
“No, I don’t. Why don’t you look it up in a dictionary ?”
“I can’t find it. You know., it’s a rather recent expression and dictio-
naries only list words that _________ for quite a while.”
a) have been used b) will be used
c) have used d) will use
e) use
37. (Ufpb 98) This sentence is in the PASSIVE VOICE:
Women are warned by doctors.
– The ACTIVE VOICE is:
a) Doctors warn women. 
b) Women warn doctors.
c) Doctors are warned by women.
d) Women are being warned. 
e) Doctors warned women.
GABARITO:
1. d 2. c 3. b 4. c 5. b 6. a 
7. a 8. b 9. e 10. a 11. e 12. c 
13. a 14. c 15. c 16. a 17. d 18. e 
19. a 20. a 21. e 22. e 23. e 24. d 
25. a 26. c 27. a 28. e 29. a 30. a 
31. d 32. b 33. a 34. a 35. e 36. a 
37. a 
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 5 – MULTIPLE-MEANING WORDSINGLÊS – EEAr
41
Capítulo 5
PALAVRAS DE MÚLTIPLO SENTIDO
(MULTIPLE-MEANING WORDS)
(Lexical Ambiguity of Portuguese)
É comum a todas as línguas a ocorrência de palavras com 
significado ou função gramatical múltiplos. Frequentemente 
este múltiplo sentido em um idioma não tem correspondente 
em outro. Quer dizer: os termos nem sempre cobrem as mesmas 
áreas de significado entre diferentes idiomas. Este fenômeno, 
também chamado de polissemia, ocorre com qualquer idio-
ma; assim como o português, o inglês também tem inúmeras 
palavras de múltiplo significado. É entretanto a ocorrência do 
fenômeno na língua mãe do aluno que causa maior dificuldade. 
Partir do geral para o particular é sempre mais difícil do que 
o inverso. Generalizar ou representar diferentes ideias através 
de um único símbolo, pode se comparar ao ato de misturar o 
feijão e o arroz numa mesma panela: uma tarefa que não exige 
muito esforço. Especificar diferentes ideias, as quais estamos 
acostumados a generalizar em uma única palavra, em palavras 
diferentes da língua estrangeira, pode-se comparar ao ato de 
separar o arroz e o feijão que haviam sido misturados. Certa-
mente uma tarefa muito mais difícil.
Portanto, sempre que diferentes ideias representadas pela 
mesma palavra na língua mãe do aluno corresponderem a dife-
rentes palavras na segunda língua, o mesmo terá dificuldades 
em expressar-se corretamente. As diferentes palavras do inglês 
que correspondem aos diferentes significados da palavra do 
português, podem eventualmente funcionar como sinônimos, 
portanto neutralizando o contraste entre os dois idiomas. Nosso 
objetivo neste trabalho, entretanto, é mostrar os contrastes nas 
ocorrências mais usuais do vocabulário inglês moderno, igno-
rando aqueles significados relacionados em dicionários porém 
raros em linguagem coloquial ou estranhos ao uso popular. 
Esta lista de 173 palavras do português com seus diferentes 
significados demonstra as diferenças no mapeamento da área 
de significado entre idiomas. Longe de ser exaustiva, representa 
apenas alguns dos problemas mais comuns encontrados no dia 
a dia de quem fala inglês.
Os materiais apresentados aqui nesta seção são apenas 
materiais de referência para consulta.
abastecer - 1. O rio Mississippi abastece 23% da água po-
tável do país. (suprir, fornecer) - The Mississippi supplies 23% 
of the nation’s drinking water. 2. Vou parar no próximo posto 
para abastecer. (colocar combustível) - I’ll stop at the next gas 
station to refuel.
aborto - 1. Clínicas de aborto são legais na Flórida. (aborto 
voluntário) - Abortion clinics are legal in Florida. 2. Ela estava 
grávida mas infelizmente teve um aborto. (aborto natural, invo-
luntário) - She was pregnant but unfortunately had a miscarriage.
achar - 1. Eu acho que vai chover. (acreditar, pensar) - I 
think it’s going to rain. 2. Achaste o que estavas procurando? 
(encontrar, descobrir) - Did you find what you were looking for?
acordo - 1. Fizemos um acordo com o sindicato. (acerto) - 
We made an agreement with the labor union. 2. De acordo com 
as informações que eu tenho, ... (conforme) - According to the 
information I have, ...
admitir - 1. Tenho que admitir que estava errado. (reco-
nhecer) - I have to admit I was wrong. 2. A empresa vai admitir 
novos funcionários. (empregar) - The company is going to hire 
new employees.
agenda - 1. Qual é a agenda do presidente para hoje? 
(pauta de compromissos) - What’s on the president’s agenda 
today? What’s the president’s schedule for today? 2. Eu ganhei 
uma agenda de presente. (livro de apontamentos) - I got an 
appointment book for present.
alto - 1. As temperaturas de verão em Nova Iorque são muito 
altas. (alta intensidade) - The summer temperatures in New York 
are very high. 2. Jogadores de basquete normalmente são muito 
altos. (estatura física) - Basketball players are usually very tall. 3. 
A música está muito alta. (nível de ruído) - The music is too loud.
alugar - 1. Preciso de um lugar para morar. Vou alugar um 
apartamento. (pagar para poder usar) - I need a place to live. I’ll 
rent an apartment. 2. Não estou precisando do meu apartamen-
to. Vou alugá-lo. (colocar à disposição em troca de dinheiro) - I 
don’t need my apartment. I’ll rent it out.
aniversário - 1. Ela está de aniversário hoje. (data de nas-
cimento de uma pessoa) - Today is her birthday. 2. Hoje é o 
nosso aniversário de casamento. (data de criação ou fundação 
de algo) - Today is our wedding anniversary.
antecipar - 1. O jogo foi antecipado para hoje. (fazer acon-
tecer mais cedo) - The game was moved forward to today. 2. Não 
posso antecipar nada sobre o assunto da reunião. (informar com 
antecedência) - I can’t share any information about the meeting.
apagar - 1. Quem apagou o que estava escrito no quadro-
-negro? (limpar) - Who erased what was written on the blackbo-
ard? 2. Os bombeiros apagaram o fogo. (extinguir) - The firemen 
put out the fire. 3. Apaga a luz! (desligar) - Turn off the light!
apanhar - 1. Você quer apanhar? (agressão física) - Do you 
want to get beaten? 2. Eu te apanho no hotel às 8. (pegar, 
colocar-se à disposição) - I’ll pick you up at the hotel8 o’clock. 3. 
Apanhei um resfriado. (contrair doença) - I caught a cold. 4. Ele 
apanhou até descobrir qual era o problema. (ter dificuldade) - 
He suffered to find out what the problem was.
aplicar - 1. A regra não se aplica neste caso. (valer) - The rule 
doesn’t apply in this case. 2. Lixe a madeira antes de aplicar a 
tinta. (colocar) - Sand the wood before applying the paint. 3. Eu 
apliquei o dinheiro. (depositar a juros) - I invested the money.
apontar - 1. As crianças ficaram apontando para mim e 
rindo. (indicar direção) - The children were pointing at me and 
laughing. 2. Você deve apontar o lápis. (afiar a ponta) - You 
should sharpen your pencil. 
aproveitar - 1. Eu aproveitei bem as férias de verão. (desfru-
tar) - I enjoyed the summer vacation a lot. 2. Você deve aproveitar 
a oportunidade. (obter benefício em momento oportuno) - You 
should take advantage of the opportunity.
CAPÍTULO 5 – MULTIPLE-MEANING WORDS INGLÊS – EEAr
42
arrumar - 1. Chama alguém para arrumar o ar condicionado. 
(consertar) - Call someone to fix the air conditioner. 2. Arruma teu 
quarto. (colocar objetos em seus devidos lugares) - Clean up 
your room. 3. Ela finalmente arrumou um namorado. (encontrar, 
obter, conseguir) - She’s finally found a boyfriend. 4. Vê se não 
arruma encrenca. (envolver-se com) - Don’t get into trouble.
assinatura - 1. Precisamos da sua assinatura nestes do-
cumentos. (firma) - We need your signature (subscription) on 
these documents. 2. Eu renovei a assinatura do jornal. (direito de 
receber) - I renewed the subscription to the newspaper.
assistir - 1. Assistimos a um belo espetáculo. (presenciar, 
ver) - We watched a beautiful show. 2. Ela assiste aos doentes 
com carinho. (dar assistência, ajudar) - She helps (assists) (at-
tends to) the sick people with kindness.
atender - 1. A secretária está atendendo o telefone. (respon-
der) - The secretary is answering the phone. 2. A balconista está 
atendendo o cliente. (dar assistência) - The salesgirl is helping the 
customer. 3. O médico está atendendo um paciente. (dispensar 
cuidados profissionais) - The doctor is examining (seeing) a patient.
atingir - 1. Atingimos o objetivo principal. (alcançar) - We 
have reached the main target. 2. O navio do inimigo foi atin-
gido por um torpedo. (destruir parcialmente) - The ship of the 
enemy was hit by a torpedo. 3. Teus comentários às vezes me 
atingem. (causar ressentimento) - Your comments sometimes 
hurt my feelings.
atirar - 1. Ele atirou uma pedra na janela. (jogar, arremes-
sar) - He threw a stone at the window. 2. O assaltante começou 
a atirar quando a polícia chegou. (disparar arma de fogo) - The 
robber started shooting when the police arrived.
atrás - 1. A vassoura está atrás da porta. (posição posterior) 
- The broom is behind the door. 2. Vai atrás dele. (em persegui-
ção) - Go after him. 
bala - 1. Crianças gostam de balas. (doce) - Children like 
candy. 2. Não tem balas no revólver. (munição) - There are no 
bullets in the gun. 
banco - 1. Você pode gastar seu dinheiro ou depositá-lo 
num banco. (instituição financeira) - You can spend your money 
or deposit it in a bank. 2. Gosto de sentar nos bancos da praça. 
(assento) - I like to sit on the park benches. 3. Eu estava sentado 
no banco do bar tomando uma cerveja. (mocho) - I was sitting 
on the bar stool having a beer.
banho - 1. Eu normalmente tomo banho de manhã. (lavar-
-se no banheiro) - I usually take a shower (take a bath) in the 
morning. 2. Eu adoro tomar banho de mar. (brincar ou exercitar-
-se) - I love to go swimming in the sea.
bater - 1. O coração ainda está batendo. (produzir movimen-
to rítmico) - The heart is still beating. 2. Não bata nas crianças. 
(castigar fisicamente) - Don’t spank the children. 3. Bati na porta 
3 vezes. (produzir ruído para ser atendido) - I knocked on the 
door 3 times. 4. Favor não bater a porta. (fechar com força) - 
Don’t slam the door, please. 5. Ele bateu o carro. (ter acidente de 
trânsito) - He crashed his car. 6. Ele bateu uma foto. (fotografar) 
- He took a photograph. 7. Você tem que bater o creme antes de 
fazer o bolo. (agitar fortemente) - You have to whip the cream 
before you make the cake. 
bateria - 1. Meu carro precisa de uma bateria nova. (acumula-
dor de eletricidade) - My car needs a new battery. 2. Ringo tocava 
bateria. (instrumento musical) - Ringo used to play the drums.
boa noite - 1. Boa noite. A reunião já começou? (cumprimen-
to ao chegar) - Good evening. Has the meeting already started? 2. 
Boa noite. Durma bem. (ao despedir-se) - Good night. Sleep well. 
cabo - 1. Por que você não usa um cabo de vassoura? 
(parte de um objeto) - Why don’t you use a broom handle? 2. 
Os cabos elétricos devem ser substituídos. (condutores) - The 
electric cables must be replaced. 3. Os foguetes são lançados 
de Cabo Canaveral. (ponta de terra) - Rockets are launched from 
Cape Canaveral. 4. Ele é cabo do exército. (um nível acima de 
soldado) - He is a private first class in the army.
cadeia - 1. O ladrão foi posto na cadeia. (prisão) - The thief 
was put in jail. 2. Isto pode causar uma reação em cadeia. (se-
quência de fatos ou elementos interligados) - This can cause a 
chain reaction. 
cadeira - 1. Sente-se na cadeira. (peça de mobília) - Sit on 
the chair. 2. Estou fazendo 4 cadeiras este semestre. (matéria 
de estudo) - I’m taking 4 courses this semester.
cair - 1. O menino caiu da bicicleta. (precipitar-se ao chão) - 
The boy fell off the bicycle. 2. A temperatura vai cair na próxima 
semana. (baixar) - The temperature is going to drop (fall) next 
week. 3. Caiu um avião na semana passada. (espatifar-se em 
acidente) - An airplane crashed last week. 
candidato - 1. Ele é candidato a governador. (em eleições) - 
He is a candidate for governor. 2. Quantos candidatos a emprego 
temos? (mercado de trabalho) - How many job applicants do 
we have?
canela - 1. Canela é um tempero usado para dar aroma a 
uma variedade de comidas. (tempero) - Cinnamon is a spice used 
to flavour a variety of foods. 2. É comum machucar as canelas 
quando se joga futebol. (parte do corpo humano) - It’s common 
to injure your shins when you play soccer.
carne - 1. Eu não gosto de comer carne. (comida) - I don’t like 
to eat meat. 2. Eu sofri um corte profundo na carne. (corpo) - I 
suffered a deep cut in the flesh.
caro - 1. Morar em Nova Iorque custa muito caro. (dispendio-
so) - Living in New York is too expensive. 2. Meus caros amigos... 
(prezado, precioso) - My dear friends ...
carta - 1. Ela mandou uma carta para o namorado. (mensa-
gem escrita) - She sent a letter to her boyfriend. 2. Vamos jogar 
cartas. (jogar com baralho) - Let’s play cards. 
carteira - 1. Quanto dinheiro você tem na carteira? (objeto 
para carregar dinheiro e documentos) - How much money do 
you have in your wallet? 2. Qual é o número da tua carteira de 
identidade? (documento) - What’s your ID card number? 3. Ela 
trabalha na carteira de crédito do Banco do Brasil. (departa-
mento) - She works at the credit department of Banco do Brasil.
casa - 1. Você mora numa casa ou num apartamento? (pré-
dio, habitação) - Do you live in a house or in an apartment? 2. 
Eu normalmente chego em casa às 6 horas. (lar) - I usually get 
home at 6 o’clock.
CAPÍTULO 5 – MULTIPLE-MEANING WORDSINGLÊS – EEAr
43
casamento - 1. Fui a um casamento. (cerimônia, ato) - I went 
to a wedding. 2. Casamento é uma experiência interessante. (con-
vivência, relacionamento) - Marriage is an interesting experience.
certo - 1. Isto não está certo. (correto) - That’s not right. 2. 
Eu não sei ao certo. (ter certeza) - I’m not sure.
chateado - 1. Eu fiquei chateado com o que ele disse. 
(ofendido) - I was offended by what he said. 2. Eu estou chateado 
hoje. (abatido) - I’m depressed (feeling down) today. 3. Aquele 
professor me deixa chateado.(enfadado) - That teacher makes 
me bored.
chato - 1. O travesseiro ficou chato depois de apenas uma 
noite de uso. (plano) - The pillow got flat after being used only one 
night. 2. No Brasil, esses carros com alto-falantes fazendo propa-
ganda pelas ruas são muito chatos. (perturbador) - In Brazil, cars 
with loudspeakers roaming the streets and blasting advertisements 
are very annoying. 3. O professor de matemática é muito chato. 
(enfadonho) - The math teacher is very boring. 4. Ficou chato 
você ter dito que a comida não estava boa. (constrangedor) - It 
was embarrassing to say that the food wasn’t good.
chave - 1. Onde é que estão as chaves do carro? (instrumen-
to de abrir fechaduras) - Where are the car keys? 2. A chave da 
luz não está funcionando. (interruptor elétrico) - The light switch 
is not working. 3. Comprei um conjunto de chaves de fenda e 
chaves de boca. (ferramentas). - I bought a set of screwdrivers 
and wrenches.
chegar - 1. O avião chega às 8 horas. (vir) - The plane arrives 
at 8 o’clock. 2. Um computador não chega, precisamos de dois. 
(ser suficiente) - One computer isn’t enough, we need two.
claro - 1. A água é clara nas praias de Santa Catarina. (trans-
parente) - The water is clear at the beaches of Santa Catarina. 2. 
Claro que eu gosto de cerveja gelada no verão. (evidente) - Of 
course I like cold beer in summer.
combinar - 1. Nós já combinamos tudo. (acertar, entrar em 
acordo) - We already discussed everything. 2. Vamos combinar 
para nos encontrar na praia. (definir um encontro) - Let’s make 
arrangements to meet at the beach. 2. Este casaco não combina 
contigo. (harmonizar) - This coat doesn’t suit you. 3. Cobre e 
estanho combinam-se para formar bronze. (ligar) - Copper and 
tin combine to form bronze.
companhia - 1. Esta é uma companhia muito grande. (em-
presa) - This is a very large company. 2. De manhã sempre estou 
na companhia. (local de trabalho) - I’m always in the office (fac-
tory) in the mornings. 3. Esse cara é uma boa companhia. (amigo, 
presença agradável) - This guy makes a good companion.
compreender - 1. A República Federativa do Brasil compre-
ende 26 estados. (abranger, ser composto de) - The Federated 
Republic of Brazil includes 26 states. 2. Você compreendeu minha 
explicação? (alcançar com a inteligência, entender) - Did you 
understand my explanation?
compromisso - 1. Tenho um compromisso amanhã. (hora 
marcada, encontro profissional ou social) - I have an appoint-
ment tomorrow. 2. Tenho um compromisso hoje de noite. 
(encontro não-profissional com pessoa do sexo oposto) - I have 
a date tonight.
condição - 1. Oxigênio é uma condição para a vida animal. 
(pré-requisito) - Oxygen is a condition of animal life. 2. Não estou 
em condições de jogar. (aptidão) - I’m not able to play.
conhecer - 1. Prazer em conhecê-lo. (encontrar) - Nice to 
meet you. 2. Você conhece as regras do jogo?. (ter conhecimen-
to) - Do you know the rules of the game? 3. Você conhece o Rio? 
(ter visitado) - Have you ever visited (been to) Rio? 
conseguir - 1. Eu consegui o que queria. (obter) - I got what 
I wanted. 2. Não consigo falar fluentemente. / Ele conseguiu 
passar no exame. (ter habilidade, mostrar aptidão) - I can’t speak 
fluently./ He was able to pass the exam.
contar - 1. Ela me contou tudo. (dizer) - She told me 
everything. 2. Eu contei pelo menos vinte pessoas. (enumerar, 
quantificar) - I counted at least 20 people. 3. Você pode contar 
comigo. (dispor de) - You can count on me.
corrente - 1. Eu mantenho o cachorro na corrente. (objeto 
de metal) - I keep the dog on a chain. 2. As correntes oceânicas 
ao longo da costa brasileira são quentes. (fluxo de água) - The 
ocean currents off the Brazilian cost are warm. 3. Tivemos muitas 
despesas no corrente ano fiscal. (atual) - We had a lot of expenses 
in the current fiscal year.
cravo - 1. Ela gosta de cravos e de rosas. (flor) - She likes 
carnations and roses. 2. Cravo é um excelente tempero para 
doces. (tempero) - Clove is an excellent spice for sweets. 3. Cravo 
era um instrumento popular antes de surgir o piano. (instrumen-
to musical) - The clavichord was very popular before the piano. 
criar - 1. É necessário criar novos empregos. (gerar) - It’s 
necessary to create new jobs. 2. Ele cria cachorros por hobby. 
(cultivar, ajudar a crescer) - He raises dogs as a hobby.
cuidar - 1. Enfermeiras cuidam de pessoas doentes. (dispen-
sar cuidados profissionais) - Nurses take care of sick people. 2. 
Jovens mães e donas de casa cuidam de suas famílias. (zelar) - 
Young mothers and housewives look after their families. 3. Não te 
mete; deixa que eu cuido disso. (intermediar, solucionar) - Don’t 
interfere; let me handle this. 4. Ele gosta de ficar cuidando as 
garotas na piscina. (olhar, observar) - He likes to watch the girls 
at the swimming pool.
culpa - 1. Não foi minha culpa. (erro) - It wasn’t my fault. 2. 
Ele sempre leva a culpa. (responsabilidade) - He always takes 
the blame.
cumprimento - 1. Cooperação expontânea e cumprimento 
de ordens são bons para a organização. (ato de cumprir com 
deveres, obediência) - Spontaneous cooperation and compliance 
to orders are good for the organization. 2. Mande-lhe meus cumpri-
mentos. (gesto ou expressão de cortesia) - Give him my greetings.
decorar - 1. Vou decorar a sala para a festa. (enfeitar, mo-
biliar) - I’m going to decorate the living room for the party. 2. Às 
vezes é útil decorar textos para aprender línguas. (memorizar) 
- Sometimes it’s useful to memorize texts for learning languages.
dedo - 1. Ele se cortou no dedo. (dedo da mão) - He cut his fin-
ger. 2. Eu machuquei meus dedos do pé. (artelho) - I hurt my toes.
deixar - 1. Gostaria de deixar um recado? (registrar) - Would 
you like to leave a message? 2. Não me deixa aqui sozinho. (sair, 
abandonar) - Don’t leave me alone. 3. Deixe-me ver. (dar per-
CAPÍTULO 5 – MULTIPLE-MEANING WORDS INGLÊS – EEAr
44
missão) - Let me see. 4. Você me deixa nervoso. (fazer ficar) - You 
make me nervous.
depois - 1. Nós vamos trabalhar depois do jantar. (depois de 
…) - We are going to work after dinner. 2. Nós vamos trabalhar 
depois. (mais tarde) - We are going to work later.
depósito - 1. Faremos um depósito na tua conta. (creditar 
dinheiro) - We’ll make a deposit in your account. 2. A mercadoria 
ficará guardada no depósito até a data do embarque. (local de 
armazenamento) - The goods will be stored in the warehouse 
until the date of shipment.
desfile - 1. Turistas adoram o desfile de carnaval. (celebração) 
- Tourists love the carnival parade. 2. As mulheres americanas dão 
pouca importância a desfiles de moda. (promoção comercial) - 
American women give little importance to fashion shows.
destino - 1. Portugal deteve controle sobre o destino de Bra-
sil durante três séculos. (fatos relacionados ao futuro) - Portugal 
had control over the destiny of Brazil for three centuries. 2. Qual é 
teu destino? (lugar para onde se vai) - What’s your destination?
dever - 1. Você deve estudar mais. (obrigação) - You should 
(have to) (must) study more. 2. Deve ter sido legal. (dedução lógi-
ca, inferência) - It must have been nice. 3. Eu te devo 10 dólares. 
(dívida) - I owe you 10 dollars.
direito - 1. Isto não está direito. (correto) - This is not right. 
2. Ele está na faculdade de direito. (estudo das leis) - He is going 
to law school. 
dirigir - 1. Eu gosto de dirigir. (guiar veículo) - I like to drive. 
2. Ele dirige a empresa há muitos anos. (gerenciar) - He has been 
managing the company for many years.
divisa - 1. A divisa entre o Brasil e o Uruguai passa pela 
cidade de Livramento. (limite territorial) - The border between 
Brazil and Uruguay runs through the city of Livramento. 2. O Brasil 
precisa exportar mais para aumentar suas divisas. (reservas 
monetárias) - Brazil needs more exports to increaseits foreign 
exchange credit.
dobrar - 1. Ela dobrou o papel para fazer um avião. (dobrar 
objetos planos ao longo de uma linha reta) - She folded the paper 
to make an airplane. 2. Dobra o braço. (curvar, entortar) - Bend 
your arm. 3. Se ele ganhar a promoção, vai dobrar seu salário. 
(duplicar) - If he gets the promotion, he’ll double his salary. 4. 
Dobre à esquerda no fim da quadra. (mudar de direção) - Turn 
left at the end of the block. 
droga - 1. Drogas aliviam o sintoma da doença. (medica-
mento) - Drugs relieve the symptoms of the illness. 2. Este café 
está uma droga (porcaria) - This coffee is shitty.
educação - 1. Não haverá progresso enquanto o país não 
melhorar a educação. (sentido coletivo, instrução, escolarida-
de) - There will be no development untill the country improves 
the education. 2. Nota-se que ele teve uma boa educação. 
(sentido individual, maneiras) - You can tell that he had a good 
upbringing.
emprestar - 1. Por que você não pede um dinheiro empres-
tado? (pedir emprestado) - Why don’t you borrow some money? 
2. Eu vou te emprestar meu carro (dar emprestado) - I’m going 
to lend you my car.
encontrar - 1. Encontrei meus amigos ontem a noite. (entrar 
em contato) - I met (saw) my friends last night. 2. Encontraste o 
que estavas procurando? (achar) - Did you find what you were 
looking for? 3. Ele não se encontra no momento. (estar presente) 
- He isn’t here at the moment.
entrada - 1. A entrada é pela porta dos fundos. (passagem 
que permite acesso) - The entrance is through the back door. 2. 
Você esqueceu as entradas em casa? (ingressos) - Did you forget 
the tickets at home? 3. As condições de pagamento são: 20% de 
entrada e o restante em 24 prestações. (pagamento inicial) - The 
terms are: 20% down payment and the balance in 24 installments.
escada - 1. Usa-se a escada para ir ao segundo andar. - You 
use the stairs to go to the second floor. 2. Pintores usam escadas 
para pintar paredes. - Painters use ladders to paint walls. 3. Há 
muitas escadas rolantes no shopping. - There are many escala-
tors in the mall. 
esperar - 1. Espero que não chova no próximo fim de 
semana. (ter esperança) - I hope it doesn’t rain next weekend. 2. 
Espero ganhar um aumento pelo meu esforço. (ter expectativa) 
- I expect to get a raise in pay for my efforts. 3. Eu fiquei te espe-
rando ontem a noite. (aguardar) - I was waiting for you last night.
estação - 1. Onde é que fica a estação de trem? (terminal 
ferroviário ou rodoviário) - Where is the train station? 2. Qual 
é a melhor estação de radio? (emissora) - Which is the best 
radio station? 3. Qual é a estação que tu preferes, inverno ou 
verão? (período climático) - What season do you prefer, winter 
or summer?
exercício - 1. Vamos praticar alguns exercícios? (atividade 
física ou intelectual) - Let’s practice some exercises? 2. Qual foi 
o lucro líquido referente ao exercício de 1994? (período fiscal) 
- What was the net profit for the 1994 fiscal year?
experiência - 1. Fizemos uma experiência na aula de quími-
ca. (experimento) - We did an experiment in the chemistry class. 
2. Ele tem muita experiência como professor. (conhecimento) 
- He has a lot of experience as a teacher.
explorar - 1. Temos que explorar todas as possibilidades. 
(desbravar, verificar) - We have to explore all the possibilities. 2. 
Países do terceiro mundo têm sido explorados pelos países ri-
cos. (obter vantagem) - Third world countries have been exploited 
by rich countries.
faixa - 1. Use a faixa da esquerda para ultrapassar. (faixa 
de rodagem em uma estrada) - Use the left lane for passing. 2. 
Crianças na faixa etária dos 10 aos 17 assimilam línguas com 
facilidade. (espaço compreendido entre dois pontos) - Children 
in the age range of 10 to 17 acquire languages easily. 3. Os vence-
dores orgulhosamente colocaram suas faixas ao final do jogo. 
(condecoração colocada transversalmente sobre o tórax) - The 
winners proudly wore their banners at the end of the game. 
faltar - 1. Faltam 10 para as 4. (tempo remanescente) - It’s 
ten to four. 2. Está faltando alguém? (ausência, não compareci-
mento) - Is anybody missing?
fantasia - 1. Na adolescência o jovem começa a ter fantasias 
sexuais. (imaginação) - In adolescence people start having sexual 
fantasies. 2. Neste fim de semana vamos a um baile de fantasia. 
(roupa alegórica) - We are going to a costume ball this weekend. 
CAPÍTULO 5 – MULTIPLE-MEANING WORDSINGLÊS – EEAr
45
fazer - 1. O que é que você está fazendo? (ocupação) - What 
are you doing? 2. Muitos carros esportivos são feitos de fibra 
de vidro. (fabricar) - Many sports cars are made of fiberglass. 3. 
Você deve fazer uma redação. (produzir) - You have to write 
an essay. 4. No Arizona faz muito calor. (ocorrer) - It gets very 
hot in Arizona. 5. Faz tempo que eu não vou ao cinema. / Ela 
faz 15 anos em novembro. (transcurso de tempo) - For a long 
time I haven’t gone to the movies./ She turns 15 in November. 6. 
Gostaria de te fazer uma pergunta. (perguntar) - I would like to 
ask you a question. 7. Estou fazendo faculdade. (estudar) - I’m 
studying in college. 8. O menino quer fazer xixi. (urinar) - The 
little boy wants to pee.
ficar - 1. Eu fiquei em casa. (permanecer) - I stayed at home. 
2. O hotel fica na rua principal. (localizar-se) - The hotel is on 
the main street. 3. Eu fico preocupado quando leio os jornais. 
(tornar-se) - I get worried when I read the newspapers. 4. Ele ficou 
de nos ajudar. (comprometer-se) - He promised to help us. 5. Vou 
ficar com esse aqui. (levar, comprar) - I’ll take this one. 6. Ficamos 
em terceiro lugar no campeonato. (obter classificação) - We got 
(came in) third place in the tournament. 7. A janta ficou em 30 
dólares. (custar) - The dinner cost 50 dollars. 8. Pode ficar com o 
troco. (tomar posse) - You can keep the change. 9. Esse vestido 
fica bem em ti. (combinar, adequar) - This dress suits you well. 
10. Ficamos sem dinheiro. (não ter mais) - We ran out of money. 
11. Ela ficou com o Paulo ontem. (manter relacionamento amo-
roso) - She had a good time (hooked up) with Paulo yesterday.
firma - 1. Eu trabalho numa firma de advogados. (empre-
sa) - I work for a law firm. 2. A firma tem que ser reconhecida. 
(assinatura) - The signature must be notarized.
fonte - 1. Esta é uma boa fonte de informações. (origem) - 
This is a good source of information. 2. Iraí tem fontes de águas 
termais. (subsolo) - Iraí has hot springs. 3. Eu usei três fontes 
diferentes neste documento. (tipo de letra) - I used three different 
fonts in this document.
formar - 1. Vamos formar um grupo de conversação de 
inglês. (constituir) - Let’s form a group for English conversation. 2. 
Eu me formei em medicina em 1990. (diplomar-se) - I graduated 
from medical school in 1990. 
franquia - 1. Todos as lancherias McDonald’s são franquias. 
(licença para uso de marca) - All McDonald’s restaurants are 
franchises. 2. A franquia da apólice de seguro é de 500 reais. 
(limite mínimo de cobertura) - The deductible of the insurance 
policy is 500 reais.
ganhar - 1. Ele ganhou no jogo de tênis. (vencer competição 
ou loteria) - He won the tennis game. 2. Ela ganhou um presente 
de aniversário. (receber) - She got a birthday present. 3. Ele ganha 
mil dólares por mês. (remuneração de trabalho) - He makes 
(earns) a thousand dollars a month.
graça - 1. Pode levar, é de graça. (que não precisa pagar) - 
You can take it, it’s free. 2. Isso não tem graça. (humor, qualidade 
de ser engraçado) - That’s not funny. 3. Com a graça de Deus. 
(benção divina) - By the grace of God. 4. Qual é a sua graça? 
(nome) - What’s your name?
grama - 1. Quinhentas gramas não é suficiente. (unidade 
de peso) - Five hundred grams isn’t enough. 2. Quanto você 
cobra para cortar a grama? (planta) - How much do you charge 
to mow the lawn?
gritar - 1. “Pare!”ela gritou. (advertir, alertar ou expressar 
emoção em voz alta) - “Stop!” she shouted. 2. Eu podia ouvi-lo 
gritando de pavor. (berrar, gritar prolongadamente demons-
trando emoção, pavor ou dor) - I could hear him screaming in 
terror. 3. O homem perdeu o controle e começou a gritar com 
ela. (demonstrar emoções alteradas em altos brados) - The man 
lost his temper and started yelling at her. 
guardar - 1. Eu guardo meus livros no escritório. (manter) - I 
keep my books in the office. 2. Faz favor de guardar tuas coisas. 
(colocar em lugar próprio) - Put your things away, please.
história - 1. A história universal é muito interessante. 
(estudo do passado) - World history is very interesting. 2. As 
crianças gostam de ouvir histórias. (conto) - Children like to 
listen to stories.
hora - 1. Depois de esperar por várias horas, eu desisti. 
(tempo transcorrido) - After waiting for several hours, I gave up. 
2. Que horas são? (horário) - What time is it? 3. São duas horas. 
(horário) - It’s two o’clock.
importar - 1. O país deve importar apenas o necessário. 
(comprar do exterior) - The country should import only what’s 
necessary. 2. Não importa se você chegar tarde na festa. (ter 
importância) - It doesn’t matter if you come late to the party.
inscrição - 1. Você já preencheu seu formulário de inscrição 
para o próximo semestre? (solicitação) - Have you already filled 
out your application form for the next semester? 2. Descobriram 
uma caverna com inscrições sobre pedra muito interessantes. 
(símbolos) - They discovered a cave with interesting inscriptions 
on stone.
já - 1. Eu já gastei todo o dinheiro. (ocorrência passada 
concluída) - I have already spent all the money. 2. Venha já para 
cá! (imediatamente) - Come here right now!
jeito - 1. Não tem jeito. (possibilidade, maneira) - There’s no 
way. 2. Ele tem jeito de estrangeiro. (aspecto, aparência) - He 
looks like a foreigner.
jogar - 1. Ele joga tênis muito bem. (desempenhar atividade 
esportiva) - He plays tennis very well. 2. Ela jogou os pratos no 
chão. (atirar, arremessar) - She threw the plates on the floor.
juiz - 1. Juízes normalmente trabalham no Palácio de Justiça. 
(membros do judiciário) - Judges usually work at the Court House. 
2. Num jogo de futebol, o juiz tem muita responsabilidade. 
(juiz de jogos esportivos) - The referee (umpire) has a lot of 
responsibility in a soccer game.
juntar - 1. Junta teus amigos e dá uma festa. (reunir, apro-
ximar) - Get your friends together and throw a party. 2. Junta 
os papéis do chão. (recolher, remover) - Pick up the papers on 
the floor. 
lembrança - 1. Eu trouxe algumas lembranças para você. 
(objetos de recordação) - I brought some souvenirs for you. 2. 
Manda lembranças para tua esposa. (recomendações) - Regar-
ds to your wife. 3. Eu tenho boas lembranças daquela época. 
(recordações, memórias) - I have good memories of that time.
CAPÍTULO 5 – MULTIPLE-MEANING WORDS INGLÊS – EEAr
46
lembrar - 1. Eu não consigo me lembrar do que aconteceu. 
(achar na memória) - I can’t remember what happened. 2. Isto 
me lembra dos velhos tempos. (trazer à memória) - This reminds 
me of the old times.
letra - 1. Quantas letras tem no alfabeto? (caracteres ortográ-
ficos) - How many letters are there in the alphabet? 2. A tua letra 
é bonita. (caligrafia) - Your handwriting is neat. 3. Eu gosto da 
letra dessa música. (texto em verso) - I like the lyrics of this song. 
levar - 1. Ele levou todos seus livros consigo. (transportar 
para) - He took all his books with him. 2. Levei uma multa por 
excesso de velocidade. (receber) - I got a ticked for speeding. 
3. Quanto tempo leva de ônibus até a praia? (transcurso de 
tempo) - How long does it take to the beach by bus?
líquido - 1. Onde se compra líquido de freio? (fluido) - Where 
can you buy brake fluid? 2. O peso líquido é de 200 kg. (quan-
tidade que sobra após os descontos) - The net weight is 200 kg. 
mais ou menos - 1. Como vai? Mais ou menos. (nem bem 
nem mal) - How are you? So-so. 2. Porto Alegre tem mais ou 
menos 2 milhões de habitantes. (valor aproximado) - Porto 
Alegre has more or less (approximately, about, around) 2 
million inhabitants. 
mandar - 1. Ele me mandou trabalhar. (dar ordem) - He told 
me to work. 2. Vou te mandar uma carta. (enviar) - I’m going to 
send you a letter.
mexer - 1. Mexa até misturar bem. (misturar através de mo-
vimento) - Stir until well mixed. 2. Os galhos estão se mexendo 
com o vento. (movimentar) - The branches are moving in the 
wind. 3. Meu irmão mexia comigo o tempo todo. (incomodar, 
fazer gozação ou pegar no pé de alguém) - My brother used to 
tease me all the time. 4. Não mexe nisso. (tocar, agarrar, manu-
sear) - Don’t mess with that.
moeda - 1. Não gosto de carregar moedas no meu bolso. 
(dinheiro de metal) - I don’t like to carry coins in my pocket. 2. 
Qual é a moeda daquele país? (meio circulante) - What’s the 
currency in that country?
muito - 1. Muito obrigado. (advérbio) - Thank you very much. 
/ Thanks a lot. / Thank you so much. 2. Ele fala Inglês muito bem. 
(advérbio) - He speaks English very well. 3. Isto é muito melhor. 
(avérbio) - This is much better. 4. Leva muito tempo. (adjetivo 
junto de uncountable noun) - It takes a lot of time. / It takes too 
much time. 5. Tenho muitos amigos. (adjetivo junto de countable 
noun) - I have a lot of friends./ I have many friends.
mulher - 1. Nos países muçulmanos as mulheres cobrem o 
rosto. (pessoa de sexo feminino) - In Muslim countries women 
cover their faces. 2. Minha mulher não gosta de cozinhar. (espo-
sa) - My wife doesn’t like to cook. 
negócio - 1. Como vão os negócios? (geral) - How is busi-
ness? 2. Eu acho que fiz um bom negócio. (específico) - I think 
I got a good deal.
nota - 1. Ele está sempre tomando notas em aula. (anota-
ções) - He’s always taking notes in class. 2. Preciso de 5 notas 
de 20 dólares. (cédulas de dinheiro) - I need five 20-dollar bills. 
3. Ela sempre tira notas boas na escola. (avaliação) - She always 
gets good grades (marks) in school.
orçamento - 1. Estou preparando o orçamento para o 
próximo ano. (previsão financeira) - I’m working on the budget 
for the next year. 2. Eu preciso de um orçamento do conserto. 
(preço, estimativa) - I need a cost estimate for the repair.
outro - 1. Eu touxe dois; onde está o o outro. (definido) - I 
brought two; where is the other. 2. Preciso de outro dicionário. 
(um outro - indefinido) - I need another dictionary.
papel - 1. Porque não colocas tuas ideias no papel? (material 
para escrever) - Why don’t you put your ideas on paper? 2. Ele 
desempenha um papel importante na política. (função) - He 
plays an important role in politics.
parabéns - 1. Meus parabéns pelo teu aniversário. (felici-
tação a uma pessoa pelo seu aniversário) - Happy birthday. 2. 
Parabéns pelo aniversário de casamento de vocês. (felicitação 
pelo aniversário de casamento de um casal) - Happy anniver-
sary. 3. Parabéns pela promoção. (felicitação a alguém por algo 
alcançado) - Congratulations on your promotion. 
parte - 1. Esta é a melhor parte da história. (pedaço de 
um todo) - This is the best part of the story. 2. Ambas as partes 
devem assinar o contrato. (participante de um contrato, litígio, 
etc.) - Both parties must sign the contract.
partir - 1. Ele partiu meu coração. (partir, romper, quebrar) 
- He broke my heart. 2. Ele parte amanhã. (sair, ir embora) - He’s 
leaving tomorrow. 3. Vamos partir do início. (começar, iniciar) 
- Let’s start from the beginning.
pasta - 1. Onde é que está a pasta de dentes? (substância de 
consistência mole) - Where is the toothpaste? 2. Dá uma olhada 
na pasta de clientes. (capa de cartolina ou plástico para guardar 
papéis) - Take a look in the customers folder. 
patente - 1. As patentes devem ser limpas e desinfetadas. 
(vaso sanitário) - The toiletsmust be cleaned and disinfected. 
2. Você tem que tirar patente de suas invenções. (registro de 
invenção) - You have to take out a patent on your inventions. 3. É 
patente o fato de que o país sofre com a corrupção. (evidente) - It 
is evident that the country suffers from corruption. 
pé - 1. Eu machuquei meu pé jogando futebol. (membro do 
corpo) - I hurt my foot playing soccer. 2. Tem um pé de fumo no 
jardim. (planta) - There is a tobacco plant in the garden.
pegar - 1. Eu te pego no hotel às 8 horas. (apanhar) - I’ll pick 
you up in the hotel at 8 o’clock. / Ele pegou o jornal para ler. - He 
picked up the newspaper to read. 2. Eu tentei pegar a bola. 
(agarrar, capturar) - I tried to catch the ball. / O policial pegou o 
ladrão. - The policeman caught the thief. 3. É assim que se pega 
na raquete. (agarrar com força) - This is how you hold the racket. 
4. Vai lá e pega a tesoura para mim. (buscar) - Go and get the 
scissors for me. 5. Eu peguei um resfriado. (contrair) - I caught 
a cold. 6. A grama seca pegou fogo. (incendiar) - The dry grass 
caught fire. 7. Pode pegar para ti. (apropiar-se) - You can take it. 
8. O motor não quer pegar. (dar partida) - The engine won’t start.
pena - 1. Tenho pena deles. (piedade) - I feel sorry for them. 
2. Isto não vale a pena. (compensar) - It’s not worth it 3. Que 
pena que não me contaste isso antes. (lástima) - Too bad you 
didn’t tell me this before. 4. A maioria é contra a pena de morte. 
(castigo, penalidade) - The majority is against the death penalty. 
CAPÍTULO 5 – MULTIPLE-MEANING WORDSINGLÊS – EEAr
47
5. As penas de pavão são as mais bonitas. (cobertura das aves) - 
Peacock feathers are the most beautiful. 6. Eu tenho uma jaqueta 
de pena de ganso. (penugem) - I have a goose-down jacket.
perder - 1. Perdi as chaves. (extraviar) - I lost the keys. 2. 
Perdemos o jogo. (ser derrotado) - We lost the game. 3. Perdi o 
ônibus. (não alcançar) - I missed the bus. 4. Não gosto de perder 
aulas. (faltar) - I don’t like to miss class.
pesquisa - 1. Desenvolvimento industrial depende de pes-
quisa. (investigação científica) - Industrial development depends 
on research. 2. As pesquisas indicaram Clinton como favorito. 
(tomada de opinião pública) - The polls indicated Clinton as 
favorite. 3. O artigo traz uma pesquisa sobre o uso de software 
livre no país. (levantamento de dados) - The article reports on a 
nationwide survey of free software use.
pessoal - 1. Ele quer obter vantagens pessoais. (que diz 
respeito à pessoa) - He wants to take personal advantage. 2. Ele 
é responsável pela área de pessoal. (que diz respeito à força de 
trabalho) - He is in charge of the personnel department. 3. Tem 
um pessoal aí que quer falar com você. (grupo de pessoas) - 
There are some people here that want to speak with you.
piloto - 1. Você tem que começar a receber instrução de 
vôo em um aeroclube para se tornar um piloto. (que dirige 
aviões) - You have to start going to a flying school in order to 
become a pilot. 2. Os brasileiros sonham em se tornar pilotos 
de Fórmula 1. (que dirige carros de corrida) - Brazilians dream 
about becoming a Formula 1 race car driver. 
pista - 1. A polícia não tem pistas para solucionar o caso. 
(informação) - The police has no clues to solve the case. 2. A pista 
da direita é para o trânsito de veículos lentos. (parte de uma 
estrada) - The right lane is for the slow-moving traffic. 3. O avião 
está na pista pronto para decolar. (pista de aeroporto) - The 
airplane is on the runway ready to take off. 
planta - 1. Está na hora de regar as plantas. (vegetal) - It’s 
time to water the plants. 2. Para construir uma casa você precisa 
de uma planta. (desenho técnico) - You need a plan in order to 
build a house.
política - 1. Educação é mais importante do que política. 
(ciência de governo) - Education is more important than politics. 
2. Isto é contra a política da empresa. (filosofia, normas) - This 
is against the company’s policy.
professor - 1. Professores do ensino médio estão em 
greve. (professor de 1o e 2o grau) - High school teachers are 
on strike. 2. Professores universitários raramente entram em 
greve. (professor de curso superior) - College professors hardly 
ever go on strike.
propaganda - 1. Consumidores inteligentes não são 
influenciados por propaganda. (publicidade comercial) - In-
telligent consumers are not influenced by advertising. 2. As 
democracias modernas fazem largo uso de propaganda para 
manipular a opinião pública. (informação destorcida, enganosa) 
- Modern democracies rely heavily on propaganda to influence 
public opinion.
quebrado - 1. O vidro está quebrado. (partido) - The glass is 
broken. 2. Eu estou quebrado. (falido) - I’m broke.
receita - 1. Ela tem uma ótima receita para torta de maçã. 
(culinária) - She has a good recipe for apple pie. 2. Não tome este 
remédio sem ler a receita. (bula) - Don’t take this medicine without 
reading the directions. 3. Você precisa de uma receita médica 
para comprar este remédio. (autorização) - You need a doctor’s 
prescription to buy this medicine. 4. O imposto é calculado sobre 
a receita líquida. (recebimento de dinheiro) - Calculations of taxes 
is based on net income.
reconhecer - 1. Reconheço que estava errado. (admitir) - I 
admit I was wrong. 2. Me desculpa, eu não te reconheci. (lem-
brar) - I’m sorry, I didn’t recognize you.
rede - 1. A informação é controlada pelas grandes redes de 
televisão. (sistema de elementos relacionados) - Information is 
controlled by the large television networks. 2. Pescadores nor-
malmente usam rede de pescar. (malha) - Fisherman normally 
use fishing nets. 3. Os nordestinos gostam de dormir em rede. 
(rede de dormir) - The northeastern Brazilians like to sleep on 
hammocks. 
refrigerante - 1. Suco de laranja é mais saudável que refri-
gerante. (bebida não alcoólica, industrializada) - Orange juice 
is healthier than soft drinks. 2. Refrigeradores modernos usam 
isobutano como substância refrigerante. (substância usada em 
aparelhos) - Modern refrigerators use isobutane as refrigerant 
for cooling.
regime - 1. Estou de regime para perder peso. (dieta para 
perder peso) - I’m on a diet to lose weight. 2. Houve muita re-
pressão durante o regime militar. (período de governo) - There 
was a lot of repression during the military regime. 
saber - 1.Você sabe onde ele mora? (ter conhecimento) 
- Do you know where he lives? 2. Eu soube que ele vai ser pro-
movido. (tomar conhecimento) - I heard that he’s going to get 
a promotion.
saudade - 1. Estou com saudades de ti. (falta de uma pessoa) 
- I miss you. 2. Estou com saudades de casa. (falta do ambiente 
de casa, dos amigos, etc.) - I’m homesick.
saúde - 1. Ele tem boa saúde. (condições orgânicas, físicas 
e mentais) - He is in good health. 2. Saúde! (quando alguém 
espirra) - God bless you! 3. Saúde! (brinde) - Cheers!
segurança - 1. Ele é um especialista em segurança no trânsi-
to. (ausência de risco) - He’s an expert in traffic safety. 2. Guardas 
garantem a segurança da fábrica. (guarda, proteção) - Guards 
provide security to the factory.
seguro - 1. Dirigir nos Estados Unidos é muito seguro. (sem 
perigo) - Driving in the United States is very safe. 2. Você tem 
seguro para o carro? (apólice) - Do you have a car insurance?
sócio - 1. Nós somos sócios neste negócio. (participação em 
negócios) - We are partners in this business. 2. Eu não sou sócio 
deste clube. (membro de clube) - I’m not a member of this club.
soltar - 1. Os prisioneiros de guerra foram soltos após a 
rendição. (permitir que saia da prisão) - The prisioners of war 
were released after the rendition. 2. Me solta! (parar de impor 
restrição física a alguém) - Let me go. 3. O menino gosta de 
soltar pandorga. (fazer com que permaneça no pela força 
do vento) - The boy likes to fly a kite. 4. Eles soltaram foguetesCAPÍTULO 5 – MULTIPLE-MEANING WORDS INGLÊS – EEAr
48
após o jogo. (acender fogos de artifício) - They fired (set off) fire 
crackers after the game.
taxa - 1. A taxa de matrícula é muito cara. (preço de serviços) 
- The registration fee is very expensive. 2. A taxa de inflação está 
aumentando. (índice de variação) - The inflation rate is increasing.
tempo - 1. Tempo é dinheiro. (horas, minutos) - Time is 
money. 2. Como é que está o tempo hoje? (clima) - How is 
the weather today? 3. Quantos tempos de verbo existem em 
português. (derivação dos verbos) - How many verb tenses are 
there in Portuguese?
ter - 1. Eu tenho um carro. (possuir) - I have a car. 2. Eu tenho 
que ir. (precisar) - I have to (need to) (must) go. 3. Tem um livro na 
mesa. (existir) - There is a book on the table. 4. Não tenho medo 
de cachorro. (característica pessoal) - I’m not afraid of dogs.
terra - 1. A poluição representa uma ameaça à Terra. (o pla-
neta) - Pollution is a threat to the Earth. 2. Ele é proprietário de 
muitas terras no interior. (terreno, propriedade rural) - He owns a 
lot of land in the countryside. 3. Tem muita terra no jardim. (ma-
téria que compõe o solo) - There is too much earth in the garden.
tinta - 1. Eu preciso de tinta branca para as paredes. (tinta 
para parede ou madeira) - I need white paint for the walls. 2. Eu 
uso tinta preta na minha caneta-tinteiro. (tinta para papel) - I 
use black ink in my fountain pen.
tirar - 1. Tira a roupa. (remover) - Take off your clothes. 2. Ele 
tirou o primeiro lugar. (classificar-se) - He got the first place. 3. 
Eu gosto de tirar fotografias. (fotografar) - I like to take pictures. 
4. Pode tirar a mesa. (remover pratos e talheres) - You can clear 
the table. 5. Tira tuas próprias conclusões. (inferir) - Come to 
your own conclusions.
tocar - 1. Não toque em mim. (encostar) - Don’t touch me. 2. 
Ele toca violão muito bem. (produzir música) - He plays the guitar 
very well. 3. Temos que tocar para a frente este projeto. (execu-
tar) - We have to push forward (go ahead with) this project. 4. O 
telefone está tocando. (soar campainha) - The phone is ringing.
tomar - 1. Você deveria tomar leite. (beber) - You should 
drink milk. 2. Toma cuidado. (ter precaução) - Be careful. 3. Eu 
gosto de tomar banho de mar. (brincar na água) - I like to go 
swimming in the ocean. 4. Toma isso aqui. (pegar) - Take this. 
5. Ele tem que tomar muitos remédios. (ingerir) - He needs to 
take a lot of medicine.
torcer - 1. Ele torceu o pé. (girar, lesionar) - He twisted his 
foot. 2. Você tem que torcer a roupa antes de colocá-le na se-
cadora. (comprimir tecido através de movimento giratório para 
remover água) - You have to wring the clothes before putting them 
in the drier. 3. Vou torcer pelo meu time. (aplaudir e manifestar 
apoio ao seu time) - I’m going to cheer for my team. 
trabalho - 1. O trabalho dignifica o homem. (em geral) - 
Work dignifies man. 2. Fizeste um bom trabalho. (tarefa, obra) 
- You did a good job. 3. O professor quer que façamos um tra-
balho. (trabalho escolar) - The teacher wants us to do a paper.
trocar - 1. Ela foi trocar de roupa. (mudar) - She went to chan-
ge her clothes. 2. Preciso trocar dólares por reais. (intercambiar, 
uma coisa pela outra) - I need to exchange dollars for reais. 3. 
Vou trocar a peça, pois está com defeito. (substituir) - I’m going 
to replace the part because it’s defective. 
um - 1. Tenho apenas um carro; não um avião. (artigo inde-
finido) - I just have a car; not an airplane. 2. Tenho apenas um 
carro; não mais do que um. (numeral) - I only have one car; not 
more than one.
vagabunda - 1. Minha filha nunca arruma o quarto e nunca 
faz os temas. Ele é muito vagabunda. (preguiçosa) - My daughter 
never cleans her room and never does her homework. She is very 
lazy. 2. Aquela mulher é uma vagabunda. (promíscua) - That 
woman is a slut. 
valor - 1. Ele é uma pessoa sem valores morais. (qualidade 
de caráter) - He is a person without moral values. 2. Qual é o valor 
do dinheiro para quem não tem instrução? (significado, poder 
de compra) - What is the value of money, if you have no education? 
3. Preenchi um cheque no valor de 30 dólares. (quantia) - I wrote 
a check on the amount of 30 dollars.
vela - 1. Quando falta luz, a gente acende uma vela. (objeto 
de uso caseiro) - When there is no light we light up a candle. 2. 
Você tem que trocar as velas do motor do carro (peça de igni-
ção) - You have to change the spark plugs. 3. Preciso comprar 
uma vela nova para meu barco (vela náutica) - I have to buy a 
new sail for my boat.
vencer - 1. Deve vencer o time mais bem preparado. (obter 
vitória) - The team in better shape should win. 2. Meu passaporte 
vence dentro de um mês. (perder validade) - My passport ex-
pires in a month. 3. Você vai vencer as dificuldades. (transpor, 
sobreviver) - You are going to overcome the difficulties.
verde - 1. A bandeira brasileira é predominantemente verde. 
(cor) - The Brazilian flag is predominantly green. 2. Aquela maçã 
parece estar verde. (não-madura) - That apple looks unripe.
vergonha - 1. Ela tem vergonha de falar Inglês. (encabulada, 
tímida) - She is too shy to speak English. 2. A política no Brasil é 
uma vergonha. (motivo para consciência de culpa) - Politics in 
Brazil is a shame.
vivo - 1. O animal ainda está vivo. (não morto) - The animal 
is still alive. 2. Eu assisti um show ao vivo. (ocorrendo no exato 
momento) - I saw a live show. 3. Esse cara é muito vivo. (esperto) 
- This guy is very smart.
volta - 1. Na volta paramos num posto de gasolina. (retorno) 
- On the return we stopped at a gas station. 2. Vamos dar uma 
volta? (caminhada) - Let’s go for a walk? 3. Vamos dar uma volta 
de carro? (passeio) - Let’s go for a drive? 4. Estão todos sentados 
em volta da mesa. (ao redor) - They are all sitting around the table.
voltar - 1. Agora tenho que ir; volto amanhã. (vir novamente) 
- I have to go now; I’ll come back tomorrow. 2. Ele volta amanhã 
aos Estados Unidos. (ir novamente) - He’s going back to the 
United States tomorrow.
CAPÍTULO 6 – EXPRESSIONS: MAKE, DO, TAKE & GETINGLÊS – EEAr
49
Capítulo 6
“EXPRESSIONS” QUE USAM MAKE, DO, TAKE & 
GET (EFOMM)
Todas as línguas precisam e fazem uso de palavras multi-
funcionais. São verbos, substantivos, pronomes indefinidos, 
verdadeiros tapa-furos, paus para qualquer obra, que funcio-
nam de forma semelhante ao curinga num jogo de cartas. Por 
serem palavras de conteúdo semântico impreciso, não podem 
ser definidas isoladamente, mas apenas no contexto em que 
ocorrem. Por isso carregam forte carga idiomática.
MAKE, DO, TAKE e GET são os 4 verbos de maior carga 
idiomática em inglês. São multifuncionais, podendo ser com-
parados aos verbos fazer e ficar do português. 
Observe-se que MAKE e DO são frequentemente sinônimos 
no significado, mas não no uso. Isto é: na expressão em que 
ocorre um, não se usa o outro. O significado que esses verbos 
assumem depende da expressão em que ocorrem. Cada uma 
dessas expressões devem ser consideradas como uma unidade 
de vocabulário, como uma nova palavra a ser assimilada.
Os materiais apresentados aqui nesta página não estão na 
forma de plano de aula; são apenas materiais de referência para 
consulta, e úteis na elaboração de planos de aula. These mate-
rials are not lesson plans. They are mainly resource type materials.
MAKE EXPRESSIONS 
•	 make an agreement - fazer um acordo
•	 make an announcement (to) - fazer uma comunicação oficial
•	 make an appointment (with) - marcar uma hora
•	 make arrangements (for) - fazer preparos
•	 make an attempt (to) - fazer uma tentativa
•	 make the bed - fazer a cama
•	 make believe - fazer de conta
•	 make a clean copy - passar a limpo
•	 make it clear (to) - deixar claro
•	 make a complaint (about) - apresentar queixa, reclamar
•	 make a date (with)- marcar um encontro
•	 make a deal (with) - fazer um negócio, negociar
•	 make a decision/resolution (about) - decidir, tomar uma decisão
•	 make a (any, no) difference (to) - fazer diferença
•	 make do with - contentar-se com o que tem
•	 make a down payment - dar de entrada, dar um sinal
•	 make an effort (to) - fazer um esforço
•	 make an excuse (for) - arranjar uma desculpa
•	 make a face (at) - fazer careta
•	 make a fool of someone - fazer alguém de bobo
•	 make for - dirigir-se a
•	 make friends (with) - fazer amizade
•	 make fun of - ridicularizar
•	 make a fuss (about, over) - criar confusão
•	 make someone happy - fazer ficar feliz, deixar feliz
•	 make good - cumprir com o prometido
•	 make a good/bad impression (on) - causar boa impressão
•	 make a list (of) - fazer uma lista
•	 make a living - ganhar a vida
•	 make love (to) - manter relações sexuais
•	 make mistakes (in) - cometer erros
•	 make money - ganhar dinheiro
•	 make someone nervous - enervar alguém
•	 make noise - fazer barulho
•	 make out - entender o significado; beijar, namorar, transar 
(fazer amor); sair-se
•	 make a phone call (to) - telefonar
•	 make a point - fazer uma observação, apresentar um 
ponto de vista
•	 make a profit - lucrar, ter lucro
•	 make progress (in) - progredir
•	 make a promise (to) - prometer
•	 make public - divulgar
•	 make a reservation (for) - fazer uma reserva
•	 make a scene - fazer uma cena, agir histericamente
•	 make sense (to) - fazer sentido 
•	 make a speech (to) - fazer um discurso
•	 make sure (about) - certificar-se
•	 make trouble - criar problemas ou confusão
•	 make up - inventar, improvisar, compensar, maquiar, reconciliar
•	 make up your mind - decidir
•	 make war - guerrear, entrar em guerra
•	 make way - abrir caminho, dar passagem, progredir
•	 make yourself at home - sinta-se à vontade 
DO EXPRESSIONS 
•	 do the (my, your, ...) best (to) - fazer o melhor possível
•	 do business (with) - trabalhar em negócios com
•	 do the cleaning (for) - fazer limpeza
•	 do damage/harm (to) - prejudicar, ferir
•	 do a deal (predominantly in the expression “it’s a done deal”) 
- negócio fechado
•	 do some dictation - fazer um ditado
•	 do the dishes - lavar a louça
•	 do drugs - usar drogas
•	 do your duty - cumprir com suas tarefas
•	 do an exercise - fazer um exercício
•	 do an experiment - fazer uma experiência
•	 do a favor (for) - fazer um favor
•	 do good - fazer bem
•	 do a good/bad job - fazer um bom trabalho
•	 have your hair done - arrumar o cabelo
•	 do your homework - fazer o seu tema
•	 do the housework - fazer os trabalhos domésticos
CAPÍTULO 6 – EXPRESSIONS: MAKE, DO, TAKE & GET INGLÊS – EEAr
50
•	 do the laundry - lavar a roupa
•	 do an operation (on) - operar
•	 do(something) over again - fazer de novo
•	 do overtime - fazer hora extra
•	 do a poll - fazer uma pesquisa (de opinião)
•	 do a problem/a puzzle - resolver um problema (em mate-
mática, por exemplo), um quebra-cabeça
•	 do research (on) - pesquisar, fazer uma pesquisa (investi-
gação científica)
•	 do the right thing - ter uma atitude correta
•	 do the shopping - fazer compras
•	 do something - fazer algo
•	 do time in prison - cumprir pena carcerária
•	 do a translation - fazer uma tradução
•	 do well/badly (in) - sair-se bem/mal
•	 that will do it - isto será suficiente
•	 to have nothing to do with ... - não ter nada a ver com ... 
TAKE EXPRESSIONS 
•	 take advantage - levar vantagem 
•	 take advice - aceitar conselhos 
•	 take (something) apart - separar, desmontar 
•	 take back - levar de volta 
•	 take the blame - assumir a culpa 
•	 take a break - fazer uma pausa, dar uma folga 
•	 take care - cuidar-se, tomar cuidado, ser cuidadoso 
•	 take care of - cuidar de 
•	 take a chance - arriscar 
•	 take a course (lessons) - fazer um curso 
•	 take it easy - acalmar-se 
•	 take effect - vigorar a partir de 
•	 take an injection - tomar (levar) uma injeção 
•	 take into consideration - levar em consideração 
•	 take it as ... - crer, supor, entender, aceitar como ... 
•	 take it or leave it - é pegar ou largar 
•	 take lessons - tomar aulas 
•	 take liberties - tomar liberdades 
•	 take a look (at) - dar uma olhada 
•	 take medicine - tomar remédio 
•	 take a nap - tirar uma sesta 
•	 take notes - fazer anotações 
•	 take off - decolar, ir embora 
•	 take (something) off - tirar (casaco, óculos, etc) 
•	 take the opportunity - aproveitar a oportunidade 
•	 take (somebody / something) out - levar alguém para sair, 
remover algo 
•	 take over - assumir controle, tomar conta 
•	 take part - fazer parte, participar 
•	 take a leak/piss - urinar, mijar 
•	 take personal offense - ofender-se 
•	 take place - acontecer, ocorrer 
•	 take pride - orgulhar-se, ter orgulho 
•	 take the responsibility - assumir a responsabilidade 
•	 take a rest - fazer um descanso 
•	 take a shower - tomar banho 
•	 take steps - iniciar preparativos 
•	 take a taxi (bus, plane) - pegar um taxi 
•	 take the temperature - tirar a febre 
•	 take a test - fazer um exame 
•	 It takes time - leva tempo 
•	 take one’s time - tomar seu tempo, não ter pressa 
•	 take a trip - fazer uma viagem 
•	 take up something - começar a estudar ou praticar algo 
•	 take a walk - dar uma caminhada 
•	 take your time - não te apressa 
GET EXPRESSIONS inglês - português
meaning of become: ficar 
•	 It’s getting dark. - Está ficando escuro. 
•	 We got tired yesterday. - Ficamos cansados ontem. 
•	 I’m getting confused. - Estou ficando confuso, estou fa-
zendo confusão. 
•	 I’m getting accustomed/used to working hard. - Estou fican-
do acostumado a trabalhar muito. 
meaning of receive: ganhar, receber 
•	 She got a nice present for her birthday. - Ela ganhou um 
presente legal de aniversário. 
•	 Language teachers get about R$15 an hour in Brazil. - Profes-
sores de línguas ganham cerca de R$15 por hora no Brasil. 
•	 I hope to get better news tomorrow. - Espero receber notí-
cias melhores amanhã. 
•	 I got a postcard from Germany. - Recebi um cartão postal 
da Alemanha. 
meaning of obtain/buy: arranjar, conseguir, comprar 
•	 He’s going to get a job after college. - Ele vai arranjar um em-
prego depois da faculdade. (conseguir, arranjar emprego) 
•	 I got a promotion. - Eu consegui uma promoção. (ganhar, 
conseguir) 
•	 He got $800 for his old car. - Ele conseguiu 800 dólares pelo 
seu velho carro (conseguir dinheiro pela venda de algo) 
•	 You can get cheap things in Hong Kong. - A gente consegue 
comprar coisas baratas em Hong Kong. 
•	 I’m planning to get a new car soon. - Estou planejando 
comprar um carro novo em breve. 
meaning of fetch/pick up: pegar, trazer, buscar 
•	 Go and get the newspaper. - Vai lá e pega o jornal. 
•	 Shall I get you a book from the library? - Você quer que eu 
traga um livro da biblioteca para você? 
•	 Stay here. I’ll get you some slippers. - Fica aqui. Vou buscar 
(arranjar) uns chinelos para você. 
CAPÍTULO 6 – EXPRESSIONS: MAKE, DO, TAKE & GETINGLÊS – EEAr
51
meaning of arrive at/reach: chegar, ir 
•	 I got home late last night. - Cheguei em casa tarde ontem 
de noite. 
•	 We got to the airport by taxi. - Fomos ao aeroporto de taxi. 
•	 Can you get to the roof of the house? - Você consegue che-
gar (trepar) no telhado da casa? 
meaning of have (possession): ter 
•	 I haven’t got much time. - Não tenho muito tempo. 
•	 Have you got enough money? - Você tem dinheiro que 
chegue? 
meaning of have to (obligation, same as need and must): 
ter que 
•	 I’ve got to go now. - Tenho que ir agora. 
•	 You’ve got to study harder. - Você tem que estudar mais. 
meaning of catch (illness, vehicle, thief): pegar 
•	 I don’t want to get a cold. - Não quero pegar um resfriado. 
•	 I hope you get on a train before midnight. - Espero que você 
consiga pegar um trem antesda meia-noite. 
•	 The thief was caught by the police. - O ladrão foi pego pela 
polícia. 
meaning of prepare/make: preparar 
•	 I’ll get some coffee. - Vou preparar (pegar, buscar) um café. 
•	 She’s getting dinner for her family. - Ela está preparando o 
jantar para sua família. 
meaning of be (as passive auxiliary): ser 
•	 She got hit by a car. - Ela foi atropelada. 
•	 The robber got killed by the police. - O assaltante foi morto 
pela polícia. 
•	 He got robbed last night. - Ele foi assaltado ontem à noite. 
meaning of persuade/convince: convencer 
•	 He got his father to buy him a car. - Ele convenceu o pai a 
dar-lhe um carro. 
•	 I got him to help me. - Consegui convencê-lo a ajudar-me. 
meaning of have something done, order something: 
mandar 
•	 He got his car fixed. - Ele mandou consertar o carro. 
•	 I got my hair cut. - Ele cortou o cabelo. (mandou cortar, 
foi ao barbeiro) 
meaning of understand: entender 
•	 I got you. - Entendi o que você quer dizer. 
•	 Did you get the idea? - Você entendeu a ideia? 
Other meanings and in combination with pre-
positions: 
•	 get across - comunicar, esclarecer,convencer 
•	 get along (with) - dar-se, relacionar-se com 
•	 get away - escapar 
•	 get back - recuperar 
•	 get back from - retornar de 
•	 get something back - reaver algo 
•	 get by - sair-se, virar-se 
•	 get a chance - ter uma oportunidade 
•	 get a cramp - dar uma câimbra 
•	 get even - acertar contas, ficar quites, vingar-se 
•	 get a flat tire - furar o pneu 
•	 get a haircut - cortar o cabelo 
•	 get ...ing! - usado em comandos imperativos 
•	 get in - entrar 
•	 get into - entrar, envolver-se com 
•	 get in touch (with) - fazer contato, manter contato com 
•	 get in trouble - meter-se em confusão, dar-se mal 
•	 get lost! - te some! 
•	 get married - casar-se 
•	 get something off - remover algo 
•	 get off - descer de um ônibus ou trem 
•	 get on - produzir efeito indesejável; embarcar (em veículo) 
•	 get on with someone - relacionar-se com alguém 
•	 get out - sair, partir 
•	 get over - curar-se, recuperar-se; transmitir 
•	 get ready - aprontar-se 
•	 get rid of - livrar-se de, dar um sumiço em 
•	 get to a place - chegar a algum lugar 
•	 get to someone - afetar ou irritar alguém 
•	 get there - chegar ao destino 
•	 get through with something - terminar algo 
•	 get together (with) - reunir-se com 
•	 get something under way - pôr a caminho, pôr em execução 
•	 get up - levantar de manhã
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 7 – EXPRESSIONS - IDIOMS INGLÊS – EEAr
52
Capítulo 7
EXPRESSÕES COTIDIANAS – IDIOMS
É muito importante o aspecto idiomático quando duas lín-
guas são comparadas em nível de vocabulário. Em português, 
por exemplo, a saudação matinal mais comum é Bom dia, a qual 
traduzida ao pé da letra para o inglês, resultaria num insólito 
Good day, em vez do correto e usual Good morning. Existe uma 
correspondência perfeita de ideias, mas não nas formas usadas 
para representar essas ideias.
Certas expressões idiomáticas frequentemente citadas não 
são na verdade muito importantes, porque as ideias que elas 
representam podem ser facilmente colocadas de outra forma. 
Outras, entretanto, desempenham um papel de fundamental 
importância pelo fato de dificilmente poderem ser substituídas, 
bem como pelo alto grau de cotidianidade e pela frequência 
com que ocorrem no inglês de native speakers. A maioria das 
expressões aqui relacionadas são indispensáveis para quem 
deseja expressar-se de forma adequada em inglês. Quando 
oportunamente usadas, conferem ao estudante de EFL (English 
as a Foreign Language) precisão, naturalidade, e uma imagem de 
quem realmente domina o idioma.Os exemplos abaixo encon-
tram-se agrupados de acordo com os contextos em que ocorrem. 
CONVENCIONALIDADES: EXPRESSIONS OF POLI-
TENESS AND GETTING ACQUAINTED
•	 Prazer em conhecê-lo. - Nice to meet you. / I’m glad to know 
you. / It’s a pleasure to know you. / How do you do.
•	 O prazer é meu. - Nice to meet you too.
•	 Como vai? - How are you? / How are you doing? / How is it going?
•	 Oi, tudo bom? - Hi, how’s it going?
•	 E aí, como é que é? - Hey, what’s up? (informal greeting)
•	 Há quanto tempo! - It’s been a long time.
•	 Quantos anos você tem? - How old are you?
•	 Você tem irmãos? - Do you have any brothers and sisters?
•	 De nada. / Não há de que. / Disponha. / Tudo bem. / Que 
é isso! / Capaz! - You’re welcome. / That’s OK. / Not at all. / 
Don’t mention it. / It’s my pleasure.
•	 Igualmente. - The same to you. / You too.
•	 Com licença. / Dá licença. - Excuse me.
•	 Como? / O que? (quando não se entende o que o inter-
locutor disse) - Excuse me? / Pardon? / Beg your pardon? / 
What? (less polite)
•	 Eu já volto. - I’ll be right back.
•	 Até logo. / Até amanhã. - I’ll (I will) see you later (tomorrow). 
/ See you.
•	 Como é que foi o fim de semana? - How did you spend the 
weekend? / How was your weekend?
•	 Parece que vai chover. - It looks like it’s going to rain. / It 
looks like rain.
•	 Será que vai chover neste fim de semana? - I wonder if it’s 
going to rain this weekend.
•	 Tomara que não chova. - I hope it doesn’t rain.
•	 Faça-os entrar. - Show them in.
•	 Fique à vontade. / Esteja à vontade. / Faça de conta que 
está em casa. / Esteja a gosto. - Make yourself at home. / 
Make yourself comfortable.
•	 Sirva-se. - Help yourself. / Be my guest. / Go ahead. (informal)
•	 Você está se divertindo? - Are you having a good time? / Are 
you enjoying yourself? / Are you having fun?
•	 O que você achou da festa? - How did you like the party? / 
What did you think of the party?
•	 Não, obrigado; estou satisfeito. / Estou servido. - No, 
thanks. I’m full. / I’ve had enough.
•	 Saúde! (Quando alguém espirra) - God bless you. / Bless you.
•	 Saúde! (Brinde) - Cheers!
•	 Pois não? (Que deseja?) - Yes, may I help you? / Can I help 
you? / What can I do for you? / What can I get for you?
•	 Pois não! - Sure! / Of course! (acceding to a request).
•	 Você é que resolve. / Você que sabe. - It’s up to you.
•	 por mim, tudo bem. - It’s OK with me.
•	 Vamos dar uma volta? - Let’s go for a walk. / Let’s take a 
walk. / Do you want to go for a walk? / Let’s go for a drive. / 
Would you like to go for a drive?
•	 Qualquer um; tanto faz. - Either one. / Whatever. / It 
doesn’t matter. / It doesn’t make any difference. / It makes 
no difference.
•	 Pode deixar comigo - I’ll take care of it.
•	 Me avisa se mudares de ideia. - Let me know if you change 
your mind.
•	 Lembranças. / Abraços. - Regards. / Give my best.
•	 Vamos manter contato. - Let’s keep in touch.
•	 Passe bem. - Have a nice day.
•	 Boa viagem! - Have a nice trip!
CONSOLANDO E TENTANDO AJUDAR (COMFOR-
TING AND TRYING TO HELP)
•	 Não se preocupe. / Deixa prá lá. / Não importa. - Don’t 
worry. / Never mind.
•	 Vai ficar tudo bem. - It’ll be OK. / It’ll be all right.
•	 Não deixe isso te afetar - Don’t let it get to you.
•	 Te acalma. / Vai com calma. - Take it easy.
•	 Felizmente não aconteceu nada. - Fortunately nothing 
happened.
•	 Ainda bem que ... / Graças a Deus … - Thank God … / 
Good thing …
•	 Não foi tua culpa. - It was not your fault.
•	 Pode contar comigo. - You can count on me. / You can 
lean on me.
•	 Estarei sempre a teu lado. - I’ll always be there for you.
•	 Coitado. / Coitadinho. - Poor thing.
•	 Meus pêsames. - My sympathy. 
CAPÍTULO 7 – EXPRESSIONS - IDIOMSINGLÊS – EEAr
53
APROVANDO, FELICITANDO, ELOGIANDO OU 
CELEBRANDO (APPROVING, PRAISING, CONGRA-
TULATING AND CELEBRATING)
•	 Isso mesmo. / Exatamente. / Com certeza. - Exactly. / 
Absolutely.
•	 Boa ideia! / É uma boa. - Good idea! / Sounds good.
•	 Ótimo! - Great!
•	 Bem lembrado. - Good thinking.
•	 Meus parabéns pelo seu aniversário. / Meus cumprimen-
tos pelo ... - Congratulations on your birthday.•	 Gostei do teu vestido. - I really like your dress.
•	 Você está bonita(o). - You look good! / You look great!
•	 Consegui! - I got it! / I did it!
•	 São e salvo! - Safe and sound!
•	 Bom trabalho! - Good job!
•	 Ele está se saindo bem. - He’s doing all right. 
DESCREVENDO PESSOAS - (DESCRIBING PEOPLE)
•	 Ele (ela) é muito simpático(a). / ... é muito legal. - He/she’s 
very nice.
•	 Ela é muito gostosa. - AmE: She’s hot. / What a babe! / She’s 
a foxy lady. / She’s a looker. / BrE: She’s really a nice totty. / 
She’s really stunning.
•	 Ela é uma gracinha. / ... bonitinha. - She’s cute.
•	 Ele é um gostosão. - He’s a hunk. / He’s hot.
•	 Ele está de mau humor hoje. - He is in a bad mood today.
•	 Ele está fazendo 30 anos. - He’s turning 30.
•	 Ele sofre do coração. - He has a heart condition.
•	 Ele é uma figura. - He’s a real character.
•	 Ele é um tremendo cara de pau (cara dura). - He’s got a lot 
of gall. / ... a lot of balls. / ... a lot of nerve.
•	 Ele é um dedo-duro. - He’s a snitch.
•	 Ele é um puxa-saco. - He’s an ass-kisser. / He’s a brownnoser. 
/ He’s an apple-polisher.
•	 Ele é um tremendo CDF - He’s a nerd.
•	 Ele é um chato. - He’s a pain.
•	 Ele é uma criança muito mimada - He’s a spoiled child.
EXPRESSANDO PENSAMENTOS E SENTIMENTOS 
(EXPRESSING THOUGHTS AND FEELINGS)
•	 Tenho saudades de ti (você). - I miss you.
•	 Estou com saudades de casa. - I’m homesick. / I miss home.
•	 Tenho muita pena dessa gente. - I’m very sorry for those 
people.
•	 Acho que sim. - I think so.
•	 Eu acho que não. - I don’t think so. / I’m not so sure.
•	 Espero que sim. / Tomara que sim. - I hope so.
•	 Espero que não. / Tomara que não. - I hope not.
•	 Suponho que sim. - I guess so.
•	 Suponho que não. - I guess not.
•	 Claro! Claro que sim! - Sure! / Of course!
•	 Claro que não! - Of course not!
•	 Sem dúvida! - Without any question!
•	 Isso mesmo. / Exatamente. / É bem assim mesmo. - Exactly.
•	 Pode crer. - You bet.
•	 Por mim, tudo bem. - It’s OK with me.
•	 De jeito nenhum! / Não há condições ... / De maneira 
alguma! - No way! / There’s no way ... / By no means. / That’s 
impossible.
•	 Deus me livre! - Heaven forbid. / God forbid.
•	 Pode parar! / Dá um tempo! - Give me a break!
•	 Estou morrendo de fome. - I’m starving.
•	 Não aguento mais isto. - I can’t stand it. / I can’t stand it any 
longer. / I’m sick and tired of this. / I’m fed up with it.
•	 Não me sinto à vontade. - I don’t feel comfortable.
•	 Que vergonha! / Que chato! - What a shame! / How em-
barrassing!
•	 Não adianta. - It doesn’t help. / It won’t help. / It’s no use. / 
It’s no help.
•	 Isto não tem lógica; não faz sentido. - It doesn’t make any 
sense. / It’s nonsense.
•	 Não deixa de aproveitar esta oportunidade. - Don’t let this 
opportunity go by. / Don’t let it slip away.
•	 Quem não arrisca, não petisca. - Nothing ventured, nothing 
gained.
•	 Não queremos abrir precedente. - We don’t want to set a 
precedent.
•	 Em primeiro lugar, ... - First of all, ...
•	 Em último caso, … - As a last resort …
•	 Finalmente! / Até que em fim! - At last!
•	 Cá entre nós … - Just between you and me, … / Just between 
the two of us, …
•	 Pensando bem… - On second thought …
•	 Até certo ponto… - To a certain extent … 
•	 Na pior das hipóteses, … - If worse comes to worst … / If 
worst comes to worst … / At worst …
•	 Cedo ou tarde… - Sooner or later …
•	 Vamos fazer cara ou coroa. - Let’s flip a coin.
•	 Conto com você. - I’m counting on you.
•	 Temos que nos ajudar um ao outro. / ... nos ajudar uns 
aos outros. - We have to help each other. / We have to help 
one another.
•	 Cuidado! - Be careful! / Watch out!
•	 Te cuida. / Cuide-se (Numa despedida) - Take care. / Take 
care of yourself.
•	 Opa! (interjeição referente a um pequeno engano ou 
acidente) - Oops!
•	 É a vida… - That’s life …
PERGUNTANDO OU PEDINDO - ASKING (10) 
•	 Como é que se diz ... em inglês? - What do you call ... in 
English?
CAPÍTULO 7 – EXPRESSIONS - IDIOMS INGLÊS – EEAr
54
•	 O que é que significa ...? - What’s the meaning of ...? / What 
does ... mean?
•	 Tu estás de carro aí? - Are you driving?
•	 Me dá uma carona? - Can you give me a ride? / Would you 
...? / Will you ...?
•	 Posso te pedir um favor? / Podes me fazer um favor? - May 
I ask you a favor? / Can you do me a favor?
•	 Me paga uma cerveja? - Will you buy me a beer?
•	 Posso te fazer uma pergunta? - May I ask you a question? 
/ Can I ask you something?
•	 O que é que está acontecendo por aqui? - What’s going 
on in here?
•	 Como assim? / O que é que você quer dizer com isso? / O 
que é que você está querendo dizer? - What do you mean? 
/ What are you talking about? / What are you trying to say?
•	 Como é que se escreve? - How do you spell it? 
LAMENTANDO, ARREPENDENDO-SE OU DES-
CULPANDO-SE (DECLINING, REGRETTING AND 
APOLOGIZING)
•	 Que tal numa outra ocasião ...? - Maybe some other time.
•	 Que pena que tu não me contaste isto antes. / É uma pena 
...! / É lamentável … - Too bad you didn’t tell me this before. 
/ What a pity ...! / What a shame ...!
•	 É tarde demais. - It’s too late.
•	 Foi tudo em vão. - It was all for nothing.
•	 Desculpa pelo atraso. - Sorry for being late. / Sorry I’m late. 
/ Sorry to be late.
•	 Não é minha culpa, eu fiz o melhor que pude (possível). 
- It’s not my fault, I did my best. / ... , I did the best I could.
•	 Não tive a intenção de te magoar. - I didn’t mean to hurt you.
•	 A culpa foi minha. - It was my fault.
•	 Eu estava só brincando. - I was just kidding. / I was joking.
•	 Você deve desculpar-se. - You should apologize.
•	 Não me arrependo. / Não estou arrependido. - I don’t 
regret it. / I’m not sorry. 
INFORMANDO OU COMENTANDO (INFORMING 
OR MAKING COMMENTS)
•	 Nasci em 1965. - I was born in 1965.
•	 Nós estávamos passeando. - We were taking a walk. / We were 
walking around. / We were going for a drive. / We were driving.
•	 Normalmente vou para a escola a pé, mas às vezes meu 
pai me leva. - I usually walk to school but sometimes my 
father drives me.
•	 Meu pai vai para o trabalho de carro. - My father drives 
to work.
•	 Não tenho nada para fazer. - I don’t have anything to do. / 
I’ve got nothing to do.
•	 Não choveu anteontem mas é capaz de chover depois de 
amanhã. - It didn’t rain the day before yesterday but it might 
rain the day after tomorrow
•	 Eu pratico inglês, dia sim dia não. - I practice English every 
other day.
•	 Ele não vem hoje. - He isn’t coming today.
•	 Isto não vale a pena. - It’s not worth it. / It isn’t worthwhile.
•	 Nada mais justo. - Fair enough.
•	 Eu continuo tentando, ainda não desisti. - I’m still trying, 
I haven’t given up yet.
•	 Até agora, tudo bem. - So far, so good.
•	 Você tem que pagar até o fim do mês. - You have to pay 
by the end of the month. / ... before the end of the month.
•	 A secretária está atendendo o telefone. - The secretary is 
answering the phone. / ... is on the phone ...
•	 O vendedor está atendendo um cliente. - The salesman is 
helping a customer.
•	 O Dr. Bishop não está atendendo pacientes porque está 
participando de uma conferência. - Dr. Bishop isn’t exa-
mining patients because he’s attending a conference. / Dr. 
Bishop isn’t seeing patients ... / Dr. Bishop isn’t attending to 
patients ...
•	 Estou precisando ir ao médico (dentista). - I need to see a 
doctor (dentista).
•	 Vou cortar o cabelo. - I’m going to get a haircut. / I’m going 
to get my hair cut.
•	 Aquilo lá são livros. - Those are books.
•	 Tem uma pessoa aí que quer falar contigo. - There’s some-
body (someone) who (that) wants to talk (speak) to (with) you.
•	 Agora é a tua vez. - Now it’s your turn.
•	 Eu trabalho por conta própria. - I work for myself. / I work 
on my own. / I’m self employed.
•	 Eu me machuquei. - I hurtmyself.
•	 Eu gosto de andar de pés descalços. - I like to walk barefoot.
•	 Eu gosto de tomar banho de mar. - I like to go swimming 
in the ocean.
•	 Te deste conta de que o custo de vida está cada dia mais 
alto? - Did you realize that the cost of living is getting higher 
every day?
•	 Ele está namorando minha irmã. - He’s dating my sister.
•	 Cá entre nós, … - Just between the two of us,...
•	 Extra-oficialmente. - Off the record.
•	 Só para lembrar … - Just for the record … / Just as a re-
minder …
•	 Não sobrou nada. - There’s nothing left.
•	 No mínimo … - At least … / At the least …
•	 No máximo … - At most … / At the most …
•	 Meio a meio. - Fifty-fifty. / Half and half.
•	 É meio caro. - It’s kind of expensive.
•	 Na maioria das vezes. - Most of the times.
•	 Na maior parte do tempo. - Most of the time.
•	 No mais tardar. - At the latest.
•	 O quanto antes. - As soon as possible.
•	 Quanto tempo tu levaste daqui a Porto Alegre? - How long 
did it take you to get from here to Porto Alegre?
CAPÍTULO 7 – EXPRESSIONS - IDIOMSINGLÊS – EEAr
55
•	 Levou uma hora e meia para a gente chegar lá. - It took us 
an hour and a half to get there.
•	 Isto não funciona. - It doesn’t work. / It’s out of order.
•	 O telefone está ocupado - The line is busy. / The phone is busy.
•	 O relógio está atrasado/adiantado. - The watch is slow/fast.
•	 O barulho está muito alto. - The noise is too loud.
•	 Fiquei conhecendo teu irmão ontem. - I met your brother 
yesterday.
•	 Você conhece o Rio de Janeiro? - Have you ever been to Rio 
de Janeiro? / Did you ever go to Rio?
•	 Eu conheço ele de vista. - He looks familiar to me.
•	 Ele deveria estar aqui às 8 horas. - He was supposed to be 
here 8 o’clock.
•	 O cachorro é para ser o melhor amigo do homem. - Dogs 
are supposed to be man’s best friend.
•	 Ele tem um carro novo em folha (zerinho). - He has a 
brand new car.
•	 Fiquei preso num engarrafamento de trânsito. - I was 
caught in a traffic jam.
•	 Vamos ficar sem gasolina. - We are going to run out of gas.
•	 Estacionamento proibido. - No parking.
•	 Furei um pneu. - I got a flat tire.
•	 Quanto mais tu estudas, mais aprendes. - The more you 
study, the more you learn.
•	 A gente combina isso amanhã. - Let’s talk about it tomor-
row. / Let’s make all the arrangements tomorrow. / We can 
settle this tomorrow.
•	 Nem eu. / Eu também não. - Me neither. / I don’t either. / 
Neither do I.
•	 Melhor não arriscar. - Better not take any chances.
•	 Não queremos correr nenhum risco. - We don’t want to 
take any chances. / We don’t want to gamble. / ... to take a 
risk. / ... to run a risk.
•	 Você tem que reconhecer a firma deste documento. - You 
must have this document notarized.
•	 Ele foi pego em flagrante. - He was caught red-handed.
•	 Não te esquece de puxar a descarga depois de fazer xixi (mi-
jar). - Don’t forget to flush the toilet after you pee (take a piss). 
RECLAMANDO E EXIGINDO, CRITICANDO E RE-
PREENDENDO, INSULTANDO OU PRAGUEJANDO 
COMPLAINING AND DEMANDING, REPRIMAN-
DING AND CRITICIZING, INSULTING OR CURSING
•	 O que há contigo? - What’s the matter with you?
•	 O que é que você quer dizer com isso?! - What do you 
mean (by that)?!
•	 Qual é a lógica? - What’s the point?
•	 Isso não faz (nenhum) sentido! - It doesn’t make (any) sense!
•	 Isso não é da tua conta. - This is none of your business. / Mind 
your own business. / This doesn’t concern you.
•	 Não se meta nisso. - Stay out of it.
•	 Não me incomoda! / Não enche o saco! - Don’t bother me!
•	 Me deixa fora disso - Leave me out of this.
•	 Me deixa em paz! - Leave me alone.
•	 Larga do meu pé! / Me larga de mão! - Get off my back!
•	 Deixe-me ir. - Let me go.
•	 Cala a boca! - Shut up!
•	 Para com isso! - Stop that! / Stop it! / Cut it out!
•	 Chega! / Basta! - That’s enough!
•	 Cai fora! - Get lost!
•	 Rua! - Out!
•	 Que feio! / Tenha vergonha! - Shame on you!
•	 Ele furou a fila. - He cut in line.
•	 Isto não fica bem. - That’s not nice.
•	 Não acho graça nisso. - I don’t think that’s funny.
•	 Isso não é justo. - That’s not fair.
•	 Está me achando com cara de bobo? - Do I look like a fool?
•	 Eu me sinto prejudicado. - I feel cheated / I feel like life has 
cheated me.
•	 Fui enganado. / Fui logrado. - I was ripped off.
•	 Fui injustamente acusado. - I was falsely accused.
•	 Que sacanagem! / Que golpe baixo! - What a dirty trick!
•	 Que sacanagem! / Que azar! - What a let down!
•	 Que decepção! - What a disappointment!
•	 Não tire conclusões precipitadas. - Don’t jump to conclusions.
•	 Guarda tuas coisas e arruma teu quarto. - Put your things 
away and clean up your room.
•	 Seu burro! - You, stupid!
•	 Bem feito! - It serves you right. / You asked for it.
•	 Filho da puta! - Son of a bitch! / You bastard!
•	 Essa não cola! - I don’t buy that!
•	 Que saco! / Que droga! - That sucks! / What a pain!
•	 Droga! / Merda! - Damn it! / Shit!
•	 Via à merda! Te fode! - Fuck you! / Fuck yourself!
•	 Porra! - Fuck!
•	 Isto me deixa puto da vida! - It really pisses me off!
•	 Isso me deixa louco! - It drives me crazy!
•	 Não discute! - Don’t argue.
•	 Depressa! / Anda logo! - Hurry up! 
MENOSPREZANDO OU DESCONSIDERANDO 
(DESPISING OR DISREGARDING)
•	 Sei lá. / Não faço ideia - I have no idea. /I got no idea. / How 
should I know? 
•	 E eu com isso? Não ligo para isso, não estou nem aí! / Não 
dou a mínima. (indiferença, desprezo) - I don’t care. / I don’t 
give a damn. / What’s that to me? 
•	 E daí? ... (em tom de desafio) - And so what? / Who cares? 
•	 Não faz mal; não importa; não quer dizer. - It doesn’t matter. 
/ No problem. 
•	 Eu não me importo. (não me ofendo) - I don’t mind. 
•	 Deixa prá lá; não liga para isso; esquece. - Never mind. / 
Forget it. 
•	 Grande coisa! - Big deal! 
CAPÍTULO 7 – EXPRESSIONS - IDIOMS INGLÊS – EEAr
56
EXPRESSANDO SURPRESA: EXPRESSING SUR-
PRISE
•	 Adivinha! - Guess what! 
•	 É mesmo!? - Oh, really?! / Is that right? 
•	 Não me diga! ... - You don’t say! / Don’t tell me! 
•	 Não acredito! ... - I can’t believe it! 
•	 Tá brincando! ... - No kidding! / You must be joking! 
•	 Fiquei de boca aberta. / Fiquei de queixo caído. - I was 
shocked. / I was taken aback. / I was left speechless. / My 
chin dropped. 
•	 Levei um susto. - I got scared. 
•	 Foi uma grande surpresa. - It came as a complete surprise. 
•	 Você está falando sério? - Are you serious? 
•	 Prá que!? - What for!? 
•	 Puxa! / Mas que barbaridade! / Meu Deus! / Minha nossa! 
- Oh my God! / Jesus Christ! / My goodness! / Holy cow! 
•	 Puta merda! - Holy shit! 
INTERJEIÇÕES
•	 Ah ... bom, aí já é diferente ... - Oh! That’s different. (surprise 
caused by understanding) 
•	 Ah, tá, agora eu entendo - Aha, now I understand! (mild 
surprise caused by a discovery or recognition) 
•	 Nossa! Olha só! - Wow! Look at that! (great surprise, admi-
ration and approval caused by something exciting) 
•	 Ufa! Que dia ...! - Phew, what a day! (expressing relief after 
a tiring, hard or dangerous experience) 
•	 Ai ai ai! Que má notícia! - Oh no! That’s really bad news. 
(dismay, bad surprise) 
•	 Iiii, aí vem tua mãe. - Uh-oh, here comes your Mom. (alarm, 
dismay, concern, or realization of a small difficulty) 
•	 Ôpa! Derramei o leite. - Oops! (Whoops!) I’ve spilled the 
milk. (mild embarrassment caused by a small accident) 
•	 Ai! Machuquei meu pé. - Ouch! I’ve hurt my foot. (sudden pain) 
•	 Ei! O que que você está fazendo?! - Hey! What are you 
doing? (call for attention) 
•	 Eka, que nojo! - Yuck! That’s disgusting. (expressing rejec-That’s disgusting. (expressing rejec-
tion or disgust) 
•	 Tá bom, vamos fazer assim. - Okay, let’s do it. (acceptance 
and agreement) 
•	 Tudo bem, já vou fazer. - All right, I’ll do it. (agreement 
and obedience) 
•	 Mm hmm, também acho. - Uh-huh,I think so too. (affir-
mative opinion) 
•	 Alô, quem fala? - Hello, who’s speaking? (on the telephone) 
•	 Oi, como vai? - Hi! How are you? (greeting) 
•	 Olá, meu amigo. - Hello, my friend. (greeting) 
MARKETING E VENDAS
•	 Correspondência comercial. - Business writing. / Business 
letters. 
•	 Os clientes não estão fazendo muitos pedidos. - The cus-
tomers are not placing many orders. 
•	 O vendedor está atendendo um cliente. - The salesman is 
helping a customer. 
•	 Propaganda é a alma do negócio. - It’s all marketing. / It 
pays to advertise. 
•	 O cliente vem sempre em primeiro lugar. / O cliente sem-
pre tem razão. - The customer is always right. 
•	 Encontrar um denominador comum. - Find common ground. 
•	 Está à venda. / Vende-se. - It’s up for sale. / For sale. 
•	 Em liquidação. / Em promoção. - On sale. / Clearance. 
•	 Remarcado em 20% - 20% off. 
•	 É uma barbada. / É uma pechincha. - It’s a good deal. / It’s 
a real bargain. 
•	 Fiz uma boa compra. - I got a good deal. 
•	 É um roubo. - It’s a rip-off. 
•	 Fui roubado. - I got ripped off. 
•	 Cheque sem fundo. - Bad check. / Bounced check. / Rubber check. 
•	 Cheque pré-datado. - Post-dated check. 
•	 Condições de pagamento - Terms of payment. 
•	 A prazo / Em prestações / No crediário - In installments. 
•	 De entrada / Como sinal - As a down payment. 
•	 restante / O saldo - The remaining balance / The balance. 
•	 Pagar à vista, em dinheiro. - Pay cash. 
•	 Pagar adiantado. - Pay in advance. 
•	 No atacado / A preços de atacado - At wholesale. / At 
wholesale prices. 
•	 No varejo / A preços de varejo - At retail / At retail prices. 
•	 Participação de mercado - Market share. 
NO TRABALHO: AT WORK
•	 Normalmente vou a pé para o trabalho, mas quando 
chove vou de carro. - I usually walk to work, but when it 
rains I drive. / ... I take my car. 
•	 Ele ganha 1.000 dólares por mês. - He makes a thousand 
dollars a month. 
•	 Hoje é dia de pagamento. - Today’s payday. 
•	 A secretária está atendendo o telefone. - The secretary is 
answering the phone. / ... is on the phone. 
•	 Favor informar - Please let me know 
•	 Você pode deixar um recado na secretária eletrônica. - You 
can leave a message on the answering machine. 
•	 Não vou poder assistir à reunião hoje de tarde. - I won’t be 
able to attend the meeting this afternoon. / I’m not going to 
be able ... / I’m not able ... / I can’t ... 
•	 Proibida a entrada de pessoas estranhas ao serviço. - Per-
sonnel only. / Unauthorized entry prohibited. 
•	 O horário de trabalho (expediente) é das 8 às 12. - Working 
hours are from 8 to 12. 
•	 Após o horário de expediente … - After working hours. / 
After hours. 
•	 Durante o horário comercial. - During business hours. 
CAPÍTULO 7 – EXPRESSIONS - IDIOMSINGLÊS – EEAr
57
•	 Tenho que fazer hora extra. - I have to work overtime. 
•	 O horário de verão nos EUA vai de abril a outubro. - Dayli-
ght saving time in the US is from April to October. 
•	 Faltam dois dias para eu entrar em férias. - I’ll go on vaca-
tion (holidays) in two days. / There are two days left before 
I go on vacation. 
•	 Está faltando alguém? - Is anybody missing? 
•	 Está faltando dinheiro no mercado. - There is a shortage 
of money in the market. 
•	 Faz dois anos que eu trabalho aqui. - I’ve been working 
here for two years. 
•	 Eu trabalhava num banco, antes. - I used to work for a bank. 
•	 Fiquei sabendo que ele foi demitido. / Ouvi dizer que 
... - I heard he was fired. / ... he was dismissed. / I was told 
that he was ... 
•	 Um novo gerente será contratado. - A new manager will 
be hired. 
•	 Quem manda aqui sou eu! - I’m the boss around here! 
•	 Preencha a ficha (formulário) de inscrição. - Fill out the 
application form. 
•	 Ele está de plantão. / Ele está de serviço. - He’s on call. / 
He’s on duty. 
•	 Ele está aqui a serviço. / ... a negócios. - He’s here on 
business. 
•	 Vou tirar uma folga amanhã. - I’m going to take a day off. 
•	 Ele vai se aposentar. - He’s going to retire. 
•	 Ela está de licença. - She’s on leave. 
•	 Ela está encostada no INPS. / ... de licença para tratamento 
de saúde. - She’s on sick leave. 
•	 sindicato não está cooperando. - The (labor) union is not 
cooperating. 
•	 Os trabalhadores estão planejando fazer greve. - The 
workers are planning to go on strike. 
•	 A/C (aos cuidados de). - C/O (care of). 
•	 Já foi providenciado. - It’s been taken care of. 
•	 Todos os funcionários devem bater o cartão-ponto. - All 
the workers must punch their time cards. 
•	 O sistema de previdência social está quebrado. - The social 
security system is bankrupt. 
NOS ESTUDOS: STUDYING
•	 Estou fazendo um curso de inglês. / Estou tomando aulas 
de inglês. - I’m taking an English course. / I’m taking English 
lessons. 
•	 Estou fazendo faculdade. - I’m going to college. 
•	 Estou fazendo 4 cadeiras neste semestre. - I’m taking 4 
courses this semester. 
•	 Estou fazendo um curso de graduação. - I’m going to 
undergraduate school. 
•	 Estou fazendo um pós-graduação. / ... um mestrado. - I’m 
going to graduate school. 
•	 Ele está fazendo (estudando) economia. - He’s majoring 
in economics. / He’s studying economics. 
•	 Temos que decorar o diálogo. - We have to memorize the 
dialog. 
•	 Fiz um exame e me saí bem. - I took an exam (test) and 
did well. 
•	 Eu me saí bem em todas as matérias. - I did well in all sub-
jects. / ... in all my classes. / ... in all my courses. 
•	 Tirei uma nota boa. - I got a good grade. 
•	 Vai cair na prova. - It’ll be on the test. 
•	 Ele colou no exame. - He cheated on the test. 
•	 Ele falta muito às aulas - He misses class a lot. 
•	 Ele gosta de matar aula. - He likes to skip classes. / ... to cut 
classes. 
•	 No final do semestre cada aluno deve fazer um trabalho. 
- Each student must write a paper (an essay) at the end of 
the semester. 
•	 Você já entregou o seu trabalho? - Did you already hand 
in (turn in) your paper? 
•	 professor distribuiu a bibliografia a ser usada no semestre. 
- The professor handed out the bibliography for the semester. 
•	 Eu me formei na PUC. - I graduated from PUC. 
•	 Fiz um estágio na ... - I did an internship at ... 
•	 Fiz um mestrado em ... - I did my master’s in ...
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 8 – WORDS OF CONNECTION INGLÊS – EEAr
58
Capítulo 8
WORDS OF CONNECTION
(CONECTIVOS & CONJUNÇÕES)
Words of transition, words of connection, transition devices, 
linking words ou discourse markers são conjunções, advérbios, 
preposições, locuções, etc., que servem para estabelecer uma 
relação lógica entre frases e ideias. Em português essas pa-
lavras são chamadas de articuladores ou plavras conectivas. 
CONSTITUEM
As listas abaixo constituem-se numa ajuda decisiva para 
quem compõe um texto em inglês, independente do nível de 
capacidade do redator. Os conectivos, mais frequentemente 
usados, são: 
Em primeiro lugar, ... / Para começar, ... 
First of all, ... / In the first place, ... / To 
begin with, ... 
De acordo com ... According to ... 
Principalmente ... Especially ... / Mainly ... 
A principal razão ... / O principal mo-
tivo ... 
The main reason ... 
A partir de agora ... / De agora em 
diante ... 
From now on ... 
Por enquanto (passado) ... / Até agora ... So far ... / Up till now ... 
Por enquanto (futuro) ... / Até que mude 
de ideia. 
... for some time. / ... for a while. / For the 
time being ... 
Ainda não ... ... not ... yet. 
Nesse meio tempo, ... / Enquanto isso, ... In the meantime, ... / Meanwhile, ... 
Em meio a ... In the midst of ... 
Via de regra ... As a rule ... 
Sempre que ... Whenever ... 
À medida em que o tempo passa, ... As time goes by, ... 
A propósito, por falar nisso, ... By the way, … 
Pelo que eu sei, … / Pelo queme consta, 
… / Que eu saiba, … 
As far as I know, … / As far as I can tell, … 
/ To the best of my knowledge, … 
No que se refere a mim, … / No que diz 
respeito a mim, … 
As far as I’m concerned, … 
Do ponto de vista de … From the standpoint of … 
Sem dúvida … Without a doubt …/ Of course … 
Da mesma forma que … In the same way that … 
De maneira (forma) que … So that … / In order that … 
Desde que … As long as … 
Em outras palavras, … / O que eu quero 
dizer ... / Quer dizer, … / Ou seja, … 
In other words, … / What I’m trying to say 
... / That is, … 
Por um lado, … On the one hand, …
Por sua vez, ... In his/her/its turn, ...
Por outro lado, … / Em compensação, … On the other hand, … 
Da mesma forma, … / Por seu turno … Likewise … 
Enquanto que … / Ao passo que … While … / Whereas … 
Entretanto, … / No entanto, … However, … 
Embora … / Mesmo que … Although … / Even though … / Even if … 
Em último caso, … As a last resort, …
Mesmo assim, … Nevertheless, … / Still, … 
Apesar de … In spite of … / Despite … 
Além disto, … Besides that, … / In addition to that, … 
Não apenas …, mas também … Not only …, but also … 
Afora isso, … Aside from that, … 
Pelo menos … At least …
De qualquer modo, … / Seja como 
for, … 
Anyway, … / At any rate, … / In any 
case, … 
Senão … / Caso contrário … Otherwise … 
Ao contrário de … Unlike … 
Em vez de … / Ao invés de … Instead of … / In place of … 
A não ser que … Unless … 
A não ser por … / Com exceção de … Except for … 
Uma vez que … / Já que … Since … 
Por exemplo, … For example, … / For instance, … 
Em função de … / Devido a … In face of … / Due to … 
Por esta razão, … / Neste sentido … / 
Desta forma, … / Diante do exposto, 
… / Levando isto em consideração, … 
For this reason, … / With this in mind, … 
Portanto, … Therefore, … / So, … 
Finalmente, … / Por fim, … Finally, … / At last, … 
Levando tudo isso em consideração, … 
/ Em resumo, … 
All things considered, … / Finally, … / In 
summary, … 
Abaixo segue uma lista abrangente de palavras e locuções 
conectivas, agrupadas por tipo de ligação que estabelecem. 
Esta lista é de utilidade especialmente para alunos avançados 
que possuem boa familiaridade com redação em inglês:
INTRODUCTION
concerning to start with 
first of all as referred to
in the first place (at) first
initially by the way
on the one hand  changing the subject
regarding to begin with 
speaking of
AGREEMENT
in accordance / in agreement/ in conformity according to / as per
CONTRAST
but in spite of (that) unlike
conversely meanwhile whereas
despite nevertheless while
even though nonetheless yet
for all that notwithstanding after (all)
for (my, his, ...) part
on the contrary / on 
the other hand
alternatively
however still although
in contrast / in (the) 
face of
then again as opposed to
in (the) light of though at the same time
COMPARISON
in comparison (with)  / in the same way/ similarly / comparing 
/ likewise
CAPÍTULO 8 – WORDS OF CONNECTIONINGLÊS – EEAr
59
EMPHASIS
indeed primarily unquestionably
in fact principally valuable to note
in particular sometimes without a doubt  
more important(ly)  specifically above all
most important(ly) the basic cause  a key feature
naturally the chief factor a major concern
particularly the key point definitely
positively the main reason especially significant 
ADDITION
both ... and last but not least on top of that 
either ... or likewise or
equally important  moreover plus
further neither ... nor similarly
furthermore next together with
in addition (to) not only ... but also what’s more 
indeed not to mention again
jointly not to speak of also
as well as at the same time  and (then)
besides
TIME RELATIONSHIP
nowadays thereupon currently 
presently until here
shortly (after) up until now immediately
simultaneously  while in the meantime 
since yet at the same time  lately
so far after a while later
soon afterward(s) meanwhile
temporarily as time goes by  now 
then at last at this point
thereafter at present throughout
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS 
first
second
third 
following 
then
next 
later
after that 
finally
EXPLANATION OF CAUSE OR CONSEQUENCE  
as
because
due to
for 
in order that 
now that
since 
so (that)
that is because 
that is why 
RESULT 
accordingly
as a consequence 
as a result
consequently 
for this reason 
hence
in short
so ... that
such ... that 
then
thereby
therefore 
thus
truly 
CIRCUMSTANCES 
as a last resort 
as a rule 
from the standpoint of  
in my opinion 
in terms of 
in the midst of  
on the part of 
PARTIAL COMMITMENT  
as far as I know 
as far as I’m concerned 
as far as I understand  
as well as I know 
for the time being 
so far  
CONDITION  
as long as
even if
if 
if not
in case of
in case (that)
in the event of 
in the event (that) 
only if
or (else)
otherwise 
provided (that)
providing (that)
whether or not 
DISMISSAL
anyway
at any rate  
in any case
whatever the case may be  
EXCEPTION / EXCLUSION  
aside from
except for 
not ... yet
unless 
EXAMPLE 
for example
for instance
in another case 
including
in particular
in this case
in this manner 
namely
such as
take the case of
that is 
the following example
to illustrate
PURPOSE
for this reason
for your information 
in an effort to 
in order to
in return for
to the purpose of  
to this end
with this in mind
with this purpose
SUBSTITUTION
in place of
instead of 
or rather 
in exchange for 
REITERATION / REFORMULATION
as I have said
in other words
more simply 
rather
that is
to put it another way 
INTERMEDIATING  
by
by means of 
in doing so
this way
through (which) 
CONCESSION
after all
although it is true that
although this may be true  
at the same time 
granted that
I admit 
it may appear that 
naturally
of course
EVIDENCE
as you (anyone) can see 
certainly
evidently 
indeed
naturally
needless to say 
obviously 
of course
without question
without a doubt
CAPÍTULO 8 – WORDS OF CONNECTION INGLÊS – EEAr
60
1. Check the alternative that completes the questions 1 to 10 correctly.
1) Anny has lived in Recife _________ she was nine.
a) since b) while
2) We were having breakfast _________ Edward arrived.
a) until b) when
3) I took care of Jennifer’s children _________ she was traveling.
a) before b) while
4) Isaac’s parents supported him _________ he found work.
a) until b) when
5) I called the police immediately _______ hearing the explosion.
a) after b) until
6) Neil hasn’t seen Amanda _________ they left school.
a) while b) since
7) Dinner was ready _________ Eric got home.
a) until b) before
8) We arrived at Ethan’s house _________ he was leaving.
a) as b) since
9) Nicole hasn’t been to a pub _________ her last birthday.
a) because b) since c) when
10) _________ Dean hadn’t studied for his test, he decided not 
to go to school.
a) As b) While
2. (Mackenzie 96) Indicate the alternative that best completes the 
following sentences:
I – Study harder; … you’ll fail.
II – I know nothing about it; … , I can’t help you.
III – The editors continue to publish, … irregularly, two journals.
IV – … being a good actor, he is also an excellent soccer player.
a) I – otherwise; II – thus; III – despite; IV – Besides
b) I – although; II – therefore; III – for; IV – And
c) I – so; II – so that; III – but; IV – Moreover
d) I – or else; II – consequently; III – besides; IV – Also
e) I – also; II – as a consequence; III – then; IV – In addition
3. (Uel 95) Assinale a alternativa que completa corretamente a sen-
tença abaixo:
… he is lazy, he makes a lot of money.
a) But b) Thus c) Dueto d) Unless e) Although
4. (Cesgranrio 95) The sentence Though overshoppers later expe-
rience considerable remorse, they find shopping exciting contains 
an idea of:
a) addition b) alternative c) cause d) condition e) contrast
5. (Fgv 95) Marque a alternativa que contém a palavra que preenche 
melhor a lacuna do texto a seguir:
The new economic order was supposed to bring rapid growth 
for the industrialized nations, as emerging capitalist countries 
joined a global free trade system _______ brutal competition 
from the Third World and the Soviet block has stalled the deve-
loped nations.
a) because b) instead
c) moreover d) therefore
e) while
6. (Mackenzie 96) Indicate the alternative that best completes the 
following sentence:
Yes, I know Mario quite well; … , I … to see him at the club last 
weekend.
a) furthermore – had b) thus – wanted 
c) in fact – happened d) whereas – waited 
e) despite – liked 
7. (Mackenzie 96) Indicate the alternative that best completes the 
following sentence:
He had a headache; … , he … the invitation. 
a) hence – declined b) then – dismissed 
c) otherwise – refused d) so – quit 
e) however – failed 
8. (Unirio 96) The word SO in So despite the extent to which lo-
neliness affects nearly everyone at various times, it presents a 
challenge to researchers expresses:
a) comparison. b) consequence.
c) purpose. d) contrast.
e) cause.
9. (Cesgranrio 90) Mark the word that can appropriately be used 
to fill the blank and expand the sentence Men not only cry less 
frequently, … they also do it somewhat differently.
a) yet b) but c) and d) although e) however
10. (Uel 97) Marque a alternativa correta:
I’d like to talk to him … he arrives.
a) while b) rather than c) since d) as soon as e) because
11. (Pucsp 98) No período The struggle to have a piece of land to work 
on for a decent living has produced rifes and conflicts between the 
landless peasants, ON ONE HAND, and the powerful landowners 
and the government, ON THE OTHER, as expressões on one hand 
e on the other indicam uma relação de:
a) alternância b) adição
c) oposição d) conseqüência
e) causalidade
12. (Mackenzie 96) Indicate the correct alternative to fill the blanks 
bellow:
… you know, Jack is a soldier, but he walks … a general.
a) How/ how b) As/ like 
c) As/ as d) Like/ as
e) How/ like 
CAPÍTULO 8 – WORDS OF CONNECTIONINGLÊS – EEAr
61
13. (Uel 01) Na egative Carr, HOWEVER, thought of a way to spot them, 
a palavra HOWEVER poderia ser substituída por:
a) nevertheless b) also 
c) since d) never 
e) but
14. (Uerj 01) A single conjunction may express multiple meanings. ln 
Short of trying to collect every book in existence, as a library does, 
the word AS conveys the idea of
a) cause b) comparison 
c) simultaneity d) contradiction
15. (Ufce 00) The sentence Yet their ambitions and their dreams are 
a mirror image of our own – and our response to them says a 
great deal about us as individuals, as a country is equivalent in 
meaning to 
a) In other words, their ambitions and their dreams are a mirror 
image of our own – and our response to them says a great deal 
about us as individuals, as a country. 
b) As a result, their ambitions and their dreams are a mirror image 
of our own – and our response to them says a great deal about 
us as individuals, as a country. 
c) In addition, their ambitions and their dreams are a mirror image 
of our own – and our response to them says a great deal about 
us as individuals, as a country. 
d) Similarly, their ambitions and their dreams are a mirror image 
of our own – and our response to them says a great deal about 
us as individuals, as a country. 
e) Still, their ambitions and their dreams are a mirror image of our 
own – and our response to them says a great deal about us as 
individuals, as a country.
16. (Uff 01) In the sentence In the meantime, Judge Robert Kaye will 
issue his final judgment on the jury’s verdict, IN THE MEANTIME 
could be replaced by:
a) during b) nevertheless 
c) actually d) meanwhile 
e) however
17. (Ufma 00) REGARDLESS OF WHAT in the sentence They are sick 
and need to be helped, regardless of what they believe can be 
replaced by: 
a) whether b) because of 
c) whatever d) in spite of 
e) so
Gabarito:
1. 1. a 2. b 3. b 4. a 5. a 6. b
7. b 8. a 9. b 10. a
2. a 3. e 4. e 5. a 6. c 7. a
8. b 9. b 10. d 11. C 12. B 13. A
14. B 15. A 16. D 17. C
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 9 – NOUNS INGLÊS – EEAr
62
Capítulo 9
NOUNS
Plural of Nouns
Normalmente recebem “s” porém, 
a) Substantivos terminados em S, SS, CH, SH, X, Z - “ES” 
b) Substantivos terminados em “CH” com som de K - “S” 
Epoch, Monarch, Patriarch, Conch, Stomach 
c) Substantivos terminados em “Y” após vogal - “S” 
d) Substantivos terminados em “Y” após cons. - “IES” (-Y) 
e) Substantivos terminados em “O” após vogal - “S” 
f) Substantivos terminados em “O” após cons. - “ES” 
 ⇒ Exceções - piano, photo, casino, solo, studio, kiio, radio,” 
- S” (Palavras de origem estrangeira) 
g) Alguns substantivos terminados em “F” ou ‘FE” perdem 
esta terminação e recebem “VES’ 
CALF calves (bezerro, panturrilha)
ELF elves (duende)
HALF halves (metade)
LEAF leaves (folha)
LIFE lives (vida)
KNIFE knives (faca)
LOAF loaves (pão)
SELF selves (ego)
SHEAF sheaves (feixe)
SHELF shelves (prateleira)
THIEF thieves (ladrão)
WIFE wives (esposa)
WOLF wolves (lobo)
Todos os outros “S”
h) Substantivos que podem formar o plural com S ou VES: 
DWARF (anão) - dwarfs - dwarves 
HOOF (casco, pata) - hoofs - hooves 
SCARF (cachecol) - scarfs - scarves 
WHARF (cais) - wharfs - wharves 
i) Plural Irregular:
SINGULAR PLURAL
MAN MEN
WOMAN WOMEN
CHILD CHILDREN
OX OXEN
FOOT FEET
GOOSE GEESE
TOOTH TEETH
MOUSE MICE
LOUSE DICE
j) Alguns substantivos não possuem plural em inglês, por-
tanto, o verbo que os acompanha é sempre usado no singular: 
Ex.: Furniture (mobília) / Information (informação) / Advice 
(conselho) / Knowledge (conhecimento) / Progress (progresso) 
/ Baggage/luggage (bagagem) 
THIS luggage IS very heavy. (Esta bagagem está muita pesada.)
Watch Out
“news”, politics, mathematics, physics, optics, embora 
pareçam estar no plural, são usadas com o verbo no singular. 
Ex.: The news is interesting (A notícia é interessante ou as 
notícias são interessantes) 
k) Alguns substantivos não possuem singular em inglês, 
portanto o verbo sempre fica no plural: 
Ex.: Scissors (tesoura) / Trousers (calças) / Pants (calças) / 
Pliers (alicate) / Shorts (calças curtas) / glasses ou spectacles 
(óculos) 
l) Alguns substantivos, embora pareçam estar no singular, 
têm sentido plural; portanto, o verbo que os acompanha é 
usado no plural: 
Ex.: Cattle (gado) / Gentry (classe educada) / Police (polícia) 
/ People (pessoas) 
Peoples (nações, povos) 
m) Alguns substantivos não mudam no plural 
Cod cod (bacalhau)
Sheep sheep (carneiro)
Deer deer (veado)
Salmon salmon (salmão)
Trout trout (truta)
Swine swine (suíno)
Fish - fish, fishes * * (Quando são vários tipos) 
n) Alguns substantivos de origem grega ou latina conser-
vam, geralmente, o plural de origem: 
Ex.: 
PHENOMENON PHENOMENA
CRITERION CRITERIA
AGENDUM AGENDA
DATUM DATA
MEMORANDUM MEMORANDA
BACTERIUM BACTERIA
HYPOTHESIS HYPOTHESES
CRISIS CRISES
THESIS THESES
BASIS BASES
AXIS (EIXO) AXES
OASIS OASES
DOGMA (DOUTRINA) DOGMAS OU DOGMATA
FORMULA FORMULAS OU (-LAE)
AMEBA AMEBAS OU AMEBAE
ALGA ALGAE
RADIUS RADII
STIMULUS STIMULI
FUNGUS FUNGI
o) os nomes dos povos terminados em “SS” e “SE” conservam 
a mesma forma tanto no singular como no plural:
Ex.: Japanese - Japanese (japoneses)CAPÍTULO 9 – NOUNSINGLÊS – EEAr
63
 Chinese - Chinese (chineses)
 Swiss - Swiss (suíços) 
p) O plural dos substantivos compostos forma-se plurali-
zando o elemento principal:
Ex.: Sister-in-law (cunhada) - sisters-in-law
 Father-in-law (sogro) - fathers-in-law
 Looker-on - lookers-on (espectador)
 baby-sitter - baby-sitters (babá)
 Passer-by - passers-by (transeunte)
mas...
Grown-up - grown-ups (adulto) / Fly-over - fly-overs 
(viaduto)
q) Há palavras que possuem a mesma forma tanto no sin-
gular quanto no plural.
species - espécie(S) / series - série(S) / means - meio(S)
Exemplos:
This species is in danger. / These species are in danger.
GENITIVE CASE
FRASE COM OF FRASE COM ‘ OU ‘S MOTIVO
1. The car of Paul Paul’s car Nomes próprios no singular
2. The food of the dog The dog’s food
Substantivo (animal) no 
singular
3. The crown of the 
princess
The princess’s crown
Substantivo no singular ter-
minado em S
4. The toys of the boys The boys’ toys
Substantivo plural termina-
do em S
5. The ruler of Louis
Louis’s ruler ou Louis’ 
ruler
Nome próprio sem impor-
tância histórica
6. The law of Moses Moses’ law
Nome clássico terminado 
em S
7. The books of the 
children
The children’s books
Substantivo plural NÃO ter-
minado em S
8. The tie of my father-
-in-law
My father-in-law’s tie
Substantivos compostos 
ganham o ‘S no último termo
9. The legs of Sam and 
Ann
Sam’s and Ann’s legs
Dois possuidores cada um 
com a sua própria coisa
10. The house of Tom 
and Ann
Tom and Ann’s house
Os dois possuidores para a 
mesma coisa
11. The leg of the table The table leg
não se faz o caso possessivo 
com coisas
E mais... 
a) Expressões de tempo, espaço medida e quantidade. 
Ex.: 
A week’s vacation (Férias de uma semana) 
A year’s absence (ausência de um ano) 
A hard day’s night (uma noite de um dia difícil) 
A pound’s weight (O peso de uma libra) 
OUTROS:
For god’s sake = For goodness’ sake (Pelo amor de Deus)
The sun’s rays (Os raios do sol)
The world’s population (A população do mundo.)
Brazil’s economy (A economia do Brasil.)
The city people (O povo da cidade.)
GÊNERO DOS SUBSTANTIVOS
O gênero do substantivo pode ser indicado de várias maneiras:
1º) Pela terminação “ESS”.
Masculino Feminino
actor (ator)
ambassador (embaixador)
duke (duque)
inheritor (herdeiro)
jew (judeu)
leopard (leopardo)
tiger (tigre)
host (anfitrião)
lion (leão)
manager (gerente)
Master (mestre, chefe)
Mister (senhor)
murderer (assassino)
negro (negro)
priest (sacerdote)
prince (príncipe)
shepherd (pastor)
traitor (traidor)
waiter (garçom)
heir (herdeiro)
god (Deus)
actrESS
ambassadrESS
duchESS
inheritrESS
JewESS
leopardESS
tigrESS
hostESS
lionESS
managerESS
mistrESS
MistrESS
murderESS
negrESS
priestESS
princESS
shepherdESS
traitrESS
waitrESS
heirESS
goddESS (deusa)
 ⇒ Outros Substantivos com Masculino e Feminino Mor-
fologicamente Relacionados
widower (viúvo)
hero (herói)
bridegroom (noivo)
male (macho)
widow (viúva)
heroine (heroína)
bride (noiva)
female (fêmea)
 ⇒ Substantivos com Masculino e Feminino Diferenciados
bachelor (solteiro)
gentleman (cavalheiro), lord 
(senhor)
king (rei)
monk (monge)
nephew (sobrinho)
husband (marido)
cock, rooster (galo)
drake (pato)
gander (ganso m.)
drone (zangão)
bull (touro)
ram, sheep (carneiro)
horse, stallion (garanhão)
dog (cachorro)
fox (raposa m.)
wizard (feiticeiro)
son (filho)
son-in-law (genro)
godfather (padrinho)
stepfather (padrasto)
stepson (enteado)
godson (afilhado)
spinster (solteira)
lady (senhora)
queen (rainha)
nun (freira)
niece (sobrinha)
wife (esposa)
hen (galinha)
duck (pata)
goose (ganso f.)
bee (abelha)
cow (vaca)
ewe (ovelha)
mare (égua)
bitch (cadela)
vixen (raposa f.)
witch (bruxa)
daughter (filha)
daughter-in-law (nora)
godmother (madrinha)
stepmother (madrasta)
stepdaughter (enteada)
goddaughter (afilhada)
CAPÍTULO 9 – NOUNS INGLÊS – EEAr
64
Substantivos Comuns
nurse = enfermeiro, a
person
friend
professor
teacher
student
writer = escritor, (a)
doctor
painter = pintor (a)
cousin = primo, a
fellow = camarada
surgeon = cirurgião
cook = cozinheiro(a)
speaker = orador(a)
neighbor = vizinho(a)
servant
dentist
flight attendant = comissário (a) de bordo
pianist
artist
guest = convidado, hóspede
foreigner = estrangeiro
judge = juiz
minister = ministro
EXERCÍCIOS
1 - Complete com a opção correta:
a) Go to the back yard and pick up all of ___________. (Alan´s 
toys / Alan´ toys) 
b) Do you happen to know my _______________ son? (brother-
-in-law’s / brother’s-in-law)
c) _______________ dog is very well-mannered.
 (Camila and Ana’s / Camila’s and Ana)
d) I examined ________________ grades. (Cláudio and Tom’s 
/ Cláudio’s and Tom’s)
2 - Passe para o caso genitivo (‘s):
a) Marilene is in the room of her parents. ___________________
b) This little cat is of Joana and Marisa. _____________________
3 - My little puppy doesn’t seem to like your ______ red handkerchief.
a) father’s-in-law b) father-in-law’s 
c) father-in-law ‘ d) father’-in-law 
e) father-in-law ‘
4 - Those dirty shoes are ______.
a) the children’ b) the childrens’ 
c) the children’s d) of the children’ 
e) of the children’s
5 - It will take us ______ to fix this machine.
a) a whole day’s work b) a whole’s day work 
c) a whole’ day work d) a whole’s work day 
e) a whole day work’s
6 - Unfortunately, the ______ ended up in the river.
a) lady’ hat b) lady hat’ 
c) ladies’s hat d) lady’s hat 
e) lady hats’
7 - How many ______ nests did you find?
a) birds’s b) bird’ 
c) birds’ d) of birds’s 
e) of the bird’
8 - Where have you put your ______?
a) mother purses’ b) mother purse’s 
c) mother’s purse’s d) mothers’ purse
e) mother’s purse
9 - Could anybody please tell me how to find out the ______?
a) author address’s b) authors’ address’s 
c) author’s address d) author address’
e) author’s addresses’
10 - ______ was wrong.
a) Socrates theory’s b) Socrates’ theory 
c) Socrates’s theory’s d) Socrates’s theory 
e) Socrates theories’s
11 - Preencha a lacuna correatamente: “Ben and Bill are brothers. Do 
you know ______?”
a) Ben and Bill’s parents b) Ben’s and Bill parents 
c) Ben’s and Bill’s parents d) Ben and Bill parents’ 
e) Ben and Bill parents’s
12 - Assinale a alternativa correta:
a) The children of my sisters’s-in-law are very intelligent.
b) My sister’s-in-law children’s are very intelligent.
c) My sister-in-law children’s are very intelligent
d) My sister-in-law’s children are very intelligent
e) The mine sister-in’s-law children are very intelligent
13 - Assinale a versão correta da seguinte frase: ”O comportamento de 
algumas crianças põe a paciência de um professor à prova.”
a) Some children’s behavior tries a teacher’s patience.
b) Some children’s behavior tries a teachers’s patience.
c) Some childrens’ behavior tries a teacher’ patience.
d) Some childrens’ behavior tries a teachers’ patience.
e) Some children’s behavior tries a teacher’ patience.
14 - Assinale a alternativa correta:
a) Scott’s exam were a first corrected.
b) Scott exam’s was first be corrected.
c) Scott’s was the first exam to be corrected.
d) Scott was a first exam being corrected.
e) Scott exam were the first one corrected.
15 - Como se diz em inglês: “A sala de estudos das garotas fica bem ao 
lado da dos rapazes.”?
a) The girls’ study hall is right next to the boys.
b) The girl’s study hall is right next to the boy’s.
c) The girls’ study hall is right next to the boy’s.
d) The girl’s study hall is right next to the boys’.
e) The girls’ study hall is right next to the boys’.
CAPÍTULO 9 – NOUNSINGLÊS – EEAr
65
16 - Quanto às frases:
I. Peter’s house is different from Wilson.II. The children’s uncles were present.
III. The girl’s dolls are expensive.
a) a I está errada b) a I e a III estão corretas
c) a I está correta d) todas estão corretas
e) todas estão erradas
17 - Escolha a alternativa correta:
a) Rosemary boyfriend’s is Marcia’s cousin.
b) The Rosemary’s boyfriend is Marcia’s cousin.
c) The Rosemary’s boy’sfriend is Marcia cousin.
d) Rosemary’s boyfriend is Marcia’s cousin.
e) Rosemary boyfriend’s is Marcia cousin.
18 - A: Did Albert give up smoking?
B: No, but he doesn’t buy cigarettes anymore. He now smokes 
other ______.
a) peoples’ b) people’s 
c) of people’s d) of peoples’ 
e) peoples’s
Gabarito:
1. a) Go to the back yard and pick up all of ALAN´S TOYS 
b) Do you happen to know my BROTHER-IN-LAW’S son?
c) CAMILA AND ANA’S dog is very well-mannered.
d) I examined CLÁUDIO’S AND TOM’S grades.
2. a) Marilene is in HER PARENTS’ ROOM.
b) This little cat is JOANA AND MARISA’S.
3. B 4. C 5. A 6. D 7. C 
8. E 9. C 10. B 11. A 12. D 
13. A 14. C 15. E 16. D 17. D
18. B
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 10 – INDEFINITE ARTICLES INGLÊS – EEAr
66
Capítulo 10
INDEFINITE ARTICLES
 ⇒ Só podem ser usados antes de substantivos SINGULA-
RES. Estará ERRADO dizer “We are a students.”
 ⇒ Usamos a forma “a” antes de sons consonantais, sejam 
os vocábulos iniciados por consoantes ou com as vogais 
eu, ew, u¸com som duplo e igual a iu (=como em “uni-
versity”)
Ex.: a car, a man, a young woman, a European city, a ewe, 
a university.
 ⇒ Usamos “an” antes de sons vocálicos com os vocábulos 
iniciados por vogais ou por “h” mudo - as quatro únicas 
palavras principais de “h” mudo em inglês são HONOR 
(honra), HOUR (hora), HEIR (herdeiro), HONEST (honesto):
Ex.: an orange, an egg, an island, an hour, an honest man, 
an heir.
 ⇒ Palavras iniciadas por “y” e “w” e também as compostas 
levam sempre “a”..
Ex.: A young man, a year, a yard, a wolf, a one-eyed man 
(“one” tem som de “w”)
 ⇒ Não se usa “a” nem “an” antes de substantivos incontáveis.
Ex.: water (não A water), air (não AN air), etc... Neste caso, 
use SOME.
 ⇒ Antes de nomes de profissões e qualificativos:
Ex.: She’s an actress. He’s a good boy.
 ⇒ Em algumas expressões numéricas:
half a dozen
} (meia dúzia)
a half dozen
 a hundred (uma centena = cem)
 a lot of (muito, muitos).
 ⇒ Em expressões de preço, velocidade, frequência:
 ten cents a kilo (dez centavos o quilo)
 ninety kilometers an hour (noventa quilômetros por hora)
 three times a day (três vezes por dia)
 ⇒ Em exclamações:
 What a night ! (Que noite)
 What a mess ! (Que confusão)
 It was such an awful day ! (Foi um dia tão terrível)
 ⇒ AN usado antes de letras que, quando pronunciadas, 
possuem som vocálico (F, H, L, M, N, R, S, X): AN FM 
station, AN x – ray.
EXERCÍCIOS
1 - Complete as frases com A ou AN:
a) I’ve been waiting for half ____ hour. What ____ nuisance.
b) It’s ____ pleasure and ____ honor to have you among my 
friends.
c) Now we’re living in ____ one-way street.
d) In English, Singapore begins with ____ S, not with ____ C.
e) Is your husband ____ Iraqi or ____ Iranian?
f) Give me ____ name beginning with ____ L and another ending 
with ____ R.
g) ____ eucalyptus tree is tall and it has ____ unique smell.
h) Mrs. Thompson is ____ doctor. She prescribed me ____ ex-
pensive medicine that I have to take four times ____ day for 
____ week.
i) She bought ____ used car from ____ old man. But he seemed 
____ honest man.
j) I will send ____ SOS call.
2 - Which of following items go with WHAT and which go with WHAT 
A (AN):
a) ___ mess! b) ___ horrible sight!
c) ___ wonderful news! d) ___ heavy luggage!
e) ___ stupid question! f) ___ ugly dress!
g) ___ elegant suit! h) ___ good idea!
3 - The old statue was ____ important monument that we wanted 
to preserve.
a) a b) an c) X d) any
4 - It’s ____ honor for us to welcome ____ European scientist like 
Dr. Lewis.
a) a / a b) an / an c) an / a d) a / an
5 - My grandfather used to say that ____ house is not ____ home.
a) an / a b) a / a c) an / an d) a / an
6 - On our way back home we bought ____ eggs and ____ ham.
a) a / a b) an / an c) X / a d) X / X
7 - We spent ____ thousand dollars on ____ single weekend.
a) X / a b) X / X c) a / a d) a / an
8 - ____ long time ago I had ____ few friends in México.
a) A / a b) X / X c) X / a d) An / an
9 - ____ atlas is ____ useful tool for everybody.
a) A / an b) X / a c) X / X d) An / a 
10 - He goes there …
a) once a year 
b) once the year 
c) once an year
CAPÍTULO 10 – INDEFINITE ARTICLESINGLÊS – EEAr
67
11 - I don’t like Peter at all. He’s…
a) a pain in a neck b) a pain in neck
c) a pain in the neck
12 - I’m sorry I can’t speak to you now. I’m …
a) in a hurry b) in the hurry
c) in hurry
13 - Is he …?
a) in danger b) in the danger
c) in a danger
14 - … he got there everybody had left.
a) By a time b) By time 
c) By the time
15 - Are you … with him?
a) in a love b) in love 
c) in the love
16 - When we got to the top of hill, we were all …
a) out of the breath b) out of a breath 
c) out of breath
17 - I met Charles Parker …
a) another day b) the other day 
c) other day
Gabarito:
1. a) AN / A b) A / AN c) A d) AN / A 
e) AN / AN f) A /AN / AN g) A / A 
h) A / AN / A / A i) A / AN / AN j) AN
2. a) A b) A c) A d) A e) A
f) AN g) AN h) A 
3. B 4. C 5. B 6. D 7. C 8. A
9. D 10. A 11. C 12. A 13. A 14. C
15. B 16. C 17. A
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 11 – THE – DEFINITE ARTICLE INGLÊS – EEAr
68
Capítulo 11
T H E - ARTIGO DEFINIDO
USOS
 ⇒ Antes de substantivos mencio nados anteriormente: I see 
a boy. The boy is swimming.
 ⇒ Antes de substantivos comuns no singular referindo-se a 
pessoas ou coisas específicas: The receptionist answered 
the phone. / The boys of our school
 ⇒ Antes de sobrenomes no plural referindo-se à família: The 
Johnsons met the president of France.
 ⇒ Antes de substantivo conside rado como único, ou quando 
particula rizado: The North Pole / The sea / The weather / 
The sun / The moon / The strongest / The only.
 ⇒ Antes de nomes de oceanos, mares, rios, montanhas 
(plural) e ilhas (plural): The Atlantic / The Hebrides / The 
Alps / The Mediterranean/The Thames.
 ⇒ Antes de instrumentos musicais: The piano / The guitar.
 ⇒ Antes de substantivo ou adjetivo que representa uma 
classe ou espé cie: The Old / The Young
 ⇒ Antes de países no plural ou que tenham as palavras 
UNION, UNITED or REPUBLIes no plural ou que tenham as 
palavras C: He lived in the United States, in the Philippines, 
in the Republic of Ireland and in the Netherlands.
 ⇒ Antes de nomes de idiomas seguidos pela palavra LAN-
GUAGE: The Korean language is very difficult for me.
 ⇒ Antes de nomes de ciências, matérias escolares, elemen-
tos químicos e refeições COM SENTIDO ESPECÍFICO:The 
chemistry that he teaches is the inorganic one./ The silver 
that comes from Peru is of good quality. / The breakfast 
that she prepared was delicious.
 ⇒ Antes de nomes da maioria dos edifícios e monumentos: 
The World Trade Center, The Kremlin and The Vatican are 
fantastic places.
 ⇒ Antes de períodos da História: The Stone and The Middle 
Ages were studied last year.
 ⇒ Antes de superlativo: This is the cheapest, the most inte-
resting and the best game.
 ⇒ Antes de nomes de jornais: The Washington Post is an 
excellent newspaper.
PROIBIÇÃO
 ⇒ Antes de nomes próprios no singular com ou sem título:
Sally met President Clinton.
 ⇒ Antes de substantivos usados em sentido geral: Children 
like chocolate. / Man is mortal.
 ⇒ Antes de possessivos: Our country, his car.
 ⇒ Antes de alguns substantivos, como CHURCH, SCHOOL, HOSPI-
TAL, BED, PRISON, quando usados para seupropósito geral !!!
She went:
- to church (to pray) / - to THE church 
(for some other reason)
- to school (to study) / - to THE school
(for some other reason)
- to hospital (as a pacient) / - to THE hospital (for some 
other reason).
 ⇒ Antes de nomes de montes, ilhas (singular), lagos, quedas 
dágua e praias:I went to Mount Rushmore, Victoria Lake, 
Iguaçu Falls and Miami Beach.
 ⇒ Antes de substantivos no PLURAL representando uma 
classe ou categoria: Teachers, actors, politicians and wri-
ters are involved in education.
 ⇒ Antes de cidades, estados, continentes e países no singu-
lar: She lives in Rio de Janeiro. / I went to Petrópolis last 
week. / Búzius in Brazil, in South América.
 ⇒ Antes de jogos, esportes, artes e idiomas: Soccer is my 
favorite sport. / Painting and chess are my hobbies./ 
Korean is more difficult than German.
 ⇒ Antes de nomes de ciências, matérias escolares, elemen-
tos químicos e refeições COM SENTIDO GENERALIZADO: 
Archeology is very interesting. / I have problems in che-
mistry, not in mathematics. / Gold and Silver are precious 
metals. / Hurry up! Lunch is ready.
 ⇒ Antes de nomes de edifícios que tenham as palavras 
HALL and PALACE: We visited Buckingham Palace and 
Carnegie Hall.
 ⇒ Antes de dias da semana, meses, anos, estações do ano 
e feriados: In 2009, Halloween will be on Sunday, and 
Christmas on Sturday, I guess.
 ⇒ Antes de adjetivos: She is beautiful./ This picture is small.
 ⇒ Antes de nomes de revistas: Time and National Geogra-
phic are interesting magazines.
EXERCÍCIOS
1 - Relacione as colunas abaixo, colocando o artigo “the” onde for 
necessário:
1. Last month we visited ...
2. He was ____ first man ...
3. ____ White House is ...
4. Can you bring me ...
5. Are those ____ women ...
6. ____ married women also ...
7. He bought ____ house ...
8. ____ detective found ...
9. She was ____ only girl ...
10. Please take ____ umbrella ...
( ) next to ____park.
( ) who came from ____ Peru?
( ) with ____ you.
( ) in ____ Washington, DC.
( ) ____ Eiffel Tower.
( ) ____ my pen right now?
( ) to cross ____ Atlantic.
( ) that knew ____ your son.
( ) defend ____ women’s rights.
( ) ____ right evidence.
2 - Assinale, nas frases abaixo, o artigo “THE” que tiver sido utilizado 
de forma INCORRETA:
1. Elaine will visit us on the Christmas.
CAPÍTULO 11 – THE – DEFINITE ARTICLEINGLÊS – EEAr
69
2. The United Kingdom is a wonderful country.
3. The women’s volleyball team was very good.
4. How can we refer to the 1990-1999?
5. The milk is good for the our health.
6. The moon goes round the earth every 27 days.
7. The honey is good for the our health.
8. He is the nicest person I know.
9. Where are the restrooms, please?
10. Vitor went to the movies, but we went to the theater.
11. What do you have for the breakfast?
12. The Britsh and the French have their own habits.
3 - Choose the correct answer: One of ____ most important causes 
of ____ conflict is ____ way people see ____ sides of a question.
a) the / the / X / X b) the / X / the / the
c) the / X / X / X d) X / the / X / the
4 - Choose the correct answer: I’m sure that ____ men and ____ 
women will always fight for ____ their rights.
a) X / X / the b) the / X / the 
c) the / the / the d) X / X / X
5 - Choose the correct answer: An excellent contribution for ____ 
mankind is that man stop destroying ____ Nature.
a) a/ the b) the / X 
c) the / the d) X / X
6 - Choose the correct answer: ____ city guide we bought in ____ 
London was such a useful thing that we had no problems finding 
our way there.
a) The / X b) The / the c) X / X d) X / the
7 - ____ science and ____ religion are often incompatible.
a) The / the b) X / the c) X / X d) The / X
8 - ____ My grandfather usually went to ____ hospital to visit me.
a) X / the b) X / X c) The / X d) The / the
9 - ____ coffee, ____ tea, ____ sugar and ____ salt are national 
exports.
a) The / the / the / the b) The / X / the / X
c) X / X / X / X d) The / X / X / the
10 - We should help ____ poor and ____ homeless.
a) the / the b) X / X c) the / X d) X / the
11 - Insert A, AN or THE if necessary:
a) Do you take _____ sugar in _____ coffee?
b) Mr. Fuller is _____ old doctor and _____ honest man.
c) I have _____ hour for _____ lunch.
d) He broke _____ leg in _____ accident.
e) _____ youngest boy in _____ my class is _____ her brother.
f) _____ cats can see in _____ dark.
g) _____ he went to _____ prison for _____ year.
h) _____ Browns are going to cross _____ Atlantic by plane.
i) I am going to _____ prison to visit him.
j) _____ Karen goes to _____ school in _____ morning and to 
_____ church in _____ afternoon.
12 - Choose the correct answer:____ manager of that company is 
____ honest man.
a) An / a b) An / the c) A / a d) The / an
13 - Choose the correct answer: ____ smile is worth ____ hundred 
words.
a) The / a b) X / X c) A / a d) A / the
14 - Choose the correct answer: The picture was so valuable that 
guards watched it for twenty-four hours ____ day.
a) the b) a c) an d) X
15 - Choose the correct answer: ____ Mary’s brother doesn’t play ____ 
soccer but he plays ____ guitar and ____ drums.
a) The / the / the / X b) X / X / X / the
c) X / X / the / the d) The / X / X / the
16 - Choose the correct answer: From midnight tonight ____ price of 
____ petrol will have ____ rise. ____ rise is caused by the present 
high price of ____ oil in the Middle East.
a) X / X / a / The / a b) the / X / a / The / X
c) the / the / a / The / X d) X / the / the / A / X
17 - ____ coffee is the national drink of ____ Brazil. ____ Coca-Cola 
is the national drink of ____ United States.
a) The / the / X / X b) X / X / X / the
c) X / X / X / X d) The / the / The / the
18 - Choose the WRONG answer: 
a) a year b) an answer
c) an university d) a ewe
19 - Complete the following sentences with the proper article. 
a) _______ chair on which you are sitting is not conformable.
b) There is _______ pencil (no particular pencil) on the desk. 
c) There is _______ customer (no particular customer) outside 
who wishes to see Mr. Smith. 
d) _______ customer whom Mr. Smith telephoned this morning 
is here now. 
e) I want to find _______ good book (no particular book) to 
read tonight. 
f) _______ book which I am reading now belongs to John. 
g) _______ book which gave me the greatest pleasure was “Les 
Miserabies.” 
CAPÍTULO 11 – THE – DEFINITE ARTICLE INGLÊS – EEAr
70
h) _______ good book (any good book) is always a pleasure 
for me. 
i) Have you _______ cigarette? (no particular cigarette) 
j) _______ cigarette which John is smoking has a strange odor. 
k) I must buy _______ new briefcase. (At this point I have no 
particular briefcase in mind.) 
l) _______ new briefcase which I bought yesterday is made of 
leather. (It is now a definite briefcase.) 
m) John bought _______ new hat yesterday in Macy’s. (As yet 
no definite hat.) 
n) _______ hat which John bought in Macy’s yesterday (now a 
definite hat) arrived this afternoon. 
o) I also bought _______ new hat in Macy’s yesterday. (Though 
perhaps a definite hat to me, it is still not a definite hat to my 
listener.)
Gabarito:
1. (7) THE / THE (5) X / X (10) THE / X (3) THE / X (1) THE (4) x 
(2) THE / THE (9) THE / X (6) X / X (8) THE / THE
2. 1. THE (errado)
3. THE (pode ser evitado)
4. THE (errado)
5. THE e THE (errado)
7. THE e THE (errado)
11. THE (errado)
3. B 4. D 5. D 6. A 7. C 
8. A 9. C 10. A
11. a) X / X b) AN / AN c) AN / X
d) A / THE e) THE / X / X f) X / THE
g) X / X/ A h) THE / THE i) THE
j) X / X / THE / X / THE
12. D 13. C 14. B 15. C 16. B
17. B 18. C
19. a) the b) a c) a d) the e) a
f) the g) the h) a i) a j) the
k) a l) the m) a n)the o) a
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 12 – QUANTIFIER ADVERBSINGLÊS – EEAr
71
Capítulo 12
QUANTIFIERS (QUANTITATIVOS)
MUCH (muito-singular) X MANY (muitos -plural)
Nós usamos MUCH com substantivos no SINGULAR. Estes 
substantivos normalmente não possuem plural: much sugar / 
much rain / much coffee...
 ⇒ Singular Nouns: (PALAVRAS QUE NORMALMENTE 
APARECEM NO SINGULAR !!)
mist (névoa) fog (névoa)
mud (lama) cheese (queijo)
ham (presunto) sugar (açucar)
salt (sal) time (tempo)
beer (cerveja) wine (vinho)
water (água) oil (óleo)
tea (chá) jam (geléia)
honey (mel) coffee(café)
milk (leite) air (ar)
blood (sangue) wool (lã)
wood (madeira) wheat (trigo)
flour (farinha) bread (pão)
hair (cabelo) food (comida)
snow (neve) butter (manteiga)
work (trabalho) money (dinheiro)
dust (pó) gasoline (gasolina)
alcohol (álcool) love (amor)
ink(tinta) wax (cêra)
glue (cola) sand (areia)
dew (orvalho) drizzle (garoa)
noise (barulho)
Nós usamos MANY com os substantivos no PLURAL: many 
books / many students / many houses...
 ⇒ Sinônimos de much e many:
Much = a lot of, lots of, plenty of, a great / a good deal of
Many = a lot of, lots of, plenty of, a (large) number of
 ⇒ Formas Enfáticas:
Much = very much / too much (demais - sing.)
Many = very many / too many (demais - plur.)
HOW MUCH X HOW MANY
Nós usamos estas expressões em construções interrogati-
vas: How many houses do they have? / How much sugar do 
you want in your tea?
A LOT OF
Esta expressão é equivalente a MANY ou MUCH: Mark has 
a lot of dogs and cats in his house. / I need a lot of help with 
this terrible homework.
Resumos dos “Quantitative Adverbs”:
SINGULAR
(or UNCOUNTABLE)
PLURAL
(or COUNTABLE)
MUCH = muito, muita
LITTLE=pouco, pouca
A LITTLE = algum, alguma
SO MUCH=tanto, tanta
TOO MUCH = demais
HOW MUCH = quanto (a)
MANY = muitos, muitas
FEW = poucos, poucas
A FEW=alguns, algumas
SO MANY=tantos, tantas
TOO MANY = demais
HOW MANY = quantos (as)
A FEW / FEW (ALGUNS/ POUCOS # MANY) / A 
LITTLE / LITTLE (ALGUM / POUCO # MUCH)
Usamos A FEW (alguns) e FEW (poucos) para substantivos 
no PLURAL e A LITTLE (algum) e LITTLE (pouco) para substan-
tivos no SINGULAR: I only have a few books about Geography. 
/ Yesterday I drank much coffee.
 ⇒ Formas Enfáticas:
Few = very few / too few
Little = very little / too little
EXERCÍCIOS
1 - Fill In The Blanks With Much or Many:
a) There is __________ food in the kitchen.
b) There are __________ pictures in the hall. 
c)There are __________ carpets in that house. 
d) How _______ money do you have?
e) How ________ rooms are there in this house?
2 - Complete the following sentences with Much or Many:
a) There aren’t __________ large factories in this town.
b) He doesn’t spend __________ time on his English.
c) Is there __________ oil in Venezuela?
d) Do you have ________ farms in Australia?
e) How _________ time do you spend studying?
f) How __________ windows are there in your classroom?
g) How __________ times a week do you go to the movies?
h) How __________ money do you spend on books?
i) There isn’t __________ snow on the ground.
j) I don’t like to drink __________ coffee.
l) How __________ cups of tea do I drink everyday?
m) There aren’t __________ students absent today.
CAPÍTULO 12 – QUANTIFIER ADVERBS INGLÊS – EEAr
72
3 - Complete as sentenças com Few or Little:
1. ______ students knew how to do the exercise.
2. Some years ago all those patients had ______ chances to 
survive.
3. The train leaves in 10 minutes! Hurry up! You have ______ time!
4. I live in a ______ house not far from here.
5. They started getting rich ______ by ______.
4 - Complete com a few or a little:
1. The bottle of wine was almost empty. There was just ______.
2. The airport was almost empty. Just ______ people were there.
3. I have ______ good reasons to doubt him.
4. Please, have ______ patience with her. Don’t you think you are 
being ______ rude?
5. After drinking ______ glasses of beer he felt ______ dizzy.
5 - What’s the best alternative for: “I have a _____ friends”?
a) ten b) few c) some d) many
6 - Some people like to take _____ sugar with tea.
a) lot of b) few c) a lot of d) many
7 - Would you like some candy? There’s _____ more of it.
a) plenty b) enough c) many d) many a
8 - He seems to have _____ money but he lives as a needy man.
a) many b) a great deal of 
c) few d) a lot
9 - I like watching this program because it’s got _____ advertising 
and _____ interruptions.
a) a few / little b) quite a few / a little
c) few / a few d) little / few
10 - She eats _____ bread and drinks _____ coffee but _____ people 
prefer _____ dangerous calories.
a) many / much / few / much
b) much / many / much / little
c) much / little / many / few
d) little / much / much / few
11 - Substitua os termos sublinhados por much ou many:
a) There were a lot of coins on the table. (___________)
b) They got lots of medals during the game. (__________)
c) He gave me plenty of advice about marriage. (__________)
d) She showed us a great deal of her knowledge. (__________)
e) They know plenty of people. (__________)
12 - (U. Mackenzie-SP) “Mary had _____ work to do: _____ dishes to 
wash, _____ clothes to iron, _____ pairs of pie to cook, but just 
_____ time to do it all.”
a) much / many / a few / a little / much
b) few / much / a few / many / many
c) a little / little / few / a few / much
d) much / many / many / many / little
13 - (F. Sto. André-SP) Pollution is a serious problem. There are _____ 
trees and ______ fresh air nowadays.
a) lots / few b) much / less
c) many / fewer d) fewer / less
14 - (ESAL-MG) Yesterday I bought too _____ milk.
a) much b) few c) many d) a lot of
15 - Qual a alterantiva ERRADA?
a) There is a lot of coffee in Brazil
b) There are many people in China.
c) There is plenty of water in the ocean.
d) There is a large number of wine in Europe.
16 - I speak a few words of English. I don’t know _____.
a) many b) much c) too d) a little
17 - Put into English:” Você chegou muito tarde yesterday.”
a) You arrived many late yesterday.
b) You arrived much late yesterday.
c) You arrived very late yesterday.
d) You arrived a lot of late yesterday.
18 - She’s _____ weak to lift _____ stones.
a) very / much b) many / less 
c) much / more d) too / more
Gabarito:
1. a) There is MUCH food in the kitchen. 
b) There are MANY pictures in the hall.
c)There are MANY carpets in that house. 
d) How MUCH money do you have? 
e) How MANY rooms are there in this house?
2. a) There aren’t MANY large factories in this town.
b) He doesn’t spend MUCH time on his English.
c) Is there MUCH oil in Venezuela?
d) Do you have MANY farms in Australia?
e) How MUCH time do you spend studying?
f) How MANY windows are there in your classroom?
g) How MANY times a week do you go to the movies?
h) How MUCH money do you spend on books?
i) There isn’t MUCH snow on the ground.
j) I don’t like to drink MUCH coffee.
CAPÍTULO 12 – QUANTIFIER ADVERBSINGLÊS – EEAr
73
l) How MANY cups of tea do I drink everyday?
m) There aren’t MANY students absent today.
3. 1. FEW students knew how to do the exercise.
2. Some years ago all those patients had FEW chances 
to survive.
3. The train leaves in 10 minutes! Hurry up! You have 
LITTLE time!
4. I live in a LITTLE house not far from here.
5. They started getting rich LITTLE by LITTLE.
4. 1. The bottle of wine was almost empty. There was just 
A LITTLE.
2. The airport was almost empty. Just A FEW people 
were there.
3. I have A FEW good reasons to doubt him.
4. Please, have A LITTLE patience with her. Don’t you think 
you are being A LITTLE rude?
5. After drinking A FEW glasses of beer he felt A LITTLE 
dizzy.
5. B 6. C 7. A 8. B 
9. D 10. C
11. a) There were a lotof coins on the table. MANY
b) They got lots of medals during the game. MANY
c) He gave me plenty of advice about marriage. MUCH
d) She showed us a great deal of her knowledge. MUCH
e) They know plenty of people. (MANY)
12. D 13. D 14. A 15. D
16. A 17. C 18. D
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 13 – INDEFINITE PRONOUNS INGLÊS – EEAr
74
Capítulo 13
PRONOMES INDEFINIDOS
A) SOME + substantivo
Algum(a), alguns, algumas,um pouco
 ⇒ Em orações afirmativas
 ⇒ Em perguntas, quando se espera ou deseja resposta 
afirmativa (ofertas e pedidos)
- SOMEBODY / SOMEONE= alguém
- SOMETHING = algo, alguma coisa
- SOMEWHERE = algum lugar
B) ANY + substantivo
Interrogativo = Algum (a), alguns, algumas
Negativo = Nenhum (a)
Afirmativo = Qualquer, quaisquer
 ⇒ Em perguntas gerais
 ⇒ Em orações negativas (verbo com NOT) ou com never, 
without...
 ⇒ Em frases afirmativas.
- ANYBODY / ANYONE = alguém / ninguém / qualquer um
- ANYTHING = algo / nada / qualquer coisa
- ANYWHERE = algum lugar / nenhum lugar / qualquer 
lugar
C) NO + substantivo = Nenhum (a)
 ⇒ Em orações de sentido negativo, mas com verbo SEM NOT. 
No vem sempre antes do substantivo.
- NOBODY / NO ONE = ninguém
- NOTHING = nada
- NOWHERE = nenhum lugar
D) NONE (SEM SUBSTANTIVO) = Nenhum (a)
 ⇒ Em orações de sentido negativo, com verbo SEM NOT. 
None vem em substituição a no + substantivo
- Antes de OF
(NONE OF = nenhum de)
E) EVERY + substantivo no singular = Cada / todo
 ⇒ Todas as formas: afirmativa / negativa / interrogativa
- EVERYBODY / EVERYONE = todos / todo o mundo
- EVERYTHING = tudo
- EVERYWHERE = todo lugar / todos os lugares
 ⇒ OS DERIVADOS DE SOME, ANY ... FUNCIONAM COMO PRO-
NOMES, OU SEJA, NÃO SÃO SEGUIDOS DE SUBSTANTIVO. 
PODEM SER SEGUIDOS DE QUALQUER OUTRA CLASSE 
GRAMATICAL, MENOS SUBSTANTIVO !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Ex.: SOMEBODY shouted !! = Alguém gritou !! (observar 
que depois de SOMEBODY foi colocado um verbo, NÃO 
um substantivo !!)
F) SOME + QUANTIDADE = APROXIMADAMENTE
Ex.: SOME 40 people are here = Aproximadamente 40 
pessoas estão aqui.
EXERCÍCIOS
1 - Change the following sentences from affirmative to negative form:
a) There are some extra chairs in the next room.
b) We see some good shows in New York.
c) She has some pretty dresses in that store.
d) The teacher teaches us some rules of grammar.
e) Isabel learns something in class everyday.
f) There is someone behind the door !
g) Give me some coffee.
h) She needs something or somebody everyday.
2 - Complete the following sentences with some or any:
a) I don’t have __________ money with me.
b) I’m sorry, but there isn’t __________ more coffee !
c) We have __________ fruits at the breakfast.
d) She never gives the poor dog __________ water to drink.
e) There are __________ famous museums in Washington.
f) I don’t have __________ stamps, so I have to go to the post 
office now.
g) I never have __________ trouble with my car.
h) Please, put _________ water in the vase; the flowers are dying.
i) The teacher doesn’t find __________ mistakes in our tests.
j) She wants a cigarette, but nobody has __________
k) The doctor always gives me ________ medicine for my cough.
3 - Complete com a opção correta:
1. There’s __________ at the door. (someone / some)
2. ________ people will arrive here tomorrow. (Some / Someone)
3. Would you lilke to see __________ parts of my stamp collec-
tion? (somewhere / some)
4. She looks hungry. She should eat _______. (some / something)
5. Could you please give me __________ information? (some 
/ something)
4 - Go away now and come back _____ other day.
a) some b) something
c) anything d) nothing
5 - There were _____ thirty-five applicants to the job.
a) somebody b) anybody 
c) some d) sometime
CAPÍTULO 13 – INDEFINITE PRONOUNSINGLÊS – EEAr
75
6 - _____ had followed Isabella’s steps.
a) Some b) Anything
c) Somewhere d) Nobody
7 - His house is _____ across Park Avenue. 
a) something b) No
c) Any d) somewhere
8 - _____ had secretly copied his private files from the computer.
a) Everything b) somebody 
c) anything d) someway
9 - _____ must be stamped on his mind: he is so odd today!
a) Something b) Some
c) Somebody d) Somewhere
10 - _____ wanted to ask me a question.
a) Some b) Everybody 
c) Nowhere d) Any
G) EVERY x ALL
 ⇒ Every / everybody / everyone / everything estão no 
singular, então temos que usar um VERBO NA TERCEIRA 
PESSOA DO SINGULAR:
Every seat in the theater WAS taken.
Everybody STUDIES very much here.
 ⇒ ALL (tudo) com signif icado de EVERYBODY / 
EVERYTHING : Everybody enjoyed the party.
Mas observe que nós dizemos: all of us (todos nós) all of 
you (todos vocês) / all of them (todos eles) e não: “everybody 
of us ...”. 
Ex: All of us enjoyed the party (não “everybody of us”)
 Marque a alternativa que completa corretamente os espaços em 
branco nas questões de 11 a 18:
11. ______ seems to be in order.
a) Every b) Everything c) Some d) All of them
12. Those organisms pose ______ danger human life.
a) any b) none c) no d) nothing
13. He wanted to verify ______ product separatedly.
a) everything b) all of it c) every d) anything
14. I never have ______ problem with my old car.
a) any b) some c) a lot d) many
15. I’ve looked for your pen ______ but I couldn’t find it ______.
a) somewhere / nowhere b) everything / nowhere
c) anywhere / somewhere d) everywhere / anywhere
16. Everybody ______ to be succeded.
a) want b) wants c) wantes d) to want
17. The problem was often discussed but ______ solution was 
ever found.
a) no b) none c) any d) some
18. “Percebi algo movendo-se no escuro, mas, quando acendi a luz, não 
vi nada lá. Tudo estava no mesmo lugar.” Em inglês, o correto é:
“I noticed ______ moving in the dark but when I turned on 
the light I didn’t see ______ there. ______ was in its place.”
a) nothing / something / Anything
b) anything / nothing / Something
c) something/ nothing/ Anything
d) something / anything / Everything
Gabarito:
1. a) There are some extra chairs in the next room.
 There AREN’T ANY extra ... OR
 There are NO extra ...
b) We see some good shows in New York.
 We DON’T see ANY good shows ... OU
 we see NO good shows ...
c) She has some pretty dresses in that store.
 She DOESN’T have ANY pretty dresses ... OU
 She has NO pretty dresses ...
d) The teacher teaches us some rules of grammar.
 The teacher DOESN’T teach ANY rules ... OU
 The teacher teaches NO rules ...
e) Isabel learns something in class everyday.
 Isabel DOESN’T learn ANYTHING ... OU
 Isabel learns NOTHING ...
f) There is someone behind the door !
 There ISN’T ANYONE ... OU
 There is NO ONE ...
g) Give me some coffee.
 DON’T give me ANY coffee. OU
 Give me NO coffee.
h) She needs something or somebody everyday.
 She DOESN’T need ANYTHING or ANYBODY ... OU
 She needs NOTHING or NOBODY ...
2. a) I don’t have ANYmoney with me.
b) I’m sorry, but there isn’t ANY more coffee !
c) We have SOME fruits at the breakfast.
d) She never gives the poor dog SOME water to drink.
e) There are SOME famous museums in Washington.
f) I don’t have ANY stamps, so I have to go to the post 
office now.
g) I never have ANY trouble with my car.
h) Please, put SOME water in the vase; the flowers are dying.
i) The teacher doesn’t find ANY mistakes in our tests.
j) She wants a cigarette, but nobody has ANY.
k) The doctor always gives me SOME medicine for my cough.
3. 1. someone 2. some 3. some 4. something 5. some
4. some 5. some 6. nobody 7. somewhere
8. somebody 9. something 10. everybody
11. B 12. C 13. C 14. A 15. D
16. B 17. A 18. D
CAPÍTULO 14 – RELATIVE PRONOUNS INGLÊS – EEAr
76
Capítulo 14
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
WHO
WHOM
WHICH
THAT
} QUE, O QUAL, OS QUAIS, AS QUAIS
WHOSE } CUJO (S), CUJA(S)
Sintaxe para a Utilização dos Pronomes Relativos dentro de 
uma oração do tipo ADJETIVA:
USADO ANTES DE:
Pessoas } WHO } Verbo / Pron. / 
Substantivo
Pessoas } WHOM } Pron. / Nome
Animais / Coisas } WHICH } Verbo / Pron. / 
Substantivo
Pessoas / 
Animais / Coisas
} WHOSE } Substantivo (POSSE)
 PROIBIDO 
Pessoas / 
Animais / 
Coisas
}
THAT
= which
= who
= whom
}
a) após preposições;
b) após / entre vírgulas.
Pessoas / 
Animais / 
Coisas
}
Ø
= which
= who
= whom
= that
}
 OMISSÃO Proibida:
a) após preposições;
b) após / entre vírgulas.
c) Ø + verbo
The man who/that came here is my brother.
(Pessoa) (Verbo)
The box which/that came by mail is broken.
(Coisa) (Verbo)
The man whom/who/that/Ø YOU brought is my brother.
(Pessoa) (Pronome)
Neste caso, whom é igual a who, that ou omissão (Ø) – isto 
sempre acontecerá quando a frase que vem após o pronome 
é iniciada por um sujeito (um pronome ou um nome) (1). Mas, 
SE HOUVER PREPOSIÇÃO, como no exemplo abaixo, só WHOM 
poderá ser usado.
The man to WHOM you gave the money is here.
The box WHICH you brought is broken.
(Coisa) (Pronome)
Neste caso, WHICH é igual a that ou omissão (Ø), conforme 
explicado em (1).
1 - Fill in the blanks with WHO, WHOM, WHICH or WHOSE. Some blanks 
may accept more than a correct answer !!!
a) The boy _____ is with him is his son.
b) The chairs _____ arrived are not the right ones.
c) Is this the book _____ you need?
d) The book _____ owner is my father I read last night.
e) She is the girl _____ / _____ I saw at the party last night.
f) This the kind of exercise _____ I like best.
g) Both trips _____ we took to Mexico were interesting.
h) The girls _____ are in my English are all good students.
i) The teacher _____ / _____ I like best is Miss Smith.
j) Our teacher, _____ is an American , naturally speaks English 
perfectly.
k) It was George _____ telephoned you.
l) The movie _____ we saw last night was not good.
m) He is the salesman _____ sold me the merchandise.
n) Was it Helen _____ said that?
o) The horse _____ colors are brown and white is Gama’s.
p) The classroom _____ students will be military people a day 
is the second one !
q) Is that lamp _____ you broke?
r) The teacher with _____ I studied English last year no longer 
teaches in our school.
s) The car _____ John used belongs to his uncle.
2 - Complete the sentences below using a RELATIVE CLAUSE with 
THAT. When its use IS NOT NECESSARY, use (Ø) !!
Examples:
A man answered the phone. 
The man that answered the phone is my father.
I left some money on the table. It isn’t there anymore.
The money (Ø) I left on the table isn’t there anymore.
a) A book was on my desk.
The book _______________ is John’s.
b) A girl was in the garden.
The girl _____________ is my daughter.
c) A girl met me in the hall. She is Jane’s daughter.
The girl _____________ is Jane’s daughter.
d) Meg bought a dress yesterday. It fits her very well.
The dress _____________ fits her very well.
e) Anne met a handsome man this morning. He is our teacher.
The handsome man _____________ is our History teacher.
f) A bus goes to the railway station. It runs every half hour.
The bus _____________ runs every half hour.
g) Some people live in that house.
I know the people _______________.
h) A cat was on the sofa.
The cat _______________ is Jenny’s.
i) A waitress served us. She was very polite.
The waitress _______________ was very polite.
3 - Repeat questions a to i above, but this time using only WHICH 
or WHO.
4 - Choose the correct relative pronoun in parentheses and write it 
down to complete the sentences.
a) My sister, _____ you met yesterday, wants to speak to you. 
(which / whom / that)
CAPÍTULO 14 – RELATIVE PRONOUNSINGLÊS – EEAr
77
b) I had to travel first class, _____ was very expensive. (who / 
whose / which)
c) This is Arthur, _____ house we stayed in for our holidays. 
(whom / who / whose)
d) I met Virginia’s mother, _____ works at the university. (whose 
/ who / which)
e) George was late again, _____ displeased everybody. (who / 
which / whose)
f) Beethoven, _____ music I love, was a German composer. 
(whose/which/whom)
g) Shakespeare, _____ is a great dramatist, died in the 17th century. 
(which / whose / who)
h) This is my only brother, _____ is living in Canada now. (which 
/ whose / who)
Gabarito:
1. a) The boy WHO is with him is his son.
b) The chairs WHICH arrived are not the right ones.
c) Is this the book WHICH you need?
d) The book WHOSE owner is my father I read last night.
e) She is the girl WHO / WHOM I saw at the party last night.
f) This the kind of exercise WHICH I like best.
g) Both trips WHICH we took to Mexico were interesting.
h) The girls WHO are in my English are all good students.
i) The teacher WHO / WHOM I like best is Miss Smith.
j) Our teacher, WHO is an American , naturally speaks 
English perfectly.
k) It was George WHO telephoned you.
l) The movie WHICH we saw last night was not good.
m) He is the salesman WHO sold me the merchandise.
n) Was it Helen WHO said that?
o) The horse WHOSE colors are brown and white is Gama’s.
p) The classroom WHOSE students will be military people 
a day is the second one !
q) Is that lamp WHICH you broke?
r) The teacher with WHOM I studied English last year no 
longer teaches in our school.
s) The car WHICH John used belongs to his uncle.
2.a) A book was on my desk.
The book that was on my desk is John’s.
b) A girl was in the garden.
The girl taht was in the garden is my daughter.
c) A girl met me in the hall. She is Jane’s daughter.
The girl that met me in the hall is Jane’s daughter.
d) Meg bought a dress yesterday. It fits her very well.
The dress (Ø) Meg bought yesterday fits her very well.
e) Anne met a handsome man this morning. He is our 
teacher.
The handsome man (Ø) Anne met this morning is our 
History teacher.
f) A bus goes to the railway station. It runs every half hour.
The bus that goes to the railway station runs every 
half hour.
g) Some people live in that house.
I know the people that live in that house.
h) A cat was on the sofa.
The cat that was on the sofa is Jenny’s.
i) A waitress served us. She was very polite.
The waitress that served us was very polite.
3. RESOLUÇÃO: É SÓ USAR:
WHICH = ANTECEDENTE = ANIMAIS / OBJETOS
WHO = ANTECEDENTE = PESSOAS
4. Choose the correct relative pronoun in parentheses and 
write it down to complete the sentences.
a) My sister, whom you met yesterday, wants to speak to 
you. (which / whom / that)
b) I had to travel first class, which was very expensive. 
(who / whose / which)
c) This is Arthur, whose house we stayed in for our holi-
days. (whom / who / whose)
d) I met Virginia’s mother, who works at the university. 
(whose / who / which)
e) George was late again, which displeased everybody. 
(who / which / whose)
f) Beethoven, whose music I love, was a German compo-
ser. (whose / which / whom)
g) Shakespeare, who is a great dramatist, died in the 17th 
century. (which / whose / who)
h) This is my only brother, who is living in Canada now. 
(which / whose / who)
 ⇒ Caro aluno, lembre-se de que QUALQUER ORAÇÃO 
ADJETIVA RESTRITIVA (sem vírgulas) OU ADJETIVA 
EXPLICATIVA (com vírgula) É INTRODUZIDA POR UM 
PRONOME RELATIVO
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 15 – COMPARATIVES OF SUPERIORITY INGLÊS – EEAr
78
Capítulo 15
COMPARISON OF SUPERIORITY FOR SHORT 
ADJECTIVES (TIPO 1)
Nós adicionamos –ER aos adjetivos com uma só sílaba:
cold - colder / tall - taller / short - shorter / fast - faster / 
long - longer / mild - milder
Quando temos adjetivos terminsdos em “y”, mudamos para 
"i" antes de acrescentarmos -ER :
shy - shier / dry - drier 
Adjetivos terminados por uma consoante precedidos por 
uma única vogal DOBRAM ESTA CONSOANTE:
fat - fatter/ hot - hotter / thin - thinner
Comparativos irregulares:
good - well = better bad - badly = worse 
far - further =farther many - much = more
THAN é usado quando duas ou mais coisas estão sendo 
comparadas:
I am younger THAN you. / Mark is stronger THAN John.
Adjetivos de duas sílabas terminados em y, ly, ow, e, le e 
er levam final -ER:
happy - happier / friendly - friendlier / able - abler / funny 
- funnier / shallow - shallower / gentle - gentler / early - 
earlier / narrow - narrower / clever – cleverer / nice – nicer 
/ late – later 
Porém ADVÉRBIOS de duas sílabas terminados em -ly 
levam MORE:
quickly - more quickly / slowly - more slowly / badly - 
more badly
A maioria dos adjetivos de duas sílabas levam MORE:
careful: more careful / careless: more careless / boring: 
more boring / awful: more awful / complex: more complex
COMPARISON OF SUPERIORITY FOR SHORT 
ADJECTIVES (TIPO 2)
Advérbios e adjetivos que não pertencem à classe anterior 
levam MORE no comparativo e THE MOST no superlativo:
ADJECTIVES
& ADVERBS COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE
interesting more interesting The most interesting
convenient more convenient The most convenient
beautiful more beautiful The most beautiful]
easily more easily The most easily
carefully more carefully The most carefully
 ⇒ No SUPERLATIVO, para adjetivos e advérbios TIPO I, nós 
acrescentamos -EST, nunca esquecendo de colocar THE 
na frente. Sendo TIPO II, THE MOST + adj.:
happy ó the happiest // early ó the earliest // funny ó 
the funniest // friendly ó the friendliest // shallow ó the 
shallowest // able ó the ablest // soon ó the soonest 
// comfortable the MOST comfortable // expensive the 
MOST comfortable // late the latest
As regras referentes ao comparativo são as mesmas para 
o superlativo. Agora, vale à pena destacarmos os superlativos 
irregulares:
good / well the best
bad / badly the worst
far the furthest / the farthest
many / much the most
1. Adjectives: Comparison of Equality:
AS ... AS = Tão / Tanto Quanto
These insects are AS small AS ants.
Those animals are NOT SO big AS elephants.
2. Comparativo de Inferioridade:
LESS + qualquer adjetivo + THAN
Ex: She is LESS intelligent than her brother. (Ela é MENOS 
inteligente que seu irmão.
Paul’s car is LESS fast than mine. (O carro do Paul é MENOS 
rápido que o meu.)
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 16 – MODAL VERBSINGLÊS – EEAr
79
Capítulo 16
MODAIS
São também chamados “Anomalous” ou “Defective Verbs”. 
São verbos auxiliares, que junto com outro verbo na BASE-
-FORM, dão ideia de: 
•	 habilidade, 
•	 possibilidade (forte ou fraca), 
•	 sugestão, 
•	 permissão,
•	 pedido, 
•	 obrigação, 
•	 necessidade, 
•	 proibição, 
•	 expectativa, 
•	 promessa, 
•	 determinação ou 
•	 preferência. 
Os modais expressam, como você viu acima, diferentes 
significados. Em alguns casos estas diferenças são fáceis de 
entender, em outros, as diferenças são muito sutis. 
Quando você fala ou escreve, somente você sabe o que quer ex-
pressar e a jogo de palavras usado é baseado na situação específica 
que ocorre, seu conhecimento a seu sentimento em relação a ela. 
Por isto, é importante saber os diferentes significados dos 
modais, pois assim, você será capaz de expressar o que pensa 
e o que sente de uma maneira precisa e real.
Os principais modais são:
•	 can (= to be able to)
•	 could
•	 may (= to be allowed to)
•	 might
•	 shall
•	 should
•	 must (= have to)
•	 ought to
•	 need
•	 dare
Temos também as expressões
01- would rather (Preferiria / preferia)
02- had better (seria melhor se) 
Particularidades: 
01- possuem uma única forma para todas as pessoas, não 
recebendo sequer o “S” característica das 3as pessoas do singular 
(“he”, “she”, “it”) do presente; 
02- não são precedidas de “to” no infinitivo; 
03- são seguidos de outros verbos no infinitivo sern LO”” 
Exemplo:
I must go now. 
I can swim. 
Exceção: “ought to” 
04- na forma negativa acrescentamos o “not”; 
Exemplo: 
John should not (shouidn’t) have done that. 
They can not (can’t) jump 18 feet high. 
05- na forma interrogativa o verbo modal vem antes do 
sujeito;
Exemplo: 
May we smoke here? 
Veja a seguir uma sequência de verbos modais, os diferen-
tes sentidos que possuem e os exemplos que ajudarão você a 
entendê-los melhor:
Particularidades: 
01- a) “Can” (presente)
 b) “Could” (passado)
Formas negativas de:
a) “Can” “can not”, “cannot” (can’t)
b) “Could” “could not” (couldn’t)
06- “Must”
a) passado:
“had to”, para expressar obrigação ou necessidade. 
Ex.: They had to talk to me.
“must have” + particípio passado, para expressar de-
dução. Ex.: The house is empty. They must have moved.
b) futuro:
“will have to” ou “must” para expressar obrigação ou 
necessidade. Ex.: I will have to get up early.
“must” para expressar dedução. Ex.: The dog must be 
dead until the evening.
c) “must not” (“mustn’t”) indica, quase sempre proibição. 
Ex.: You mustn’t walk on the grass.
07- “Ought to” / “Should” (deveria)
a) são sinônimos mas “ought to” é mais formal que 
“should”.
b) “ought to” é o único modal seguido de “to”.
c) o passado de “ought to” e “should” é:
“ought to”
ou + have + particípio passado
“should”
Ex.: You should (ought to) have paid your bill the day 
after the payday.
d) Forma negativa
“shoud not” (“shouldn’t”)
“ought not to”
CAPÍTULO 16 – MODAL VERBS INGLÊS – EEAr
80
08- “Need”(precisar) e “Dare”(ousar podem ser conside-
rados anômalos, seguirão as regras dos anômalos já citados. 
Veja os exemplos:
como anômalos
“He need study.”
“Need he study?”
“He needn’t change his behavior.”
“Dare you tell him the news?”
“I dared not think how much it cost.”
como verbos comuns:
“He needs study.”
“Does he need to go?“
“I didn’t dare to think how much it cost.”
09- “Would rather” (preferir) e “had better” (ser melhor) 
são expressões consideradas como verbos anômalos pela 
maioria dos autores, pois exige BASE-FORM após as mesmas.
Exemplos
a) forma afirmativa:
 He had better go.
 We would rather say.
b) forma interrogativa.
 Had he better go?
 Would we rather stay?
c) forma negativa.
 “He had better not go.”
 “We would rather not stay.”
10- “Used to” (costumava) é considerada uma expressão 
modal que indica uma ação habitual passada.
Exemplos
a) forma afirmativa: 
 I used to eat a lot of hot dogs when I was a child.
b) forma interrogativa:
 Did you used to eat a lot of candy when you were a child?
c) forma negativa:
 We didn’t use to play cards when we were children.
11- “Could”, “would”, “might” e “should” não indicam ape-
nas o passado de “can”, “will”, “may” e “shall” respectivamente, 
mas também os tempos presente e futuro. Não é apenas o verbo 
modal que expressa o tempo verbal, mas os outros elementos 
na sentença nos indicam o tempo da ação.
EXERCÍCIOS PROPOSTOS
1 - The child is feeling ill. You ________ take her to the doctor im-
mediately.
a) might b) shall c) should d) ought
2 - Ghosts are invisible. You ______ seethem.
a) must not b) might not
c) ought not d) can’t
3 - We _____ survive without expensive clothes, but we _____ 
survive without water.
a) can / can’t b) must / mustn’t
c) should / shouldn’t d) shall / shall not
4 - Childhood ______ be a very happy period in your life.
a) could b) can 
c) couldn’t d) can’t
5 - I’m sorry, but I simply ________ remember your name.
a) should b) may
c) can’t d) could
6 - I didn’t promise to come. I just said that I _______ come.
a) will b) had c) might d) may
7 - You _____ go and see that film. It’s a good one.
a) should b) ought c) may d) can
8 - Passengers ____ get to the airport one hour before takeoff.
a) can b) have c) has to d) must
9 - That old man ________ to show his documents. I know who he is.a) mustn’t b) doesn’t have
c) will not d) would not
10 - A biographer _______ all about a person before he starts to write.
a) have to know b) ought to have know 
c) may know d) should know
11 - The children ______ not _______ their father when he is reading.
a) should / disturb b) ought / disturb 
c) must / to disturb d) can / disturbed
12 - She was a very good athlete. She ___ ski very well when he was 17.
a) may b) will be able to 
c) could d) were able to
13 - It ______ rain today. You ______ take an umbrella with you.
a) might / shouldn’t b) can / ought
c) may / should d) could / mustn’t
14 - Tell him he ______ bring the bicycle. I _____ that for him.
a) needn’t / be able to 
b) doesn’t have to / can do
c) mustn’t / should not do 
d) don’t need / may do
CAPÍTULO 16 – MODAL VERBSINGLÊS – EEAr
81
15 - Secretary: “______ I help you, sir?”
Mr. Kale: “______ I talk to the manager?”
Secretary: “Sorry, you ______ make an appointment first.
a) Can / My / must
b) Could / Could / have
c) May / Could / have
d) Might / May / can
16 - It _________ been the coffee I drank that kept me awake the 
whole night.
a) ought have b) should has 
c) may had d) must have
17 - You ________ to study harder if you don’t want to fail.
a) must b) ought c) may d) should
18 - Bill looks older than he really is because he has drunk and smoked 
more than he __________.
a) can b) did c) should d) must
19 - The nurse looks so sleepy and tired this morning! She _____ have 
stayed up all night.
a) ought b) may c) should d) must
MODAL VERBS 2: The Pseudosubjunctive.
OUGHT TO / SHOULD
You can use SHOULD to give ADVICE or to give an opinion:
You look tired. You should go to bed.
The government should do more to help homeless 
people.
Should we invite Susan to the party?
Até aí a gente já sabia. Agora, Segura essa !!
The Pseudo-Subjunctive.
You can use SHOULD after a number of verbs, especially:
suggest propose recommend insist demand
They insisted that we should read that newspaper.
I demanded that he should apologize.
What do you suggest I should do?
 ⇒ In the same way, you can use SHOULD after the expres-
sions or words: SUGGESTION, PROPOSAL, RECOMMEN-
DATION, IT’S IMPORTANT, IT’S VITAL, IT’S NECESSARY, 
IT’S ESSENTIAL, etc.
BUT YOU CAN DETACH SHOULD from the examples or 
explanations above:
It’s essential that you be here on time.
I demanded that he apologize.
What do you suggest that I do?
They insisted that we read that newspaper.
In these last cases, we have THE pseudo – SUBJUNCTIVE: 
EXPRESS + SUJEITO + Base-Form
20 - Complete the sentences using the SUBJUNCTIVE + ONE OF THESE 
VERBS:
ask be leave
speak drive listen
say worry
a) It’s strange that she ________ late. She’s usually on time.
b) It’s funny that you ________ that. I was going to say the 
same thing.
c) It’s only natural that parents ________ about their children.
d) Isn’t it typical of Ron that he ________ without saying goo-
dbye to anybody?
e) I was surprised that he ________ me for advice. What advice 
could him?
f) It’s very important that everybody ________ very carefully.
g) It’s necessary that I ________ English very fast if I want a 
good job.
h) It’s vital that she ________ along that street; the other one was 
completely destroyed by the storm and unaccessible to her car.
(Não esqueça de botar os verbos na base-form !!)
MODAIS 3: PASSIVE.
CAN, ... + BE + PAST PARTICIPLE 
Examples:
ACTIVE VOICE PASSIVE VOICE
She MUST send five letters. Five letters MUST BE SENT 
(by her).
Mark OUGHT TO DO a com-
position to practice his writing.
A composition OUGHT TO 
BE WRITTEN (by Mark). To 
practice.
SOLVED QUESTIONS
1 - Change the following sentences from active to PASSIVE VOICE, 
according to the pattern:
 ⇒ Não devemos nos esquecer de que, quando não temos prática 
sufiente para lidarmos com voz passiva, às vezes é necessário 
nos valermos de algumas dicas gramaticais práticas, como, por 
exemplo, o ESQUEMA DE SETAS.
a) We MUST FINISH those letters by five o’clock.
 
Those letters MUST BE FINISHED us
Depois, a gente sabe que a sintaxe de voz passiva com modais é:
MODAL + BE + PARTICÍPIO PASSADO
Logo: MUST FINISH = MUST BE FINISHED
AFF.: Those letters MUST BE FINISHED by five o’clock (by us).
CAPÍTULO 16 – MODAL VERBS INGLÊS – EEAr
82
NEG.:Those letters MUSTN’T BE FINISHED by five o’clock 
(by us).
INT.: MUST those letters BE FINISHED by five o’clock (by us)?
2 - CHANGE THE FOLLOWING SENTENCES FROM PASSIVE TO ACTIVE 
VOICE:
a) This book could be written by Sérgio Gama.
É só fazer o esquema de setas, mesmo para esse caso:
a) This book could be written by Sérgio Gama.
 
 Sérgio Gama This book
COULD BE WRITTEN = COULD WRITE
Logo:
Sérgio Gama COULD WRITE this book.
EXERCÍCIOS
21 - Change each sentence below in order to introduce the verb may, 
according to the pattern:
a) It is possible it rains.
b) It is possible we arrive at home before 9:00 p.m.
c) Perhaps she is sick.
d) Possibly he travels today to return tomorrow.
e) Perhaps I have to go to Jane’s to speak to her.
f) I have the permission to watch TV.
g) I have Sheila’s permission to kiss her.
h) Perhaps they are friends.
22 - Complete The Following Sentences With Ought To:
a) He ________ (try) to come to class on time.
b) They _______________ (negative - make) so much noise.
c) I _______ (spend) more time on my English.
d) He __________ (negative - smoke) so much.
e) You _______________ (learn) as many new words as possible.
f) You _______________ (ask) permission before doing it.
g) He ______________ (practice) more physical exercises.
h) I _______________ (write) them a letter but I don’t have 
anything to say.
i) You ___________ (negative - work) so hard.
23 - Change must by have to in the sentences below:
a) He must leave to Norway. 
b) They must stay there at least an hour.
c) You must send it by airmail.
d) He must have more practice in conversation.
e) They must help her with that work.
f) You must speak to him about it today.
24 - Change the following sentences to simple past, present perfect 
and past perfect :
a) He has to get up early.
b) She has to arrange more money.
c) We have to do this at once.
d) Everyone has to work overtime.
e) He has to learn English very quickly.
f) Paul has to go to the post office.
g) He has to see the doctor a second time.
h) They have to leave to New York in some days.
i) They have to talk in Japanese.
25 - They’re so good that they _____ do this without a laughter.
a) can’t b) can 
c) may d) should 
e) to used to
26 - I _____ be a lazy student, but now I’m a very responsible one.
a) used b) used to 
c) to use d) using 
e) to used to
27 - Before Mara _____ arrangements to travel to Paris she received 
an amazing letter from Dorival.
a) may make b) must make
c) ought make d) could make 
e) mays make
28 - My father is _____ a nap after meals.
a) used to taking b) used to take 
c) uses to take d) used taking 
e) used taking to
29 - Sorry, it was my only choice. I simply _____ what I did.
a) did done b) had to do 
c) must do d) ought do 
e) should doing
30 - It’s late now. You _____ home.
a) should be head b) should heading 
c) should be heading d) should to head 
e) should have heading
31 - _____ you to come along with us!
a) Might we have asked b) Might have we asked
c) Might asked we have d) Have might we asked 
e) Have we might asked
32 - Marcela _____ us this favor.
a) could have do b) could has done 
c) could have did d) could has did 
e) could have done
33 -. I can’t find Ruth anywhere. She _____.
a) must have leave b) have must left
c) has must leave d) must have left 
e) must to have left
CAPÍTULO 16 – MODAL VERBSINGLÊS– EEAr
83
34 - Change the following sentences from active to PASSIVE VOICE, 
according to the pattern:
a) We must finish those tasks by five o’clock.
b) They should send it to us tonight.
c) The mailman can deliver the mail now.
d) He must finish it today.
e) The police may catch Paul for questioning.
f) They might organize an excursion for next week.
g) You ought to send this package by airmail.
h) They can play piano and guitar very well.
i) You ought to water the plant once a week.
j) We should warn them of the danger.
35 - Change The Following Sentences From Passive To Active Voice:
a) This book could be written by Sérgio Gama.
b) The whole city might be destroyed by the fire.
c) Chemistry and Mathematics courses can be offered at that 
university.
d) My shoes must be shined by myself.
e) This subject must be being studied by those twelve students.
f) My friend Carlos can have been pursued by the police.
g) Beautiful songs could be being sung by Sheila when I arrived 
at home.
h) The telephone must have been found out by Graham Bell.
i) A cake should be baked for the guests by Isabel.
j) That tall building could have been built in 1982.
k) Those beautiful pictures should have been painted since last year.
36 - (ITA-SP) John is a good student, so he _____ have gotten good 
marks.
a) must b) can c) could d) may e) might
37 - (U.F.S Carlos-SP) How many advices _____ you have given him?
a) should b) ought 
c) should to d) do 
e) did
38 - (U.F.PA) _____ my breakfast be prepared today? I wish it weren’t 
my obligation, at least today.
a) can b) could c) may d) must e) could
39 - (ESAN-SP) Any type of book can _____ brought to me. I like any one.
a) is b) was c) be d) to be e) being
40 - How many days could you _____ for your studies?
a) has aimed b) have aimed
c) have aim d) has aim
e) to have aimed
41 - (CESGRANRIO-RJ) The synomim for CAN is:
a) to be able to b) to be allowed to 
c) to able d) to allow 
e) to be to
42 - (U.F.GO) The stars _____ often by the birds.
a) can to be followed b) can be followed
c) can be follow d) ought be followed
e) can are followed
43 - (FATEC-SP) In his lectures, the professor should _____ about the 
new applications of solar energy. The students have difficulties in it.
a) talked b) talk c) is talking d) talking e) talks
44 - (F.C.Chagas-BA) He _____ call you every day. You are very sick.
a) should b) ought 
c) should to d) shoulds
e) oughts
45 - (CESGRANRIO-RJ) Mark the question to which the following 
sentence could be the answer:
“He ___________ his car windshield. It is functioning now.”
a) must have fixed b) must to have fixed
c) must have fixing d) must has fixed 
e) musts have fixed
46 - (F.M. Taubaté-SP) I _____ time today, but I _____ it tomorrow.
a) can’t have – can have 
b) not can have – can have
c) cannot to have – can to have
d) can’t has – can have
e) not can having – can having
Gabarito
1 . C 2 . D 3 . A 4 . B 5 . C
6 . C 7 . A 8 . D 9 . B 10 . D
11 . A 12 . C 13 . C 14 . B 15 . A
16 . D 17 . B 18 . C 19 . D
20 . a) b) c) d) e)
f) g) h)
21. a) IT MAY rains.
b) WE MAY arrive at home before 9:00 p.m.
c) SHE MAY sick.
d) HE MAY travel today to return tomorrow.
e) I MAY have to go to Jane’s to speak to her.
f) I MAYwatch TV.
g) I MAY kiss her.
h) THEY MAY are friends.
22. a) He OUGHT TO TRY (try) to come to class on time.
b) They OUGHT NOT TO MAKE (negative - make) so 
much noise.
c) I OUGHT TO SPEND (spend) more time on my English.
d) He OUGHT NOT TO SMOKE (negative - smoke) so much.
e) You OUGHT TO LEARN (learn) as many new words 
as possible.
CAPÍTULO 16 – MODAL VERBS INGLÊS – EEAr
84
f) You OUGHT TO ASK (ask) permission before doing it.
g) He OUGHT TO PRACTICE (practice) more physical 
exercises.
h) I OUGHT TO WRITE (write) them a letter but I don’t 
have anything to say.
i) You OUGHT NOT TO WORK (negative - work) so hard.
23. a) He HAS TO leave to Norway. 
b) They HAVE TO stay there at least an hour.
c) You HAVE TO send it by airmail.
d) He HAS TO have more practice in conversation.
e) They HAVE TO help her with that work.
f) You HAVE TO speak to him about it today.
24. a) He has to get up early.
 He had to get up early.
 He has had to get up early.
 He had had to get up early.
b) She has to arrange more money.
 She had to arrange more money.
 She has had to arrange more money.
 She had had to arrange more money.
c) We have to do this at once.
 We had to do this at once.
 We have had to do this at once.
 We had had to do this at once.
d) Everyone has to work overtime.
 Everyone had to work overtime.
 Everyone has had to work overtime.
 Everyone had had to work overtime.
e) He has to learn English very quickly.
 He had to learn English very quickly.
 He has had to learn English very quickly.
 He had had to learn English very quickly.
f) Paul has to go to the post office.
 Paul had to go to the post office.
 Paul has had to go to the post office.
 Paul had had to go to the post office.
g) He has to see the doctor a second time.
 He had to see the doctor a second time.
 He has had to see the doctor a second time.
 He had had to see the doctor a second time.
h) They have to leave to New York in some days.
 They have to leave to New York in some days.
 They have to leave to New York in some days.
 They have to leave to New York in some days.
i) They have to talk in Japanese.
 They had to talk in Japanese.
 They have had to talk in Japanese.
 They had had to talk in Japanese.
25. a 26. b (USED TO = COSTUMAVA / IDIOMÁTICO) 
27. D 28. B 29. B 30. C 31. A 
32. E 33. D
34. a) We must finish those tasks by five o’clock.
 Those tasks must be finished by five o’clock by us.
b) They should send it to us tonight.
 It should be sent to us tonight by them.
c) The mailman can deliver the mail now.
 The mail can be delivered now by the mailman.
d) He must finish it today.
 It must be finished today by him.
e) The police may catch Paul for questioning.
 Paul may be caught for questioning by the police.
f) They might organize an excursion for next week.
An excursion might be organized for next week 
by them.
g) You ought to send this package by airmail.
 This package ought to be sent by airmail by you.
h) They can play piano and guitar very well.
 Piano and guitar can be played very well by them
i) You ought to water the plant once a week.
 The plant must be watered once a week by you.
j) We should warn them of the danger.
 They should be warned of the danger by us.
35. a) This book could be written by Sérgio Gama.
 Sérgio Gama could write this book.
b) The whole city might be destroyed by the fire.
 The fire might destroy the whole city.
c) Chemistry and Mathematics courses can be offered 
at that university.
That university can offer Chemistry and Mathe-
matics courses.
d) My shoes must be shined by myself.
 I must shine my shoes.
e) This subject must be being studied by those twelve 
students.
Those twelve students must be studying this 
subject.
f) My friend Carlos can have been pursued by the police.
 The police can have pursued my friend Carlos.
g) Beautiful songs could be being sung by Sheila when 
I arrived at home.
Sheila could be singing beautiful songs when I 
arrived at home.
h) The telephone must have been found out by Graham Bell.
 Graham Bell must have found the telephone.
i) A cake should be baked for the guests by Isabel.
 Isabel should bake a cake for the guests.
j) That tall building could have been built in 1982.
 They could have built that tall building in 1982.
k) Those beautiful pictures should have been painted 
since last year.
They should have painted those beautiful pictu-
res since last year.
36.A 37.A 38.B 39.C 40.B 41.A 
42.B 43.B 44.A 45.A 46.ACAPÍTULO 17 – QUESTION TAGSINGLÊS – EEAr
85
Capítulo 17
QUESTION TAGS
Usamos as "QUESTION TAGS" para fazermos uma pergunta 
confirmativa sobre algo que já sabemos ou que acabamos 
de saber:
He can speak English, CAN’T HE?
She is an American, ISN’T SHE?
You live in Washington, DON’T YOU?
They went home, DIDN’T THEY?
We use an affirmative question tag after a negative sentence:
He can't speak English, CAN HE?
She isn't an American, IS SHE?
You don't live in Washington, DO YOU?
They didn't go home, DID THEY?
 ⇒ Notar que, sem começamos afirmando, terminamos 
negando e vice-versa.
Idiomatic Question – Tags:
a) Caso imperativo (WILL YOU):
Study more, WILL YOU? <= Don’t study more, WILL YOU? 
(“WILL YOU” não muda !!!)
b) Caso de sugestão, ideia (LET’S):
Let’s eat a pizza, SHALL WE? <= Let’s NOT eat a pizza, 
SHALL WE?
(“SHALL WE” não muda !!!)
c) I AM ==== AREN’T I?
I am studying now, AREN’T I? PORÉM, I am NOT studying 
now, AM I?
Logo, sintaxe: AUXILIAR + PRONOME?
 THERE IS, WAS ... = ISN’T ... THERE? ou
 THERE ISN’T, WASN’T ... = IS ... THERE? (a question-tag é 
feita com THERE nesse caso).
 ⇒ Preste atenção: tudo o que leva o título de IDIOMATIC, 
é porque pertence a uma sintaxe total ou parcialmente 
irracional, ou seja, o que está escrito não “bate” com a 
tradução correta, “ao pé –da-letra”.
EXERCÍCIOS
1 - Add the correct question tag to the following sentences:
1) She goes shopping everyday, ________?
2) He has been studying English a long time, ________?
3) He is a good student, ______?
4) She plays piano very well, ______?
5) She can play the guitar very well, ________?
6) You played tennis yesterday, ______?
7) The traffic will be heavy today, _______?
8) I have read several books about chemistry, ________?
9) Martha hadn’t cooked our dinner when we arrived, ________?
10) She doesn’t like to study Chinese, _______?
11) You won’t mention this to anyone, _______?
12) The traffic today isn’t very heavy, _______?
13) This box wasn’t heavy yesterday, _______?
14) They went there by plane, _______?
15) She didn’t say anything to you, ________?
16) He won’t be back before noon, ________?
17) The bus doesn’t stop near here, ________?
18) He wasn’t driving fast at that time, ________?
19) You wrote these letters, _________?
20) I haven’t paid you yet, _________?
21) Helen isn’t going with you, _______?
22) Charles hadn’t won the game, ________?
23) He can’t speak Italian, _________?
24) George left class early today, ________?
25) She has never gotten to speak to you, _________?
26) Today is Wednesday, ______?
27) You were absent yesterday, ________?
28) Donald lives in Brooklyn, _________?
29) They will order a salad, _________?
30) The telephone is ringing, _______?
31) There is someone at the door, ______?
32) He never comes to class on time, _______?
33) She can speak French well, ______?
34) Joanna says that she is all right, ________?
35) Helen spends a lot of money, ________?
36) She has hardly studied to succeed in the tests, ________?
37) He sits in the front row, _________?
38) The mason is building the house, ________
39) I have private dance classes twice a week, _______?
40) She is making good progress in German, ______?
Gabarito:
1. doesn’t she? 2. Hasn’t he? 3. Isn’t he? 
4. Doesn’t she? 5. Can’t she? 6. Didnt you? 
7. Won’t it? 8. Haven’t I? 9. Had she? 
10. Does she? 11. Will you? 12. Is it? 
13. Was it? 14. Didn’t they? 15. Did she? 
16. Will he? 17. Does it? 18. Was he?
19. Didn’t you? 20. Have I? 21. Is she?
22. Had he? 23. Can he? 24. Didn’t he? 
25. Hasn’t she? 26. Isn’t it? 27. Weren’t you? 
28. Doesn’t he? 29. Won’t they? 30. Isn’t it? 
31. Isn’t there? 
32. Does he? (observar que a 1ª oração está negativa - never !!) 
33. Can’t she? 34. Doesn’t she? 35. Doesn’t she? 
36. Has she? (hardly = quase não, ou seja, é negativo !!!!) 
37. Doesn’t he? 38. Isn’t he? 39. Haven’t I? 
40 Isn’t she?
CAPÍTULO 18 – CONDITIONAL CASES INGLÊS – EEAr
86
Capítulo 18
IF CLAUSES (CONDITIONAL CASES)
There are three forms for conditional sentences:
a) Future Possible;
b) Present Unreal;
c) Past Unreal.
Future Possible: 
A conditional sentence has two clauses: a dependent clau-
se beginning with if (if - clause) and a main clause; in future 
possible conditional sentences, the dependent clause is in the 
present tense and the main clause is in the future tense. This 
case indicates a future wish:
If I STUDY harder, I WILL GET a good grade.
If I HAVE enough money, I WILL TRAVEL to California.
I’LL GO OUT, if it DOESN’T RAIN.
She WILL KISS him, if he SAYS that he loves her.
SINTAXE:
IF
CLAUSE
SUBSEQUENTE (esta oração pode seguir 
ou anteceder a oração condicional)
SIMPLE 
PRESENT
WILL / CAN / MAY / MUST + BASE - FORM
 ⇒ “SUBSEQUENTE” é um dos vários nomes para a 2a oração, 
aquela que está fora da oração condicional. É o caso das 
4 orações sublinhadas acima.
EXERCÍCIOS
1 - Supply (Dê) the form of the verb in parentheses to make FUTURE 
- POSSIBLE conditions:
a) If John studies hard, he ____________________ (get) a 
good grade.
b) If I finish my work in time, I ____________________ (go) 
to the ball game.
c) If I see Henry, I _________________ (give) him the message.
d) If he works hard, he ___________ naturally __________ 
(succeed).
e) If you don’t hurry, we ____________________ (be) late 
for class.
f) If he tries again, I am sure he ____________________ (find) 
a very good job.
2 - If he fails the test, he ____________________ (have) to repeat 
the course.
a) would have b) have 
c) haves d) will have 
e) have to
Present Unreal
In a present unreal conditional sentence, the if-clause 
comes in the simple past tense and the main sentence in the 
conditional tense or with should, could or might; it indicates a 
present wish:
If you STUDIED, you WOULD GET a good grade.
If I HAD enough money, I WOULD FLY to California.
Logo, a sintaxe geral é:
IF – CLAUSE SUBSEQUENTE
SIMPLE PAST WOULD / COULD / MIGHT + BASE - FORM
In this conditional case, the verb TO BE is conjugated em-
ploying WERE for all persons:
If she WERE millionaire, she would buy a very big house.
The students would know better, if the teacher WERE good.
SOLVED QUESTIONS
1 - Supply the form of the verb in parentheses to make present- unreal 
conditions:
If I knew her well, I _________ (speak) to her.
R.: Observe que neste tipo de questão, sempre teremos 
uma lacuna em função da outra, pois a sintaxe é dupla. Usando 
a tabelinha acima da sintaxe, teremos:
 If I knew her well, I WOULD / COULD / MIGHT SPEAK to her.
EXERCÍCIOS
3 - Supply the form of the verb in parentheses to make present- unreal 
conditions:
a) If I knew her well, I __________________ (speak) to her.
b) If he attended classes regularly, he _____ (make) good progress.
c) If we had money, we __________________ (take) a trip to 
South America.
d) If he went to bed earlier, he ______ not _______ (feel) so tired.
e) If he drove more carefully, he _________________ (have) 
fewer accidents.
f) If he paid his debts, people ____________ (respect) him more.
g) If I knew English better, I _______________ (read) some 
English books.
4 - If Isis ________________ here, she would buy five cars.
a) would be b) be c) were d) been e) had been
Past-Unreal 
Conditional Sentences: In a past-unreal conditional sen-
tence, the if clause is in the past perfect tense and the main 
clause uses would have, should have, could have or might have 
+ the past participle of the main verb; here, this case indicates 
a past wish.
CAPÍTULO 18 – CONDITIONAL CASESINGLÊS – EEAr
87
If you had studied, you would have passed your exam.
If she had had enough money, she might have flown 
to Spain.
If I had known you werein a hospital, I could have gone 
to visit you.
If you had chosen that way, I should have advised you 
about the danger. If I had been hungry, I would have 
eaten something.
If the weather had been so bad, we might have gone 
out earlier.
Logo, a sintaxe geral é:
IF – CLAUSE SUBSEQUENTE
PAST PERFECT
(HAD + PARTICÍPIO)
WOULD HAVE + PARTICÍPIO
SOLVED QUESTIONS
1 - Supply the form of the verb in parentheses to make present- unreal 
conditions:
If I HAD KNEW her well, I ____________________ (speak) 
to her.
R.: Observe que neste tipo de questão, sempre teremos 
uma lacuna em função da outra, pois a sintaxe é dupla. Usando 
a sintaxe acima, teremos:
 If I had known her well, I WOULD HAVE SPOKEN to her.
Gabarito:
1. a) will get b) will go c) will give 
d) will / succeed e) will be f) will find
2. d
3. a.) woukld speak b) would make c) would take 
d) would / feel e) would have f) would respect 
g) would read
4. were - letra c
ANOTAÇÕES
CAPÍTULO 19 – DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECH INGLÊS – EEAr
88
Capítulo 19
DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECH
(STATEMENTS)
In a direct speech, we give the words of the speaker exactly 
as he has spoken them: JOHN SAID, "I AM GOING AWAY ON 
WEDNESDAY."
When we wish to report someone's words indirectly, we 
must change all pronouns to agree with the new sentence: 
JOHN SAID THAT HE WAS GOING AWAY ON WEDNESDAY.
If TO SAY is in the past tense (SAID), we must change 
many things inside the speech;
VERBAL AND PRONOMINAL CHANGES (itens 
mais cobrados nas provas militares!!!)
DISCURSO ORIGINAL ↔
DISCURSO RELATADO
(“FOFOCA”)
O MAIS PRESENTE ↔ O MAIS PASSADO
WILL ↔ WOULD
CAN ↔ COULD
MAY ↔ MIGHT
MUST ↔ HAD TO
HAVE / HAS ↔ HAD
AM / IS / ARE ↔ WAS / WERE
WANT / LIKE / KNOW ... ↔ WANTED / LIKED / KNEW ...
SIMPLE PAST
He said: “I BROUGHT the 
money.”
↔
PAST PERFECT
He said HE HAD BROU-
GHT the money
He said: “I WILL BRING the 
money.”
↔ H e s a i d H E W O U L D 
BRING the money.
I thought: ”I can come.” ↔ I thought I COULD come.
Aqui, vamos poder fazer algumas aplicações de tudo isto 
que foi falado acima, incluindo as mudanças pronominais. 
Vamos lá:
JUDY
(DISCURSO ORIGINAL)
JUDY SAID THAT ...
(“FOFOCA”)
‘My parents are very well.’ 
Judy said that HER parents 
WERE well.
‘I’m going to learn how to 
drive.’ 
She said that SHE WAS 
GOING TO learn how to drive.
‘John has given up his job.’ 
She said that John HAD GI-
VEN up his job.
‘I saw Elizabeth watching TV.’ 
She said that SHE HAD SEEN 
Elizabeth watching TV.
‘I can’t come to the party on 
Friday.’ 
She said that SHE COULDN’T 
come to the party on Friday.
‘I want to go away for a holi-
day but I don’t know where 
to go.’ 
She said that SHE WANTED to 
go away for a holiday but (SHE) 
DIDN’T KNOW where to go.
‘I’m going away for a few 
days. I’ll call you and I get 
back.’ 
She said that she WAS 
GOING away for a few days 
and WOULD CALL Me when 
SHE GOT back.
Também temos as mudanças adverbiais, às vezes, ou 
seja, não obedecem a uma dedução lógica:
a) THIS / THESE change to THAT / THOSE;
b) Adverbs of time become less specific: tomorrow = the 
next / following day, yesterday = the day before, next 
week = the week after or the following week, today = that 
day, tonight = that night and here = there.
Direct and Indirect Speech (Questions)
Pay attention about the examples below:
JUDY 
(DISCURSO ORIGINAL)
JUDY ASKED ... 
(“FOFOCA”)
‘Where is Linda?.’ Judy asked where Linda was.
‘How do you go to school?’ 
Judy asked how I went to 
school.
‘When will she drive?’
Judy asked when she would 
arrive.
When in DIRECT SPEECH there are interrogative sentences 
begun by HOW, WHO, WHOM, WHOSE, WHAT, WHERE, WHEN, 
WHICH or WHY, the sentence is transformed for the affirmative 
structure in the indirect speech. BUT, OBSERVE THE OTHER 
EXAMPLES:
JUDY 
(DISCURSO ORIGINAL)
JUDY ASKED ... 
(“FOFOCA”)
‘Do you speak English?.’ 
Judy asked IF/ WHETHER I 
spoke English.
‘Did she go to school?’ 
Judy asked IF/ WHETHER she 
had gone to school.
‘Will they help you?’
Judy asked IF /WHETHER they 
would help me.
When in DIRECT SPEECH there are interrogative sentences 
N O T begun by HOW, WHO, WHOM, WHOSE, WHAT, WHERE, 
WHEN, WHICH or WHY, the sentence is transformed for the affir-
mative structure in the indirect speech and IT IS INTRODUCED 
IF or WHETHER.
Direct and Indirect Speech (Imperatives)
Pay attention about the examples below:
CAPÍTULO 19 – DIRECT AND INDIRECT SPEECHINGLÊS – EEAr
89
JUDY
(DISCURSO ORIGINAL)
JUDY ASKED ...
(“FOFOCA”)
‘Close the window?’ 
Judy ASKED / TOLD ME TO 
CLOSE the window.
‘Open the door, Tom.’ 
Judy ASKED / TOLD Tom TO 
OPEN the door.
‘Don’t close the window.’
Judy ASKED / TOLD ME NOT 
TO CLOSE the window.
‘Don’t open the door, Tom.’
Judy ASKED / TOLD Tom NOT 
TO OPEN the door.
When we have an imperative form, the verb TO SAY changes 
to ASK or TELL, but:
a) The affirmative imperative changes into INFINITIVE 
(WITH TO);
b) The negative imperative changes into INFINITIVE (WITH 
TO), preceded by NOT.
SOLVED QUESTIONS
1 - Change the following sentences to past tense:
a) She says she may be late for the meeting.
R.: Observamos que o verbo “to say” está no simple present, 
junto do verbo may. Sabendo-se as formas do passado para 
estes verbos, teremos:
= She SAID she MIGHT be late for the meeting.
2 - Change the following sentences from past to present tense:
a) She said she couldn’t understand what I meant.
R.: Aqui, já temos 3a pessoa do singular, cujo sintaxe é:
HE / SHE / IT / SUJEITO + BF + “S”
Disso temos que nos lembrar, uma vez que a sentença 
passará ao Simple Present. Logo:
= She SAYS she CAN’T understand what I MEAN.
 ⇒ Note que quando o verbo é irregular, a coisa fica mais 
complicada, pois você precisa se lembrar qual é o nome 
ou o infinitivo do verbo que está conjugado no passado 
para poder trabalhar com ele nos outros tempos.
3 - Change the following statements to indirect speech:
a) Patty said to her mother, “I am going to leave for Europe next 
week.”
R.: Levando-se em consideração o que foi apresentado na 
parte teórica com as tabelas ao lado, teremos:
= Patty TOLD her mother THAT SHE WAS going to leave for 
Europe next week.”
4 - Supply the correct form of the verbs:
a) Mark said, “Have you finished your lunch?”
Mark asked if I ___________________ my lunch.
R.: Observamos que se trata de uma pergunta SEM INTER-
ROGATIVO, donde concluímos que a conjunção integrante no 
discurso indireto (fofoca) será IF ou WHETHER. Também per-
cebemos que o PRESENT PERFECT SE TRANSFORMARÁ EM 
PAST PERFECT, que é o que vai preencher a lacuna. 
Logo, resposta:
 Mark asked if I HAD FINISHED my lunch.
5 - Put into the reported speech:
a) My sister said to me, “Do you want to go for a walk?”
R.: Temos aqui uma pergunta que passará a uma frase 
simples normal , ou seja, o sinal de interrogação e a SINTAXE 
INTERROGATIVA desaparecerão !!! Levando-se em consi-
deração as mudanças verbais, pronominais e / ou adverbiais 
possíveis, teremos:
My sister TOLD me IF / WHETHER I WANTED to go for a walk.
ANOTAÇÕES
PROVAS DE CONCURSOS SIMILARES INGLÊS – EEAr
90
PROVAS DE CONCURSOS SIMILARES 
(Diversos)
•	 ELETROBRAS 2002 – NCE / UFRJ
READ TEXT I AND ANSWER QUESTIONS 21 TO 24:
TEXT I
HERE IS A RESPONSE TO A DEBATE ON PATENTS AND MEDICIN
Mr. Przemek Kordasiewicz,
I agree wholeheartedly with your recommendation of a ban on 
all patents on all life saving medical discoveries. Again, I would 
take it a step further. I think that the virtues of a purely capitalist 
system seem to have fallen apart at this point. In this literal life-
-and-death issue, ethics take priority over everything else. Just 
as Congressstepped forward to place a ban on the patenting of 
surgical procedures, they need to step forward and place a similar 
ban on these new medical patents (drugs, procedures and human 
genome work) which are having the identical effect. Additionally, 
Congress need to heavily legislate in favor of patients worldwide to 
keep drug patents limited, short, and drug prices at an affordable 
level. Something in the system is wrong when drug companies 
are the most profitable of all publicly traded companies and huge 
populations across the world are living in pain and dying because 
they are unable to afford the sky-high drug prices, inflated by the 
patent holders’ monopoly. The government needs to look into 
the situation independently and take a stand for the well-being 
of the taxpayers and citizens they suppose to be representing.
Thank you,
Benjamin (Mako) Hill.
(Intellectual Property in Cyberspace 2000, http://yukidoke.org)
21 - As regards capitalist policies for drug patents, the author: 
a) supports them; b) criticizes them;
c) defines them; d) advertises them;
e) modifies them.
22 - The author thinks that patents on medical discoveries should be:
a) guaranteed; b) adjusted;
c) increased; d) controlled;
e) forbidden.
23 - “I agree wholeheartedly” (l. 1) means that Benjamin Hill agrees:
a) entirely; b) emotionally;
c) enticingly; d) enquiringly;
e) entertainingly.
24 - The underlined expression in “to look into the situation” (l.20) can 
be replaced by:
a) alter; b) control;
c) clarify; d) investigate;
e) resolve.
READ TEXT II AND ANSWER QUESTIONS 25 TO 30:
TEXT II
WHERE WE GO FROM HERE
By Thomas Claburn
Intellectual property doesn’t exist. Still, the business community 
profits handsomely by pretending otherwise, with a little help 
from the law. For companies that watched their profits wither in a 
market torched by terrorism, the illusion is all the more compelling 
– intellectual property increasingly appears as an oasis of future 
liquidity on corporate balance sheets.
Intangible though it may be, intellectual property is the foundation 
of modern industry. “If you take a look at intellectual property as 
a whole – not just patents, but the concept – if we stripped out 
these sets of rights, what does it do to the world?” asks Kevin 
Rivette, founder and CEO of Aurigin Systems. 
He says that removing intellectual property rights would collapse 
the movie, music, software, publishing, pharmaceutical, biotech, 
and aerospace industries, to name just a few. He also contends 
that the patent system – much maligned for granting frivolous 
patents to technologies like Amazon.com’s 1-Click – will continue 
to spur innovation as it has for hundreds of years.
And thanks to globalism and the World Trade Organization (WTO), 
intellectual property should see greater protection from the inter-
national community. The foreshadowing of that future became 
evident in 1993, when the United States Trademark Association vo-
ted to change its name to the International Trademark Association.
Nations with a long history of disrespect for intellectual property 
rights, like India and China, are finally starting to recognize the be-
nefits of complying with WTO intellectual property regulations as 
they look to protect homegrown innovations on the world market.
(http://www.smartbusinessmag.com/article, Dec. 1, 2001)
25 - According to the author, intellectual property is a(n): 
a) hazard; b) chimera;
c) adventure; d) possibility;
e) nightmare. 
26 - The elimination of intellectual property is viewed as a(n): 
a) advice; b) necessity;
c) menace; d) solution;
e) achievement.
27 - Still in “Still, the business community profits...” (l.1-2) can be re-
placed by: 
a) Thus; b) So; c) Then; d) Or; e) Yet.
28 - The underlined word in “by pretending otherwise” (l.2-3) means:
a) differently; b) clockwise;
c) similarly; d) likewise;
e) hypocritically.
29 - that future in “The foreshadowing of that future...” (l.26) refers to:
a) international community;
b) greater protection;
PROVAS DE CONCURSOS SIMILARESINGLÊS – EEAr
91
c) intellectual property;
d) patent system;
e) compelling illusion.
30 - When India and China are said to be “complying with WTO intel-
lectual property regulations” (l.32-33), they are:
a) quarrelling with them;
b) competing with them;
c) supplementing them;
d) agreeing with them;
e) undermining them. 
•	 ADMINSTRAÇÃO - 2002 / NOÇÕES DE LÍNGUA 
INGLESA
READ TEXT I AND ANSWER QUESTIONS 15 AND 16:
TEXT I
Here is a report about an exhibition held at the Guggenheim 
Museum in New York last year:
Much of Brazil’s celebrated cultural vitality can be easily traced 
to the influence of African traditions, and the Guggenheim show 
takes full cognizance of that fact. Baroque pieces representing 
black saints stand alongside African deities, and traditional forms 
of African sculpture re-emerge in artwork that translates African 
motives into a distinctively modern idiom.
The dialogue among Brazil’s African indigenous and European 
cultural traditions was embraced enthusiastically in the modernist 
art of the 1920s. Though influenced by the European avant-garde 
(which was, of course, also influenced by African sources), Brazi-
lian artists set out to undo their colonial legacy by subversively 
combining foreign and native cultural references.
TIME, Dec. 3, 2001:45)
15 - The text states that the Guggenheim show: 
a) acknowledges African influence;
b) displays all of African art;
c) presents a postmodern display;
d) conceals African statues;
e) disclaims African origins.
16 - As regards the Brazilian colonial past, the Modernist movement 
tried to: 
a) look up to it; b) turn back to it;
c) search for it; d) break away from it;
e) bring it back.
READ TEXT II AND ANSWER QUESTIONS 17 TO 24:
TEXT II
SKELETONS IN THE CLOSET
Ethics and archaeology began to collide relatively recently. The 
modern discipline traces its roots back to the gentleman amateurs 
of the early 19th century, who brought statues, columns, mum-
mies and trinkets back as souvenirs from their travels around the 
Mediterranean. Subsequent generations of archaeologists have 
tended to regard men such as Giovanni Belzoni – a one-time 
circus strong-man who shipped Egyptian antiquities back to the 
British Museum in London – as little better than tomb-robbers.
Belzoni was the first European to enter the temple at Abu Simbel. 
He rediscovered the entrance to the Great Pyramid and found five 
tombs in the Valley of the Kings, including that of Seti I...
By the early 20th century, however, archaeologists had begun 
to adopt the methodology of science. Increasing emphasis was 
placed on the accurate measurement and description of sites and 
publication of results in archaeological journals. Technological ad-
vances – such as the advent of radiocarbon dating – led to further 
refinements, and the “new archaeology” movement of the 1960s 
promoted quantitative methods such as statistical analysis. The 
transformation of archaeology, from tomb-robbing by amateurs 
into a coherent scientific discipline, was complete.
(The Economist, March 30, 2002: 87-8)
17 - According to the text, archaeology:
a) has always employed scientific methods; 
b) was structured on detailed measurement;
c) used statistics only in its initial studies;
d) will never be much concerned with scientificity;
e) has turned to scientific methods only recently.
18 - The title implies that archaeologists: 
a) kept bones in their cupboard;
b) were afraid of mummies; 
c) died in their expeditions;
d) had an embarrassing past;
e) hid treasures from scientists.
19 - Before 1960, archaeologists were seen as little better than:
a) thieves; b) scientists;
c) sailors; d) antiquarians;
e) gentlemen.
20 - Archaeologists use methods that can:a) stop the robbers; b) set the period of time;
c) increase the measures; d) deter the advances;
e) eschew the facts.
21 - “a one-time circus strong-man” (l.8) means that Belzoni: 
a) used to work for a circus;
b) went to the circus only once;
c) visited the circus on one occasion;
d) belonged to only one circus;
e) protected the circus from robbers.
22 - The opposite of “entrance” (l.12) is: 
a) alley; b) edge;
c) exit; d) admittance;
e) arrival.
PROVAS DE CONCURSOS SIMILARES INGLÊS – EEAr
92
23 - The pronoun that in “that of Seti I” (l.14) is used instead of the word:
a) entrance; b) valley;
c) temple; d) pyramid;
e) tomb.
24 - The word accurate in “accurate measurements” (l.17/18) can be 
replaced by:
a) acute; b) precise;
c) precious; d) approximate;
e) careless. 
•	 Centrais Elétricas Brasileiras – ELETROBRÁS 
- Administração - 2001
READ TEXT I AND ANSWER QUESTIONS 11 TO 14:
The right to drive or the right to breathe?
Politicians have taken some steps to cut deaths from dirty air, but 
more are needed.
In 1554, a band of wandering Jesuits, after sweating through sou-
thern Brazil’s forested coastal hills, stopped by a river on the high 
Piratininga plateau and, delighted at its fresh, cool air, founded the 
city of São Paulo. Were they to return now, for much of the year 
they would find a grey-brown smog shrouding a metropolis of 
18m people and 6m vehicles. The foul air kills thousands of people 
a year and inflicts chronic illness on countless others.
Mexico city has long been notorious for its polluted air. Fuel burns 
less efficiently at high altitudes, and thermal inversions mean that 
the surrounding mountains trap a layer of cold air above the city, 
preventing the dispersal of fumes. But the surge in car ownership 
throughout Latin America since the 1970s means that São Paulo 
and other Latin American capitals are no longer far behind. Thou-
gh at lower altitudes, both São Paulo and Santiago suffer from 
thermal inversions, too.
(http://www.cnn.com/2001/TECH/science/)
11 - According to the text, the air in São Paulo is:
a) pleasant; b) harmless; c) unclean; d) pure; e)unkind.
12 - The pollution in São Paulo has worsened because of: 
a) an increase in car sales; 
b) the dispersal of polluting fumes;
c) too little fuel burning;
d) generalised global warming; 
e) local government policies.
13 – In “more are needed” (l.02), the word that has been omitted is:
a) deaths; b) steps; 
c) politicians; d) vehicles;
e) Jesuits.
14 – Preventing in “preventing the dispersal of fumes” (l.17) can be 
replaced by: 
a) avoiding; b) stopping; 
c) forbidding; d) providing; 
e) causing.
READ TEXT II AND ANSWER QUESTIONS 15 TO 20:
ON THE GROUND FOR CHILDREN IN POVERTY
That’s where World Vision is making a world of difference
World Vision is there on the spot in 90 countries, working with 
communities to find solutions to disaster and poverty.
Nearly 2 million sponsors are linked with children in the world’s 
poorest countries through World Vision Child Sponsorship.
We work hand in hand with local communities and families to 
identify their needs and work together to bring about long term 
improvement.
Being there makes the world of difference. In time. In human lives. 
In effectiveness. Whether it’s providing health care, education, 
clean water, food security through agricultural teachers or deve-
loping local leadership.
(Newsweek, July 30, 2001:51)
15 - The aim of the organisation is to:
a) encourage continuous development;
b) disregard human qualities;
c) emphasise local individualities;
d) disrupt sanitary conditions;
e) promote individual recognition.
16 - The organisation’s working strategy is to:
a) impose some conditions;
b) send food supplies;
c) hand out money;
d) help the rich;
e) take joint decisions.
17 - The opposite of “poverty” in “find solutions to disaster and po-
verty” (l.03) is: 
a) rich; b) wealth;
c) healthy; d) richest;
e) wealthier.
18 - The underlined word in “Nearly 2 million sponsors are linked with 
children” (l.04) has the same meaning as:
a) Nearby; b) Among;
c) None; d) Almost;
e) Nevertheless.
19 - The noun form which corresponds to long in “long term impro-
vement” (l.09) is:
a) longer; b) long-standing;
PROVAS DE CONCURSOS SIMILARESINGLÊS – EEAr
93
c) longish; d) longest;
e) length.
20 - The place that “being there” (l.11) refers to is:
a) two million homes; b) leaders’ workplaces;
c) needy areas; d) educated households;
e) large health centres. 
•	 LÍNGUA INGLESA
READ TEXT I AND ANSWER QUESTIONS 26 TO 30:
GIVE A KID A HAND
The first five years of a child’s life are critical, the experts tell us. 
That’s when their characters are formed. That’s when caring 
counts. Someone to show them how to do things. Someone just 
to hold them. Unfortunately, for many of the world’s children, 
that’s just what they don’t get. And society suffers as a result – 
because a deprived child has a lot less chance of growing up an 
adjusted adult. Some of us believe we can change things – or at 
least try. And we need your help. No, don’t reach for your pocket. 
It’s not your money – it’s you we want. In your community there 
are dozens of ways you can make personal contact with kids and 
make a difference to their lives. Maybe you’ll help one to read, to 
play a game, to learn to laugh. Maybe you’ll just be the hand that 
holds out a little hope... 
(Newsweek, March 25, 2002: 49)
26 - This campaign is directed to people who: 
a) have a lot of money; b) wish to invest in shares;
c) want to help others; d) do not have any children;
e) are social misfits.
27 - The abstract noun which corresponds to “experts” (l. 2) is:
a) experience; b) expertise;
c) experiment; d) expediency;
e) expenditure.
28 - Just in “that’s just what they don’t get” (l.5-6) is used in the same 
way as it is in: 
a) She has just arrived from Paris;
b) She always tries to be just;
c) She is just the person we need;
d) She has just one small limitation;
e) She is just a very young child.
29 - The meaning of “make a difference to their lives” (l.13) is:
a) affect their lives in a positive way;
b) change their lives to make them wealthier;
c) set predetermined limits to their lives;
d) contrast their lives to those of others;
e) adjust their lives to upper class standards.
30 - The underlined words in “a little hope” (l.16) can be replaced by:
a) more; b) few; c) less; d) much; e) some.
READ TEXT II AND ANSWER QUESTIONS 31 TO 40:
The Modern History of Energy Conservation: an Overview for Infor-
mation Professionals
By Donald R. Wulfinghoff
Wulfinghoff Energy Services, Inc.
Energy conservation is one of the critical issues facing society 
today. Our civilization runs on energy. However, energy resour-
ces are finite. Increasing demand is being made for diminishing 
supplies. The cost of energy is enormous, and the cost is rising. 
Utility bills account for much of the cost of housing, and they are 
a major cause of business. A large hotel or hospital spends millions 
of dollars for energy each year. Some steel mills pay hundreds of 
millions of dollars annually for energy. This consumption brings 
a host of environmental dangers. Fossil fuels dump carbon dio-
xide into the atmosphere, accelerating the greenhouse effect. 
Air conditioning systems release gases that destroy the earth’s 
ozone layer. Discarded lamps contribute to mercury pollution. 
Energy consumption depletes not only the fuels themselves but 
also a spectrum of other resources. A fundamental issue today is 
providing information about energy conservation. It is a special 
challenge for information professionals because:
•	 Energy conservation relates to many areas of human activity, 
so the original information about efficiency is scattered throu-ghout the literature of many fields.
•	 By the same token, information about energy conservation is 
often subsidiary to other topics.
•	 Energy conservation is still evolving as a distinct field of know-
ledge. Therefore, even modern information about it is scattered.
•	 The best information often comes from sources that are un-
conventional for librarians.
•	 Information about energy conservation varies widely in quality 
and credibility.
•	 Attempts to create directories of information about energy 
conservation have failed to keep up with the quantity and 
variety of information.
•	 The information client often has no clear idea of what he wants 
to learn.
(Electronic Green Journal, 13, December 2000 in 
http://egj.lib.uidaho.edu)
31 - The author considers energy conservation a(n): 
a) present gain; b) outstanding victory;
c) diminishing concern; d) relevant subject;
e) outdated issue.
32 - One of the reasons why professionals have difficulty in providing 
information is: 
a) the information available is not totally reliable;
b) there is little information published on the subject;
c) only librarians have access to data on energy conservation;
d) energy conservation is the central subject of specialized texts; 
e) information is only found in very specialized works.
PROVAS DE CONCURSOS SIMILARES INGLÊS – EEAr
94
33 - According to the writer, all the following facts contribute to exa-
cerbate the problem presented in the text, EXCEPT: 
a) the throwing away of lamps;
b) the dumping of carbon dioxide;
c) the conservation of energy;
d) the waste of energy;
e) the depletion of resources.
34 - The function of the text is to:
a) question a hypothesis;
b) state facts;
c) analyse results;
d) challenge readers;
e) provoke criticism.
35 - The underlined word in “one of the critical issues facing society 
today” (l. 2) may be replaced by:
a) soon; b) eventually;
c) nowadays; d) actually;
e) really.
36 - In “the cost is rising” (l.5) the verb is the same as it is in:
a) She rose to her feet when the teacher came in;
b) She raised the curtains so the room got brighter;
c) She raised the expensive pen from the floor;
d) She has been raising flowers in her garden;
e) She had her hopes raised by her generous boss.
37 - The expression “a host of” (l.10-11) can be replaced by:
a) countless; b) imminent; 
c) hidden; d) unexpected;
e) imaginary.
38 - When the author states that “Energy consumption depletes ... the 
fuels” (l.15-16) he means that it:
a) runs into them; b) runs them off;
c) runs them down; d) runs them over;
e) runs across them.
39 - “By the same token” (l.25) can be replaced by:
a) likely; b) likewise;
c) likelihood; d) alike;
e) liken. 
40 - The word Therefore in “Therefore, even modern information about 
it is scattered” (l.28-29) introduces an idea of:
a) cause; b) contrast;
c) comparison; d) conclusion;
e) concession.
READ TEXT III AND ANSWER QUESTIONS 41 TO 50:
A Gap in New Baggage Rules
Last Friday should have been a huge headache for air travelers. 
The start of a three-day weekend was also the first day U.S. airlines 
had to screen checked bags for explosives and match bags to 
their owners on originating flights. But things went so smoothly 
that some security experts suspected not all the required checks 
were being performed. Even if they are, a big gap in the new 
regulations could leave passengers vulnerable. Because of a last-
-minute change, the Department of Transportation decided to 
“bag-match” only on originating flights, not on the second or third 
leg of a continuing flight. The airline industry has resisted adopting 
the policy widely, saying it would worsen delays. But proponents 
point to the bomb that brought down PanAm flight 103 in 1988: 
it was placed by a ramp worker in Malta and on two connecting 
flights was never matched to a passenger.
Congressman Jim Oberstar called the bag-match loophole “the 
Achilles’ heel in the security system”. A rule scheduled to take 
effect in December would require screening of all bags. But fewer 
than 10% of the U.S.-approved machines needed are available.
(TIME, Jan 28, 2002:6)
41 - The title refers to a(n):
a) total lack of baggage checking;
b) discontinuous watch over baggage;
c) faulty screening machine;
d) insecure bomb-sniffing apparatus;
e) expertise in baggage follow-up.
42 - According to the text, passengers could have become vulnerable 
because:
a) baggage was too heavy for the aircraft;
b) ongoing flights were being delayed;
c) overbooking was hindering the flights;
d) screening was skipped in some flights;
e) check-ins at airports were too slow.
43 - The difficulty in implementing an effective screening system is that:
a) there are few workers to run U.S.-approved machines;
b) only 10% of U.S.-approved machines have been fixed;
c) more than 10% of the instruments are imported;
d) U.S.-approved machines have too many loopholes;
e) there are not many officially accepted devices around.
PROVAS DE CONCURSOS SIMILARESINGLÊS – EEAr
95
44 - The expression “a huge headache” (l.1) refers to a(n):
a) silly preoccupation; b) enormous worry;
c) constant nuisance; d) strong emphasis;
e) intense desire.
45 - The underlined word in “match bags to their owners” (l.4) intro-
duces an idea of:
a) condition; b) simultaneity;
c) correspondence; d) progression;
e) conclusion.
46 - In “originating flights” (l.5) the noun corresponds to the verb:
a) to flow; b) to fall; c) to fell; d) to fly; e) to flee.
47 - So in “But things went so smoothly that some security experts....” 
(l.5-6) has the same function as the underlined word in:
a) So hot a day was an exception;
b) She decided to go, so he decided to go, too;
c) He was reading; as he was doing so, the phone rang;
d) He hopes to arrive on time; so does she;
e) He was so embarrassed, he couldn’t say a word.
48 - The underlined word in “But things went so smoothly” (l.5) con-
veys the idea of: 
a) ease; b) speed; c) scope; d) care; e) trouble.
49 - The verb form in “the required checks were being performed” 
(l.6-7) is in the same form as the verb in:
a) He was left out from the winning team;
b) He has been writing that letter since Tuesday;
c) He was going home when the accident happened;
d) He has been immersed in his work for hours;
e) He was being closely watched by the police.
50 - The word which they in “Even if they are” (l.7) refers to:
a) experts; b) flights; c) bags; d) checks; e) passengers.
•	 ADMINISTRADOR - 7-12-2006 – TÉCNICO DE 
DEFESA AÉREA E CONTROLE DE TRÁFEGO 
AÉREO
Repliee is more than a humanoid robot − it is an honest-to-good-
ness android, so lifelike that it seems like a real person. It has moist 
lips, glossy hair and vivid eyes that blink slowly. Seated on a stool 
with hands folded primly on its lap at the 2005 World Exposition 
in Japan’s Aichi prefecture, it wore a bright pink blazer and gray 
slacks. For a mesmerizing few seconds from several meters away, 
Repliee was virtually indistinguishable from an ordinary woman 
in her 30s. In fact, it was a copy of one.
Japan is proud of the most advanced humanoids in the world, 
which are expected to eventually be used as the workforce dimi-
nishes among the decreasing and aging population. But why build 
a robot with pigmented silicone skin, smooth gestures and even 
makeup? To Repliee’s creator, Hiroshi Ishiguro, Director of Osaka 
University’s Intelligent Robotics Laboratory, the answer is simple:
“Android science.”
Besides the justification for making robots anthropomorphic and 
bipedal so they can work in human environments with architec-
tural features such as stairs, Ishiguro believes that people respond 
better to very humanlike automatons. Androids can thus elicit 
the most natural communication. “Appearance is very importantto have better interpersonal relationships with a robot,” says the 
42-year-old Ishiguro. “Robots are information media, especially 
humanoid robots. Their main role in our future is to interact 
naturally with people.” Mild colorblindness forced Ishiguro to 
abandon his aspirations of a career as an oil painter. Drawn to 
computer and robot vision instead, he built a guide robot for the 
blind as an undergraduate at the University of Yamanashi. A fan of 
the android character Data from the Star Trek franchise, he sees 
robots as the ideal vehicle to understand more about ourselves.
To imitate human looks and behavior successfully, Ishiguro com-
bines robotics with cognitive science. In turn, cognitive science 
research can use the robot to study human perception, commu-
nication and other faculties. This novel cross-fertilization is what 
Ishiguro describes as android science. In a 2005 paper, he and his 
collaborators explained it thus: “To make the android humanlike, 
we must investigate human activity from the standpoint of 
cognitive science, behavioral science and neuroscience, and to 
evaluate human activity, we need to implement processes that 
support it in the android.”
One key strategy in Ishiguro’s approach is to model his artificial 
creations on real people. He began research four years ago with 
his then four-year-old daughter, casting a rudimentary android 
from her body, but its mechanisms resulted in strange, unnatural 
motion. Humanlike robots run the risk of compromising people’s 
comfort zones. Because the android’s appearance is very similar to 
that of a human, any subtle differences in motion and responses 
will make it seem strange. Repliee, though, is so lifelike that it has
overcome the creepiness factor, partly because of the natural 
way it moves.
Ishiguro wants his next android, a male, to be as authentic as pos-
sible. The model? Himself. The scientist thinks having a robot clone 
could ease his busy schedule: he could dispatch it to classes and 
meetings and then teleconference through it. “My question has 
always been, Why are we living, and what is human?” he says. An 
Ishiguro made of circuitry and silicone might soon be answering 
his own questions.
(adapted from www.scientificamerican.com - May 2006)
11 - The text states that in a near future Japanese robots will be:
a) developed by the Japanese architects.
b) in close cooperation with regular workforce.
c) built to help the aging population exclusively.
d) only perfect copies of young attractive women.
e) helpful for the communication of blind people.
12 -The text informs that Repliee is:
a) an android cast from a four-year-old girl.
b) a humanoid robot built to display silicone makeup.
c) a robot modelled on an elegant and young real woman.
PROVAS DE CONCURSOS SIMILARES INGLÊS – EEAr
96
d) a male robot that compromises people’s comfort zones.
e) a robot clone designed to go to university conferences.
13 - According to the text, Hiroshi Ishiguro believes that:
a) androids improve the quality of human perception.
b) robotic science interferes with architectural features.
c) people communicate comfortably with all sorts of robots.
d) colorblind people need robots to interact with other people.
e) humanoids will be able to interact naturally with humans in 
the future.
14 - According to Hiroshi Ishiguro, the combination of robotics and 
cognitive science:
a) can be defined as android science.
b) can help humans imitate android behavior.
c) may implement new human fertilization techniques.
d) will be disastrous to human relationships in the future.
e) will be used to evaluate the collaboration between sciences.
15 - Ishiguro abandoned an artistic career due to his:
a) interest in computer sciences.
b) deficiency of color perception.
c) talent to invent humanoid robots.
d) involvement with the Star Trek franchise.
e) concerns about his four-year-old daughter.
16 - Check the only correct statement concerning reference.
a) “It” (line 3) – “person”.
b) “one” (line 10) – “robot”.
c) “he” (line 34) – “character”.
d) “it (line 46) – “activity”.
e) “it” (line 62) – “schedule”.
17 - Check the only correct statement.
a) “decreasing” (line 13) is the opposite of diminishing.
b) “ideal” (line 34) could be substituted by appropriate.
c) “collaborators” (line 42) and assistants are antonyms.
d) “rudimentary” (line 50) means sophisticated.
e) “authentic” (line 60) and real are synonyms.
18 - In the text, the writer refers to “robots” using all the synonyms 
below, EXCEPT:
a) mechanical men. b) artificial creations. 
c) humanoids. d) automatons. 
e) androids.
19 - Check the item in which there is a correct correspondence 
between the idea expressed by the word in bold type and the 
idea in italics.
a) “But why build a robot with pigmented silicone skin, … 
makeup?” (lines 14-15) (But addition).
b) “Besides the justification for making robots anthropomorphic 
and bipedal…”. (lines 19-20) (Besides contrast)
c) “Androids can thus elicit the most natural communication.” 
(lines 23-24) (thus condition)
d) “Because the android’s appearance is very similar to that of a 
human ...” (lines 53-54) (Because reason).
e) “Repliee, though, is so lifelike that it has overcome the creepi-
ness factor, ...” (lines 56-57) (though result)
20 - In “An Ishiguro made of circuitry and silicone might soon be 
answering his own questions.” (lines 64-66), “might” can be cor-
rectly substituted by:
a) must. b) shall. c) could. d) had to. e) ought to.
Gabarito
Eletrobrás 2002 – NCE / UFRJ
21. B 22. E 23. A 24. D 25. B
26. C 27. E 28. A 29. B 30. D
Adminstração - 2002 / Noções de Língua Inglesa
15. A 16. D 17. E 18. D 19. A
20. B 21. A 22. C 23. E 24. B
Centrais Elétricas Brasileiras – Eletrobrás - Administra-
ção - 2001
11. C 12. A 13. B 14. B 15. A
16. E 17. B 18. D 19. E 20. C
Língua Inglesa
26. C 27. B 28. C 29. A 30. E
31. D 32. A 33. C 34. B 35. C
36. A 37. A 38. C 39. B 40. D
41. B 42. D 43. E 44. B 45. C
46. D 47. E 48. A 49. E 50. D
Administrador - 7-12-2006 / Técnico de Defesa Aérea e 
Controle de Tráfego Aéreo
Língua Inglesa I
11. B 12. C 13. E 14. A 15. B 
16. D 17. E 18. A 19. D 20. C